Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
X5 xDrive30i
X5 xDrive48i
X5 xDrive35d
X6 xDrive 35i
X6 xDrive 50i
Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Congratulations, and thank you for choosing a BMW.
Thorough familiarity with your vehicle will provide you with
enhanced control and security when you drive it. We therefore
have this request:
Please take the time to read this Owner's Manual and familiarize
yourself with the information that we have compiled for you
before starting off in your new vehicle. It contains important data
and instructions intended to assist you in gaining maximum use
and satisfaction from your BMW's unique range of technical fea-
tures. The manual also contains information on maintenance
designed to enhance operating safety and contribute to main-
taining the value of your BMW throughout an extended service
life.
This manual is supplemented by a Service and Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet for US models or a Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models.
We wish you an enjoyable driving experience.
BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
© 2008 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts,
only with the written consent of
BMW AG, Munich.
US English IX/08, 09 08 500
Printed on environmentally friendly paper,
bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Contents
The fastest way to find specific topics is to use
the index, refer to page 296.
Using this Owner's Manual
4 Notes
7 Reporting safety defects
At a glance
10 Cockpit
16 iDrive
23 Voice activation system
Controls
28 Opening and closing
48 Adjusting
61 Transporting children safely
65 Driving
78 Everything under control
91 Technology for comfort, convenience
and safety
110 Lamps
114 Climate
123 Practical interior accessories
Driving tips
138 Things to remember when driving
Navigation
148 Starting navigation system
150 Destination entry
162 Destination guidance
170 What to do if …
Entertainment
174 On/Off and settings
178 Radio
184 Satellite radio
187 CD player and CD changer
193 DVD changer
200 AUX-In connection
201 USB audio interface
204 DVD system in rear
Communications
220 Telephoning
235 BMW Assist
Mobility
244 Refueling
249 Wheels and tires
258 Under the hood
263 Maintenance
265 Care
269 Replacing components
279 Giving and receiving assistance
Reference
286 Technical data
291 Short commands of voice activation
system
296 Everything from A to Z
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Notes
4
Notes
About this Owner's Manual
We have made every effort to ensure that you
are able to find what you need in this Owner's
Manual as quickly as possible. The fastest way
to find specific topics is to refer to the detailed
index at the back of the manual. If you wish to
gain an initial overview of your vehicle, you will
find this in the first chapter.
Should you sell your BMW some day, please
remember to hand over the Owner's Manual
as well; it is an important component of your
vehicle.
Additional sources of information
If you have additional questions, your BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center is always happy
to advise you.
You can find information on BMW, e.g. on tech-
nology, on the Internet at www.bmwusa.com.
Symbols used
Indicates precautions that must be fol-
lowed precisely in order to avoid the pos-
sibility of personal injury and serious damage to
the vehicle.<
Indicates information that will assist you
in gaining the optimum benefit from your
vehicle and enable you to care more effectively
for your vehicle.<
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.<
< Marks the end of a specific item of informa-
tion.
* Indicates special equipment, country-
specific equipment and optional accessories,
as well as equipment and functions not yet
available at the time of printing.
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to
select individual functions.
{...} Verbal instructions to use with the voice
activation system.
{{...}} Identifies the answers generated by the
voice activation system.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the rel-
evant section of this Owner's Manual for
information on a particular part or assembly.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
5
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
The individual vehicle
When purchasing your BMW, you have decided
in favor of a model with individualized equip-
ment and features. This Owner's Manual
describes the entire array of options and equip-
ment available with a specific BMW model.
Please bear in mind that the manual may con-
tain information on accessories and equipment
that you have not specified for your own vehicle.
Sections describing options and special equip-
ment are marked by asterisks
* to assist you in
identifying possible differences between the
descriptions in this manual and your own vehi-
cle's equipment.
If equipment in your BMW is not described in
this Owner's Manual, please refer to the accom-
panying Supplementary Owner's Manuals.
Editorial notice
BMW pursues a policy of continuous, ongoing
development that is conceived to ensure that
our vehicles continue to embody the highest
quality and safety standards combined with
advanced, state-of-the-art technology. For this
reason, it is possible that the features described
in this Owner's Manual could differ from those
on your vehicle.
For your own safety
Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, e.g. the use of
modern materials and high-performance
electronics, requires specially adapted mainte-
nance and repair methods. Therefore, have cor-
responding work on your BMW performed only
by your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or
a workshop that works according to BMW
repair procedures with correspondingly trained
personnel. If this work is not carried out prop-
erly, there is a danger of subsequent damage
and related safety hazards.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Notes
6
Parts and accessories
For your own safety, use genuine parts
and accessories approved by BMW.
When you purchase accessories tested and
approved by BMW and Genuine BMW Parts,
you simultaneously acquire the assurance that
they have been thoroughly tested by BMW to
ensure optimum performance when installed
on your vehicle.
BMW warrants these parts to be free from
defects in material and workmanship.
BMW will not accept any liability for damage
resulting from installation of parts and accesso-
ries not approved by BMW.
BMW cannot test every product made by other
manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a
BMW safely and without risk to either the vehi-
cle, its operation or its occupants.
Genuine BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and
other products approved by BMW, together
with professional advice on using these items,
are available from all BMW Sports Activity Vehi-
cle Centers.
Installation and operation of non-BMW
approved accessories such as alarms, radios,
amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension
components, brake dust shields, telephones,
including operation of any mobile phone from
within the vehicle without using an externally
mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment, for
instance, CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radios or
similar accessories, may cause extensive dam-
age to the vehicle, compromise its safety, inter-
fere with the vehicle's electrical system, or
affect the validity of the BMW Limited Warranty.
Refer to your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Cen-
ter for additional information.<
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
the emission control devices and sys-
tems may be performed by any automotive
repair establishment or individual using any cer-
tified automotive part.<
California Proposition 65 Warning
California laws require us to issue the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of
automobile components and parts,
including components found in the interior fur-
nishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects and reproductive harm. In
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related accesso-
ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
your hands after handling.
Used engine oil contains chemicals that have
caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always
protect your skin by washing thoroughly with
soap and water.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
7
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly.
Your BMW is covered by the following warran-
ties:
> New Vehicle Limited Warranty
> Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
> Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty
> Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
> California Emission Control System Limited
Warranty
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following applies only to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration,
NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-
1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer, or BMW of
North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
trator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada,
Defect Investigations and Recalls, may call
1-800-333-0510 toll-free from anywhere in
Canada or 1-613-993-9851 from the Ottawa
region and from other countries, or contact
Transport Canada by mail at: Transport
Canada, ASFAD, Place de Ville, Tower C,
330 Sparks Street, Ottawa, ON, K1A 0N5.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
At a glance
This overview of buttons, switches and displays
is intended to familiarize you with your vehicle's
operating environment. The section will also
assist you in becoming acquainted with the
control concepts and options available
for operating the various systems.
At a glance
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Cockpit
10
Cockpit
Around the steering wheel: controls and displays
1 Rear window safety switch 42
2 Opening and closing windows 41
3 Folding exterior mirrors in and out
* 57
4 Adjusting exterior mirrors 57
Automatic curb monitor
* 58
5
Instrument lighting 113
Fog lamps 112
6
Parking lamps 110
Low beams 110
Automatic headlamp control
* 110
Adaptive Head Light
* 112
7
Head-Up Display
* 107
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
At a glance
11
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
9 BMW X6: upshifting or downshifting
with automatic transmission 71
10 Instrument panel 12
13 Ignition lock 65
14 Buttons on steering wheel
15 Horn, entire surface
18 Releasing hood 258
8
Turn signals 73
High beams, headlamp flasher 73
Roadside parking lamps
* 112
Time, date, outside temperature,
Check Control 78, 86
Computer 80
11
Windshield wipers 74
Rain sensor 74
BMW X5: rear window wiper 75
12
Starting/stopping engine and
switching ignition on/off 65
Telephone
*:
> Press: accepting and ending
call, starting dialing
* for
selected phone number and
redialing if no phone number is
selected
> Press longer: redialing
Volume
Activating/deactivating voice
activation system
* 23
Changing radio station
Selecting music track
Scrolling in phone book and in lists
with stored phone numbers
Individually programmable 59
Individually programmable 59
Steering wheel heating
* 59
16
Steering wheel adjustment 58
17
Cruise control
* 75
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Cockpit
12
Instrument panel
1 Indicator lamps for turn signals
2 Speedometer
3 Indicator and warning lamps 13
4 Tachometer 79
5 BMW X5: energy control 79
BMW X6: engine oil temperature 79 or
energy control 79
6 Display for
> Clock/date 78
> Outside temperature 78
> Indicator and warning lamps 85
> Speed of cruise control
* 76
> BMW X5: reserve display for diesel
exhaust fluid 246
7 Display for
> Odometer and trip odometer 78
> Computer 80
> Date and remaining travel distance
for service requirements 82
> Automatic transmission positions 70
> HDC Hill Descent Control 98
> Check Control message present 85
> Adaptive Drive
* 99
> BMW X6: Dynamic Performance
Control 97
8 Fuel gauge 80
9 Resetting trip odometer 78
Displaying service requirement 78
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
At a glance
13
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Indicator and warning lamps
The concept
The indicator and warning lamps can light up in
different combinations and colors.
Some lamps are tested for proper function by
briefly lighting up during starting of the engine
or when the ignition is switched on.
Explanatory text messages
Text messages at the bottom edge of the Con-
trol Display explain the meaning of the dis-
played indicator and warning lamps.
Additional information, e.g. on the cause of a
malfunction and on the corresponding need to
take action can be displayed via the Check Con-
trol, refer to page 85.
In the case of corresponding urgency, this infor-
mation is displayed immediately when the
related lamp lights up.
Indicator lamps without text messages
The following indicator lamps indicate that cer-
tain functions are activated:
With parking brake set 67
With parking brake set for Canadian
models
Fog lamps 112
High beams/headlamp flasher 112
Lamp flashes:
DSC or DTC controls the drive and
braking forces for maintaining vehicle
stability 97
Exhaust-gas values 264
Exhaust values for Canadian models
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Cockpit
14
Around the center console: controls and displays
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
At a glance
15
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
1 Microphone for hands-free mode for
telephone
* and for voice activation
system
* 23
2 Initiating
an emergency request 279
3 Reading lamps 113
4 Glass sunroof 42, 45
5 Interior lamps 113
6 Passenger airbag status lamp 105
7 Control Display 16
Displays for menu navigation
8 Hazard warning flashers
9 Central locking system 29
10 Opening glove compartment 126
11 Automatic climate control with 2-zone
control 115
Automatic climate control with 4-zone
control
* 119
12 Ejecting audio CD
13 Changing
> radio station 174
> track 174
14 Selecting radio, CD and CD changer
15 Selecting AM or FM waveband
16 Ejecting navigation DVD with navigation
system
* 148
18 Controller 16
Turn, press or move horizontally in
four directions
19 Opening start menu on Control Display 17
20 Automatic Hold 67
21 Parking brake 67
22 Adaptive Drive
* 99
23 Programmable memory buttons 21
24 Switching Entertainment sound output
on/off and adjusting volume 174
Manual air distribution 116
Automatic air distribution and
volume 115
Cooling function 117
AUC Automatic recirculated-air
control 117
Maximum cooling 117
Air volume 116
Residual heat utilization 118
Defrosting windows and
removing condensation 116
Rear window defroster 116
Seat heating
* 55, 56
Active seat ventilation
* 56
17
Opening liftgate 33, 35
Active seat
* 57
PDC Park Distance Control
* 91
Rear view camera
* 93
DTC Dynamic Traction Control 97
HDC Hill Descent Control 98
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
iDrive
16
iDrive
iDrive combines the functions of a large number
of switches. This allows these functions to be
operated from a central position. The following
section provides an introduction to basic menu
navigation. The control of the individual func-
tions is described in connection with the rele-
vant equipment.
Controls
1 Control Display
2 button
Opening start menu
3 Controller
With the controller you can select menu
items and make settings:
> move in four directions, arrows 4
> turn, arrow 5
> press, arrow 6
To avoid posing an unnecessary hazard
due to inattention, both to your own vehi-
cle's occupants and to other road users: never
attempt to use the controls or make entries
unless traffic and road conditions allow.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
At a glance
17
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Menu overview
Communication
> Telephone*
> BMW Assist* or BMW TeleServices*
Navigation or onboard information
> Navigation system*
> Onboard information, e.g. for displaying
the average fuel consumption
Entertainment
> Radio
> CD player and CD changer
*
> External audio device
Climate
> Vent settings
> Seat heater distribution
*
> Automatic programs
> Parked-car ventilation
*
menu
> Switching off Control Display
> Tone and display settings
> Settings for traffic information
*
> Settings for your vehicle, e.g. for the central
locking system
> Display of maintenance intervals and dead-
lines for legally mandated inspections
> Settings for telephone
*
Operating principle
From radio readiness, refer to page 65, the fol-
lowing message is shown on the Control Dis-
play:
To hide the message:
Press the controller.
This displays the start menu.
The message is automatically hidden after
approx. 10 seconds.
Start menu
You can call up all the functions of iDrive using
five menu items.
Opening start menu
Press the button.
To open the start menu from the menu:
Press the button twice.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
iDrive
18
Opening menu items of start menu
With the start menu you can open the menu
items Communication, Navigation, Entertain-
ment and Climate by moving the controller to
the left, right, front or rear.
You can open the menu by pressing the con-
troller.
Comfort opening of menu items
Comfort opening offers you:
> Opening of a menu item of the start menu in
the last display shown
> Direct changing between Communication,
Navigation, Entertainment and Climate
without pressing the button
For this purpose, move the controller in the cor-
responding direction and hold it for longer than
approx. 2 seconds.
Displays in menu
1 Each menu is divided into fields.
The respective active field is highlighted.
2 A symbol indicates the last selected menu
item of the start menu:
1 Menu items are usually grouped in horizon-
tal or vertical lists.
2 In these lists, arrows indicate the possibility
of accessing other menu items that are not
currently visible.
3 Settings are displayed graphically or
numerically.
Communication
Navigation or onboard information
Entertainment
Climate
menu
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
At a glance
19
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Operating principle at a glance
Basic operation via iDrive is described in this
view.
You can view the individual steps under Set-
tings on Control Display, Brightness of Control
Display, refer to page 89.
1 Selecting menu item:
> Turn the controller; the highlight moves
> Menu items shown in white can be
selected by highlighting
2 Activating menu item:
> Press the controller
> New menu items are displayed or the
function is carried out
3 Selecting menu item: refer to 1
4 Changing between fields:
> Briefly move the controller left, right, for-
ward or back
> Release controller
> Active field appears lighter
5 Adjusting settings:
> Turn controller
> Graphic display, numerical value or text
displays can be changed
> Confirmation by changing field
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
iDrive
20
Status information
1 Display for:
> Entertainment:
Radio, CD
> Telephone
* in "Communication":
Name of linked mobile phone, network
search or no network
> "BMW Assist"
*:
Existing voice connection with a service
from BMW Assist
2 Entertainment sound output off
3 Display for traffic information
*, TI:
Traffic information for the navigation sys-
tem can be received and transmission is
switched on
4 Display for:
> New entries present in "Missed calls"
*
> Roaming active
5 Telephoning
* possible if the mobile
phone is paired in the vehicle
Mobile phone network reception
strength, display dependent on mobile
phone
6 Time
Other displays:
The status information is temporarily hidden
when there are Check Control instructions or
inputs via the voice activation system
*.
Assistance window*
Additional information can be displayed in the
assistance window:
> The computer or the trip computer
> The arrow or map view with a navigation
system
*
> The current position
Selecting display
1. Move the controller to the right to change to
the assistance window and press the con-
troller.
2. Select a menu item.
3. Press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
At a glance
21
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Switching assistance window off/on
1. Move the controller to the right to change to
the assistance window and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "Assist. window off" and press the
controller.
To switch on, change to the assistance window
and press the controller.
Switching Control Display
off/on
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Display off" and press the control-
ler.
To switch on, press the controller.
Programmable memory
buttons
You can save and run certain functions of iDrive
on the programmable memory buttons:
> Destinations of navigation
> Telephone, phone numbers
*
> Entertainment:
> Radio station
> CD
> CD compartment of CD changer
*
> AUX
The assignment of the programmable buttons
is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Saving function
Destinations of navigation
1. Select destination, e.g. in the destination
list or the address book.
2. Press the ... button longer
than 2 seconds.
Special features:
> With the destination guidance system and
the map view started, the current destina-
tion is stored.
> During destination entry via a map, the
coordinates at the cursor are stored, not the
current destination.
Telephone, phone numbers
1. Enter the phone number or select it in a
list of the stored phone numbers, e.g. of the
"A - Z" list.
2. Press the ... button longer
than 2 seconds.
If a name is assigned to the phone number, the
name will also be stored.
Entertainment
In the Entertainment menu, the sound source
currently heard, e.g. a radio station, is stored,
regardless of the selection on the Control Dis-
play.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
iDrive
22
1. Select the desired function, e.g. radio sta-
tion or CD.
2. Press the ... button longer
than 2 seconds.
If the vehicle is equipped with two drives,
the current track is stored for CDs with
compressed audio files.<
Running function
Press the ... button.
The function is run immediately. This means,
for example, that when a phone number is
selected, the connection is also established, or
when a navigation destination is called up, des-
tination guidance is started.
Displaying button assignment
You can display the assignment of the buttons
by touching them with your finger. Please do
not wear gloves when doing so. Touching with
an object, e.g. a pen, does not function.
Displaying short info
Touch the ... button.
The assignment of the buttons is displayed.
Destination of navigation system
Entertainment source
Telephone, phone number
Not assigned
Displaying detailed information
Touch and hold the ... button.
Deleting button assignments
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. Select "Programmable Memory Keys" and
press the controller.
6. Select "Delete assignment of all memory
keys" and press the controller.
7. Select "Yes" and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
At a glance
23
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Voice activation system
The concept
The voice activation system allows you to con-
trol operation of various vehicle systems with-
out ever removing your hands from the steering
wheel.
Individual menu items on the Control Display
can be spoken as commands. This frees you of
having to use the controller.
The voice activation system transforms your
oral commands into control signals for the
selected systems and provides support in the
form of instructions or questions.
The voice activation system uses a special
microphone located in the area of the interior
rearview mirror, refer to page 14.
Precondition
Via iDrive, set the language that applies for the
voice activation system in order to enable iden-
tification of the spoken commands. To set the
language of iDrive, refer to page 90.
Symbols in Owner's Manual
Voice commands
Activating voice command system
1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
This symbol on the Control Display and
an acoustic signal tell you that the voice
activation system can respond to com-
mands.
2. Say the command.
The command is displayed on the Control
Display.
This symbol is shown on the Control Display
when you can say additional commands.
If no other commands are possible, then oper-
ate the equipment via iDrive.
Terminating or canceling voice
command system
Press the button on the steering wheel
or
*
{...} Say the specified commands word for
word.
{{...}} Indicates responses of the voice acti-
vation system.
{Cancel}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Voice activation system
24
Commands
Having possible commands read aloud
You can have the system read aloud the possi-
ble commands related to the selected menu
item on the Control Display.
To have the system list the possible com-
mands:
For example, if you have selected "CD", the
system will read aloud the possible commands
for operating the CD player and the CD
changer
*.
Opening help
Using alternative commands
There are often a number of commands to run a
function, e.g.:
Running functions directly with short
commands
With short commands you can carry out certain
functions directly, regardless of which menu
item is selected, refer to page 291.
Opening start menu
Example: selecting a track
1. Switch on Entertainment sound output if
necessary.
2. Press the button on the steering wheel.
5. Press the button on the steering wheel.
{Options}
{Help}
{Radio on} or {Turn radio on}
{Main menu}
3. {Entertainment}
The system says:
{{Entertainment}}
4. {CD}
The system says:
{{CD drive switched on}}
6. Select a track, e.g.:
{Track 1}
The system says:
{{Track 1}}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
At a glance
25
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Notes
The mobile phone can also be operated
with voice commands, refer to
page 231.<
For voice commands, bear the following in
mind:
> Say the commands and numbers smoothly
and at normal volume, avoiding excessive
emphases and pauses. This also applies to
spelling when entering the destination.
> Always issue commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
> When selecting a radio station, use the
common pronunciation of the station name.
> For entries in the voice-activated phone
book, only use names in the language of the
voice activation system and no abbrevia-
tions.
> Keep doors, windows, and glass sunroof
*/
panorama glass sunroof
* closed in order to
avoid unpleasant outside noise.
> Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information for complete control of your vehicle.
Its extensive array of features and accessories,
both for driving and for your own safety,
comfort and convenience, are described here.
Controls
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Opening and closing
28
Opening and closing
Keys/remote control
Each remote control contains a battery which is
automatically charged in the ignition lock while
driving. Drive a longer distance with each
remote control at least twice a year to keep the
battery charged. For comfort access
*, the
remote control contains a replaceable battery,
refer to page 41.
Depending on which remote control is detected
by the vehicle during unlocking, different set-
tings are called up and carried out in the vehicle,
refer to Personal Profile, page 28.
Information on the required maintenance is also
stored in the remote control, refer to Service
data in remote control, page 263.
Integrated key
Press button 1 to unlock the key.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
> Driver's door, refer to page 32
> Floor panel flap in cargo bay, refer to
page 132
New remote controls
To obtain additional or replace lost keys, new
remote controls with an integrated key are
available at your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle
Center.
Personal Profile
The concept
You can set a number of functions of your BMW
individually according to your preferences. Per-
sonal Profile ensures that most of these set-
tings are stored for the remote control currently
in use without you having to do anything. When
the vehicle is unlocked, the corresponding
remote control is detected and the settings
stored for it are called up and carried out.
This means that you will always find your BMW
set to your own personal settings even if
another person with his/her own remote control
and settings has used the vehicle since the last
time you drove it. The individual settings are
stored for a maximum of four remote controls,
for two with comfort access
*.
Personal Profile settings
Details on the settings are provided on the
specified pages.
> Behavior of the central locking system
when unlocking vehicle, refer to page 30
> Automatic locking of the vehicle, refer to
page 32
> Programming buttons
on steering wheel,
refer to page 59
> Displays on Control Display:
> Brightness of the Control Display, refer
to page 89
> Measuring units for consumption, route/
distances, temperature, and pressure,
refer to page 89
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
29
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
> Language on Control Display, refer to
page 90
> 12h/24h clock format, refer to page 89
> Date format, refer to page 89
> Lighting settings:
> Triple turn signal activation, refer to
page 73
> Welcome lamps, refer to page 110
> Pathway lighting, refer to page 111
> Daytime driving lamps
*, refer to
page 111
> PDC Park Distance Control
*: optical warn-
ing, refer to page 92
> Rear view camera
*:
> Selecting functions, refer to page 93
> Type of display, refer to page 95
> Head-Up Display
*: selection, brightness
and position of display, refer to page 107
> Automatic climate control: AUTO program
and intensity, cooling function, and auto-
matic recirculated air control/recirculated
air mode, temperature, air distribution, tem-
perature in the upper body region, refer to
text starting on page 115
> Programmable memory buttons: selecting
stored functions, refer to page 21
> Positions of driver's seat, outside mirrors,
and steering wheel
*, refer to page 50
> Adaptive Drive
*: selected chassis and sus-
pension tuning, refer to page 99
> Audio sources: volume and tone settings,
refer to page 175
> Radio:
> Display of stored stations, refer to
page 178
> Switching RDS Radio Data System on/
off
*, refer to page 181
> Phone: volume setting, refer to
pages 226, 232
Central locking system
The concept
The central locking system functions when the
driver's door is closed.
The system simultaneously engages and
releases the locks on the following:
> Doors
> Liftgate
> Fuel filler door
Operating from outside
> via the remote control
> via the door lock
> with comfort access
* via the door handles
The interior lamps and the courtesy lamps
* are
also switched on and off with the remote con-
trol. The alarm system
is armed/disarmed at the
same time.
You can find more detailed information on the
alarm system
on page 38.
Operating from inside
Via the button for central locking, refer to
page 32. The fuel filler door is not locked.
In an accident of sufficient severity, the central
locking system automatically unlocks the vehi-
cle. In addition, the hazard warning flashers and
interior lamps come on.
Opening and closing:
Using remote control
Persons or animals left unattended in a
parked vehicle can lock the doors from
the inside. Always take along the remote control
when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can
then be opened from the outside.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Opening and closing
30
Unlocking
Press the button.
This unlocks the vehicle.
Setting unlocking behavior
You can set whether the first press of the button
unlocks only the driver's door or the entire vehi-
cle.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Door locks" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Central locking" and press the con-
troller.
7. Select "Unlock button" and press the con-
troller.
8. Select a menu item:
> "All doors"
Press the button once to unlock the
entire vehicle.
> "Driver's door only"
Press the button once to unlock only
the driver's door and the fuel filler door.
Press the button twice to unlock the
entire vehicle.
9. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Comfort opening
Press and hold the button. The windows and
the glass sunroof
*/panorama glass sunroof*
are opened.
Locking
Press the button.
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
persons are inside because unlocking
from the inside is not possible without special
knowledge.<
Switching on interior lamps
With vehicle locked:
Press the button.
You can also use this function to locate your
vehicle in parking garages etc.
Panic mode*
You can also trigger the alarm system in case of
danger:
Press the button for at least 3 seconds.
Switch off alarm: press any button.
Unlocking liftgate
Press the button for approx. 1 second.
The liftgate will open slightly, regardless of
whether it was previously locked or unlocked.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
31
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
During opening, the liftgate pivots back
and up. Ensure that adequate clearance is
available before opening.
To prevent accidentally locking yourself out,
never lay the remote control in the cargo bay.
A previously locked liftgate is also locked again
after closing.<
If pointed or sharp-edged objects could
strike the rear window while driving, be
sure to provide protection around all edges.
Failure to do so could result in damage to the
heating conductors of the rear window.<
Setting confirmation signals
You can activate or deactivate the confirmation
signals.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Door locks" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Confirmation" and press the con-
troller.
7. Select the desired signal.
8. Press the controller.
The signal is activated.
Malfunctions
The remote control may malfunction due to
local radio waves. Should the remote control fail
to operate due to interference of this kind,
unlock and lock the vehicle via the door lock
using a key.
If it is no longer possible to lock the vehicle
using the remote control, then the battery is
discharged. Use this remote control during an
extended drive; this will recharge the battery,
refer to page 28.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov-
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
LX8766S
LX8766E
LX8CAS
LX8CAS2
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
> This device must not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
> this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or
changes to these devices could void the
user's authority to operate this equipment.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Opening and closing
32
Opening and closing:
Using door lock
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
persons are inside because unlocking
from the inside is not possible without special
knowledge.<
When unlocking
1. Turning the key once unlocks the driver's
door and the fuel filler door.
2. Turning the key a second time unlocks the
remaining doors and the liftgate.
Convenience operation
You can use the door lock to operate the win-
dows and the glass sunroof
*/panorama glass
sunroof
*.
Turn and hold the key in the positions for
unlocking or locking.
Watch during the closing process to be
sure that no one is injured. Rotating the
key back into the initial position stops the
movement.<
Manual operation
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
turn a key all the way to the right or left in the
door lock to lock or unlock the driver's door.
Opening and closing:
From inside
This button serves to unlock or lock doors and
the liftgate, with the front doors closed. It does
not activate the anti-theft system. The fuel filler
door remains unlocked.
You can also set the situations in which the
vehicle is locked.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Door locks" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Central locking" and press the con-
troller.
7. Select a menu item:
> "Relock door if not opened"
The central locking system automati-
cally locks the vehicle after a short time
when no door has been opened.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
33
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
> "Lock after driving"
The central locking system automati-
cally locks the vehicle as soon as you
start to drive.
8. Press the controller.
The setting is selected.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Unlocking and opening
> Either unlock the doors together with the
button for the central locking system and
then pull the door handle above the armrest
or
> pull on the door handle of each door twice:
the first time unlocks the door, the second
time opens it.
Locking
> Use the central locking button to lock all of
the doors simultaneously, or
> press down the lock button of a door.
To prevent you from being locked out, the
open driver's door cannot be locked using
the lock button.
Persons or animals left unattended in a
parked vehicle can lock the doors from
the inside. Always take along the remote control
when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can
then be opened from the outside.<
Doors
Automatic soft closing*
To close the doors, merely push them gently.
The closing process will then be carried out
automatically.
Make sure that the closing path of the
doors is clear; otherwise injuries may
result.<
BMW X5: liftgate
During opening, the liftgate pivots back
and up. Ensure that adequate clearance is
available before opening.<
Opening from inside
Press the button: the liftgate opens somewhat
unless it has been locked.
Opening from outside
Press the button on the liftgate or the button
on the remote control for approx. 1 second:
The liftgate opens somewhat. It can be swung
upward.
Opening manually
In case of an electrical malfunction:
1. From the cargo bay, press out the handle in
the liftgate, refer to arrow, with a screw-
driver and pull. The liftgate is unlocked.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Opening and closing
34
2. Open the liftgate and press in the handle.
The liftgate is locked again as soon as it is
closed.
Closing
Make sure that the closing path of the lift-
gate is clear, otherwise injuries may
result.<
The handle recesses on the interior trim of the
liftgate make it easier to pull down.
If pointed or sharp-edged objects could
strike the rear window while driving, be
sure to provide protection around all edges.
Failure to do so could result in damage to the
heating conductors of the rear window.<
Automatic liftgate operation*
Adjusting opening height
You can adjust how far the liftgate is to open.
When adjusting the opening height, make
sure that at least approx. 4 in/10 cm of
clearance is available above the liftgate. Other-
wise, the ceiling height could be insufficient for
the opened liftgate if, for example, the loading
state changes.<
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Door locks" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Tailgate" and press the controller.
7. Turn the controller. The adjustment is
applied; the field can be changed.
Opening liftgate
The liftgate opens automatically when you:
> Press the button on the outside of the lift-
gate when the vehicle is unlocked.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
35
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
> Press the button in the center console.
> Press the button on the remote control
for approx. 1 second.
To stop the opening process:
> Press the button on the outside of the lift-
gate.
> Press and hold the button on the remote
control.
> Press the button on the inside of the lift-
gate.
> Press the button on the center console
again.
The opening process is interrupted if you
set the vehicle in motion.<
Closing liftgate
Make sure that the closing path of the lift-
gate is clear, otherwise injuries may
result.<
Function requirement:
The tailgate is closed.
The liftgate closes automatically when you
press the button on the inside of the liftgate.
To stop the closing process:
> Press the button on the inside of the lift-
gate.
> Press the button on the outside of the lift-
gate.
Closing is not canceled when you put the
vehicle into motion.<
Manually opening or closing
In case of an electrical defect of the automatic
liftgate operation function:
1. Manually release the liftgate, refer to
page 33.
2. Open or close the liftgate slowly and with-
out making sudden movements.
BMW X5: tailgate
Opening
Pull the lever and swing the tailgate downward.
The open tailgate can support loads of up
to 550 lbs./250 kg.<
Closing
Fold the tailgate up and press closed.
BMW X6: liftgate
During opening, the liftgate pivots back
and up. Ensure that adequate clearance is
available before opening.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Opening and closing
36
Opening from inside
Press the button: the liftgate opens somewhat
unless it has been locked.
Opening from outside
Press the button on the liftgate or the button
on the remote control for approx. 1 second:
The liftgate opens somewhat. It can be swung
upward.
Opening height*
You can open the liftgate to two heights. Unlock
the liftgate and swing it upward.
Completely opening liftgate
If the liftgate is in the lower position, pull it down
approx. 12 in/30 cm and then release it.
Do not push the liftgate up from the lower
position; otherwise, it can spring back and
cause personal injury.<
Adjusting opening height
You can set the liftgate to open immediately
into the upper position or to initially only open to
the lower position.
1. To open the liftgate completely, see above.
2. For the lower position, position 1:
Turn sleeves of both liftgate supports in the
direction of the arrow until the line markings
align in position 1.
For the upper position, position 2:
Turn sleeves of both liftgate supports in the
direction of the arrow until the line markings
align in position 2.
With automatic liftgate operation
* you
can set the opening height using iDrive,
refer to page 37.<
Opening manually
In case of an electrical malfunction:
1. From inside the cargo bay, use a screw-
driver to push out cover 1 on the liftgate.
2. Push catch 2 in the direction of the arrow.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
37
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
3. Open the liftgate and press the cover back
into place.
The liftgate is locked again as soon as it is
closed.
Closing
Make sure that the closing path of the lift-
gate is clear, otherwise injuries may
result.<
The handle recesses on the interior trim of the
liftgate make it easier to pull down.
If pointed or sharp-edged objects could
strike the rear window while driving, be
sure to provide protection around all edges.
Failure to do so could result in damage to the
heating conductors of the rear window.<
Automatic liftgate operation*
Adjusting opening height
You can adjust how far the liftgate is to open.
When adjusting the opening height, make
sure that at least approx. 4 in/10 cm of
clearance is available above the liftgate. Other-
wise, the ceiling height could be insufficient for
the opened liftgate if, for example, the loading
state changes.<
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Door locks" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Tailgate" and press the controller.
7. Turn the controller. The adjustment is
applied; the field can be changed.
Opening liftgate
The liftgate opens automatically when you:
> Press the button on the outside of the lift-
gate when the vehicle is unlocked.
> Press the button in the center console.
> Press the button on the remote control
for approx. 1 second.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Opening and closing
38
To stop the opening process:
> Press the button on the outside of the lift-
gate.
> Press and hold the button on the remote
control.
> Press the button on the inside of the lift-
gate.
> Press the button on the center console
again.
The opening process is interrupted if you
set the vehicle in motion.<
Closing liftgate
Make sure that the closing path of the lift-
gate is clear, otherwise injuries may
result.<
The liftgate closes automatically when you
press the button on the inside of the liftgate.
To stop the closing process:
> Press the button on the inside of the lift-
gate.
> Press the button on the outside of the lift-
gate.
Closing is not canceled when you put the
vehicle into motion.<
The liftgate also closes automatically
without pressing the button if it is loaded
with an additional weight of approx. 11 lbs./5 kg,
e.g. snow or ice.<
Manually opening or closing
In case of an electrical defect of the automatic
liftgate operation function:
1. Manually release the liftgate, refer to
page 36.
2. Open or close the liftgate slowly and with-
out making sudden movements.
Alarm system
The concept
The vehicle alarm system responds:
> When a door, the hood, or the liftgate is
opened
> To movements in the vehicle: interior
motion sensor, refer to page 39
> To changes in the vehicle's tilt if someone
attempts to steal the wheels or tow the
vehicle
> To interruptions in battery voltage
Unauthorized operations are briefly signaled by
the alarm system:
> with an acoustic alarm
> by switching on
the hazard warning flashers
> by flashing the high beams
Arming and disarming alarm system
When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with
the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm
system is armed or disarmed at the same time.
With the system armed, the liftgate can also be
opened using the button of the remote con-
trol, refer to page 30. When the liftgate is
closed, it is once again locked and monitored.
Switching off alarm
> Unlock the vehicle using the remote control,
refer to page 30.
> Insert the remote control all the way into the
ignition lock.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
39
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Indicator lamp displays
> The indicator lamp under the interior rear-
view mirror flashes continuously: the sys-
tem is armed.
> The indicator lamp flashes after locking:
The doors, hood, or liftgate are not properly
closed. Even if you do not close the alerted
area, the system begins to monitor the
remaining areas, and the indicator lamp
flashes continuously after approx. 10 sec-
onds. However, the interior motion sensor
is not activated.
> The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking:
your vehicle has not been disturbed while
you were away.
> The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
until the remote control is inserted into the
ignition lock, however for a maximum of
approx. 5 minutes: your vehicle has been
disturbed while you were away.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm
system reacts, e.g. in case of an attempted
wheel theft or towing.
Interior motion sensor
In order for the interior motion sensor to func-
tion properly, the windows and glass sunroof
*/
panorama glass sunroof
* must be completely
closed.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
may be switched off at the same time. This pre-
vents unintentional alarms, e.g. in the following
situations:
> In stacking garages
> When transporting on car-carrying trains,
by sea or on a trailer
> When animals are to remain in the vehicle
Switching off tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Press the button on the remote control
again as soon as the vehicle is locked.
The indicator lamp lights up briefly and then
flashes continuously. The tilt alarm sensor and
the interior motion sensor are switched off until
the next time the vehicle is unlocked and subse-
quently locked again.
Comfort access*
Comfort access enables you to access your
vehicle without having to hold the remote con-
trol in your hand. It is sufficient to carry the
remote control with you, e.g. in your jacket
pocket. The vehicle automatically detects the
related remote control in the immediate vicinity
or in the interior.
Comfort access supports the following func-
tions:
> Unlocking/locking vehicle
> Comfort closing
> Opening liftgate
> Starting engine
Functional requirements
> The vehicle can only be unlocked if the
vehicle detects that the remote control car-
ried is not located in the vehicle interior.
> The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Opening and closing
40
> The engine can only be started if the vehicle
detects that the remote control is located in
the vehicle.
Comparison with ordinary remote
control
You can control the functions mentioned previ-
ously with the comfort access or by pressing
the buttons on the remote control. Therefore,
please familiarize yourself with the information
on opening and closing beginning on page 28
beforehand.
The special features when using comfort
access are described in the following.
Should a short delay occur when opening
or closing the windows or the glass sun-
roof
*/panorama glass sunroof*, the system
checks whether a remote control is located in
the vehicle. Please repeat opening or closing if
necessary.<
Releasing
Completely grasp a door handle, arrow 1.
This corresponds to pressing the button.
Locking
Touch the area highlighted in the picture,
arrow 2, with your finger for approx. 1 second.
This corresponds to pressing the but-
ton.
Please make sure that all electronic sys-
tems/consumers are switched off before
locking to save the battery.<
Comfort closing
Hold a finger or the back of a hand on the sur-
face, arrow 2.
The windows and the glass sunroof
*/panorama
glass sunroof
* are closed.
Watch during the closing process to be
sure that no one is injured. Removing the
hand from the door handle immediately stops
the closing process.<
Opening liftgate
Press the button on the liftgate.
This corresponds to pressing the button.
If a remote control accidentally left in the
cargo bay is detected in the locked vehi-
cle after the liftgate is closed, then the liftgate
opens again. The hazard warning flashers flash
and a signal
* sounds.<
Switching on radio readiness
By briefly pressing the Start/Stop button, you
switch on the radio readiness, refer to page 65.
When doing so, do not depress the brake
pedal, otherwise the engine will start.<
Starting engine
You can start the engine or switch on the igni-
tion if a remote control is located in the interior
of the vehicle. It need not be inserted in the igni-
tion lock, refer to page 65.
As long as no remote control is detected in the
vehicle, it is only possible to restart the engine
within approx. 10 seconds after it is switched off
if no door has been opened.
Switching off engine
> Remote control not in ignition lock:
After switching off the engine, the transmis-
sion is automatically switched into trans-
mission position P.
> Remote control in ignition lock:
If transmission position N is engaged, the
transmission remains in this position after
the engine is switched off.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
41
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Before driving into a car wash
The vehicle can roll if you proceed according to
the following steps:
1. Insert remote control into ignition lock.
2. Depress brake pedal.
3. Engage transmission position N.
4. Release the parking brake.
5. Switch off the engine.
6. Leave the remote control in the ignition
lock.
Malfunction
The comfort access function may malfunction
due to local radio waves. Then open or close the
vehicle with the buttons on the remote control
or with a key. To start the engine following this,
insert the remote control in the ignition lock.
The warning lamp in the instrument
panel lights up when an attempt is
made to start the engine: starting the
engine is not possible. The remote control is
not in the vehicle or has a malfunction. Take
along the remote control into the vehicle or
have it checked. Insert another remote control
into the ignition lock if necessary.
The warning lamp in the instrument
panel lights up when the engine is
running: the remote control is no
longer in the vehicle. After switching off the
engine, the engine can only be started again
within approx. 10 seconds if no door has been
opened.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
panel lights up and a message
appears on the Control Display:
Replace the battery of the remote control.
Replacing battery
The remote control for comfort access contains
a battery which must be replaced if necessary.
1. Remove integrated key from remote con-
trol, refer to page 28.
2. Remove cover.
3. Lay in new battery with positive side facing
upward.
4. Press cover closed.
Dispose of used batteries at a collection
point or at your BMW Sports Activity
Vehicle Center.<
Windows
To prevent injuries, exercise care when
closing the windows and keep them in
your field of vision until they are shut.
Always take along the remote control when you
leave the vehicle, otherwise children could, for
example, operate the windows and injure them-
selves.<
Opening, closing
> Press switch to resistance point:
The window continues to open as long as
you keep the switch pressed.
> Press switch beyond resistance point:
The window opens automatically. Pressing
the switch again stops the opening move-
ment.
You can close the windows in the same manner
by pulling the switch.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Opening and closing
42
Separate switches for the rear windows are
located in the rear.
For information on using convenience opera-
tion at the door lock or with the remote control,
refer to page 30 or 32.
For information on comfort closing with comfort
access, refer to page 40.
After switching off ignition
You can still operate the windows with the
remote control removed or the ignition
switched off for approx. 1 minute, as long as
neither of the front doors has been opened.
Pinch protection system
If the closing force rises beyond a predefined
threshold during closing, the system will stop
moving the window prior to lowering it again
slightly.
Despite the pinch protection system,
inspect the window's travel path prior to
closing it, as the safety system might fail to
detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as
thin objects, and the window would continue
closing.
Do not install any accessories in the range of
movement of the windows, otherwise the pinch
protection system will be impaired.<
Closing without pinch protection
system
In case of danger from outside or if, for example,
ice on the window prevents normal closing, pro-
ceed as follows:
1. Pull the switch beyond the resistance point
and hold. The pinch protection system is
limited and the window opens slightly if the
closing force exceeds a certain value.
2. Pull the switch beyond the resistance point
and hold again within approx. 4 seconds.
The window closes without the pinch pro-
tection system.
Safety switch
With the safety switch, you can prevent the rear
windows from being opened or closed via the
switches in the rear passenger area, by chil-
dren, for example. The LED lights up when this
safety feature is activated.
Always press the safety switch when chil-
dren ride in the rear, otherwise uncon-
trolled closing of the windows could lead to
injuries.<
BMW X5: panorama glass
sunroof*
The panorama glass sunroof is ready for opera-
tion with the ignition switched on, refer to
page 65.
To prevent injuries, exercise care when
closing the panorama glass sunroof and
keep it in your field of vision until it is closed.
Always take along the remote control when you
leave the vehicle, otherwise children could, for
example, operate the roof and injure them-
selves.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
43
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Raising, opening, closing
Raising
Press the switch.
The closed sunroof is raised and the sliding
visor opens slightly.
Do not use force to close the sliding visor
with the glass sunroof in its raised posi-
tion, otherwise the mechanism will be dam-
aged.<
Opening, closing
Sliding visor
You can move the sliding visor independently
with the sunroof closed or raised.
> Slide the switch back to the resistance
point.
The sliding visor opens as long as you keep
the switch in this position.
> Briefly press the switch back beyond the
resistance point.
The sliding visor will open automatically.
Briefly pressing the switch stops the
motion.
You can close the sliding visor in a similar man-
ner by sliding the switch forwards.
Panorama glass sunroof
With the sliding visor open, proceed as
described under Sliding visor.
For information on using convenience opera-
tion at the door lock or with the remote control,
refer to page 30 or 32.
For information on comfort closing with comfort
access, refer to page 40.
Opening and closing sunroof and
sliding visor together
Briefly press the switch beyond the resistance
point twice consecutively.
Briefly pressing the switch stops the motion.
Comfort mode
> Press the switch twice with the sunroof
open:
The sunroof is raised.
> When the sunroof is raised, briefly press the
switch twice in the opening direction:
The sunroof is opened all the way.
Comfort position
In the comfort position, the sunroof is not com-
pletely open; this reduces wind noise in the
passenger compartment.
Each time the panorama glass sunroof is com-
pletely opened or closed, it stops in the comfort
position. If desired, continue the motion follow-
ing this with the switch.
After switching off ignition
You can still operate the roof for approx.
1 minute, as long as no door has been opened.
Pinch protection system
If the panorama glass sunroof or sliding visor
encounter resistance when closing from
roughly one third of the sunroof opening or
when closing from the raised position, the clos-
ing action is interrupted and the panorama
glass sunroof and sliding visor reopen a little.
Despite the pinch protection system,
inspect the sunroof's travel path prior to
closing it, as the safety system might fail to
detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as
very thin objects, and the sunroof would con-
tinue closing.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Opening and closing
44
Closing without pinch protection
system
In case of danger from outside, slide the switch
forward beyond the resistance point and hold.
The roof closes without the pinch protection
system.
Following interruptions in electrical
power supply
After a power loss, the sunroof may only
respond to the raise command. Then have the
system initialized. BMW recommends having
this work carried out by your BMW Sports
Activity Vehicle Center.
Moving manually*
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
move the sunroof manually:
1. Remove trim piece. To do so, gently lift the
corner of the trim piece with a screwdriver.
2. Using the screwdriver, press in the clamps
one after the other, arrows 1, tilt the cover
panel down, arrow 2, and remove.
3. Release and disconnect the motor plug.
This significantly reduces the effort
required for the manual movement.
4. Insert the Allen wrench
* from the onboard
tool kit, refer to page 269, into the opening
provided. Move the panorama glass sunroof
in the desired direction.
5. Reconnect the plug.
6. Clip the trim piece into the cover panel,
arrow 1. Then fold the cover panel forward
until it audibly clicks into place, arrow 2.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
45
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
BMW X6: glass sunroof*,
electric
The glass sunroof is ready for operation when
the ignition is switched on, refer to page 65.
To prevent injuries, exercise care when
closing the glass sunroof and keep it in
your field of vision until it is closed.
Always take along the remote control when you
leave the vehicle, otherwise children could, for
example, operate the roof and injure them-
selves.<
Raising
Press the switch.
The closed glass sunroof is raised and the slid-
ing visor opens slightly.
Do not use force to close the sliding visor
with the glass sunroof in its raised posi-
tion, otherwise the mechanism will be dam-
aged.<
Opening, closing
> Slide the switch back to the resistance
point.
The glass sunroof and the sliding visor open
together as long as you continue to hold the
switch in this position.
> Briefly press the switch back beyond the
resistance point.
The glass sunroof and the sliding visor open
automatically. Briefly pressing the switch
stops the motion.
You can close the glass sunroof in a similar
manner by sliding the switch forward. The slid-
ing visor remains open and can be closed by
hand.
For information on using convenience opera-
tion with the remote control or at the door lock,
refer to page 30 or 32.
For information on convenience closing with
comfort access, refer to page 40.
Automatic opening and closing
Briefly press the switch beyond the resistance
point.
The following movements are also automatic:
> With the sunroof open, press the switch:
The sunroof is opened all the way.
> With the sunroof raised, briefly press the
switch in the opening direction: the sunroof
is opened all the way.
Briefly pressing the switch stops the motion.
Comfort position
In the comfort position, the sunroof is not com-
pletely open; this reduces wind noise in the
passenger compartment.
Each time the glass sunroof is opened or closed
all the way, it stops in the comfort position. If
you wish, you can continue the motion by actu-
ating the switch.
After switching off ignition
You can still operate the roof for approx.
1 minute, as long as no door has been opened.
Pinch protection system
If the glass sunroof meets with resistance from
about the middle of the roof opening when clos-
ing or when lowering from the raised position,
the closing process is interrupted and the glass
sunroof opens all the way.
Despite the pinch protection system,
inspect the sunroof's travel path prior to
closing it, as the safety system might fail to
detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as
very thin objects, and the sunroof would con-
tinue closing.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Opening and closing
46
Closing without pinch protection
system
When there is danger outside the vehicle, pro-
ceed as follows:
1. Slide the switch forward past the resistance
point and hold it there. The pinch protection
system is limited and the sunroof opens
slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain
value.
2. Within about 4 seconds, slide the switch
forward again beyond the resistance point
and hold it there. The roof closes without
the pinch protection system.
Following interruptions in electrical
power supply
After a power loss, the sunroof may only
respond to the raise command. Then have the
system initialized. BMW recommends having
this work carried out by your BMW Sports
Activity Vehicle Center.
Moving manually*
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
move the sunroof manually:
1. Remove trim piece. To do so, gently lift the
corner of the trim piece with a screwdriver.
2. Using the screwdriver, press in the clamps
one after the other, arrows 1, tilt the cover
panel down, arrow 2, and remove.
3. Release and disconnect the motor plug.
This significantly reduces the effort
required for the manual movement.
4. Take the Allen wrench
* from its bracket in
the onboard tool kit, refer to page 269, and
insert it into the opening provided. Move the
glass sunroof in the desired direction.
5. Reconnect the plug.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Adjusting
48
Adjusting
Sitting safely
The ideal sitting position can make a vital con-
tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In the
interaction with the safety belts, the head
restraints and the airbags, the seat position
plays an important role in an accident. To
ensure that the safety systems operate with
optimal efficiency, we strongly urge you to
observe the instructions contained in the fol-
lowing section.
For additional information on transporting chil-
dren safely, refer to page 61.
Airbags
Always maintain an adequate distance
between yourself and the airbags. Always
hold the steering wheel by its rim with hands at
the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions, to mini-
mize the risk of injuries to your hands and arms
in the event of airbag deployment.
No one and nothing is to come between the air-
bags and the seat occupant.
Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the
front passenger side as a storage area. Make
sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly
and does not rest feet or legs on the instrument
cluster, otherwise leg injuries can occur if the
front airbag is triggered.
Make sure that occupants do not rest their head
on the side or head airbag, otherwise injuries
can occur if the airbags are triggered.<
Even if you adhere to all the instructions, inju-
ries resulting from contact with airbags cannot
be fully excluded, depending on the circum-
stances. The ignition and inflation noise may
provoke a mild hearing loss in extremely sensi-
tive individuals. This effect is usually only tem-
porary.
For airbag locations and additional information
on airbags, refer to page 105.
Head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of spinal injury in the event of an accident.
Adjust the head restraint so that its center
is approx. at ear level. Otherwise there is
increased danger of injury in the event of an
accident.<
BMW X5: push the head restraints of the 3rd
row seats
* into the top position.
Head restraints, refer to page 52.
Safety belts
Before every drive, make sure that safety belts
are being worn at all of the occupied seats. Air-
bags complement the safety belt as an addi-
tional safety device, but they do not represent a
substitute.
BMW X5: depending on its equipment, your
vehicle has either five or seven seats, which are
all provided with a safety belt.
Never allow more than one person to
wear a single safety belt. Never allow
infants or small children to ride in a passenger's
lap. Make sure that the belt lies low around the
hips in the lap area and does not press on the
abdomen. The safety belt may not lie across the
neck, rub on sharp edges, be routed over solid
or breakable objects or be pinched. Wear the
safety belt without twisting, snugly across the
lap and shoulders, as close to the body as pos-
sible. Otherwise the belt can slip over the hips
in the lap area in a frontal impact and injure the
abdomen. Avoid wearing clothing that prevents
the belt from fitting properly and pull the belt in
the upper body area periodically to readjust the
tension, in order to avoid a reduction in the
restraint of the safety belt.
If the center safety belt in the rear is used, the
larger backrest half must be locked, refer to
page 132, otherwise the center safety belt has
no restraining action.<
Safety belts, refer to page 54.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
49
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Seats
Note before adjusting
Never attempt to adjust or calibrate your
seat while the vehicle is moving. The seat
could respond with unexpected movement, and
the ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to
an accident.
Never adjust manually adjustable seats while
the vehicle is moving, as otherwise the restrain-
ing effect of these seats during accidents could
be reduced.
Also on the passenger side, do not incline the
backrest too far to the rear while the vehicle is
being driven, otherwise there is a danger in the
event of an accident of sliding under the safety
belt, eliminating the protection normally pro-
vided by the belt.<
Also observe the information on damage to
safety belts on page 55 and on the height of the
head restraints on page 52.
Adjusting manually*
To ensure that the safety systems con-
tinue to provide optimized protection,
observe the adjustment instructions on
page 48.<
Pull the lever and slide the seat to the desired
position. After you release the lever, move the
seat forward or backward slightly so that it
engages fully.
Thigh support*
Pull the lever and adjust the thigh support in the
longitudinal direction.
Adjusting electrically
To ensure that the safety systems con-
tinue to provide optimized protection,
observe the adjustment instructions on
page 48.<
1 Longitudinal direction
2 Height
3 Seat tilt
4 Backrest
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Adjusting
50
Differs depending on seat:
1 Backrest
2 Height
Additional depending on seat:
1 Backrest width
*
2 Shoulder support*
3 Thigh support*
4 Lumbar support*
Backrest width*
The width of the backrest can be changed with
the side wings to adjust the side support to your
own needs.
Shoulder support*
This also supports the back in the shoulder
area, provides a relaxed sitting position and
helps relieve stress on the shoulder muscles.
The shoulder support is also used to adjust the
distance of the head restraint from the back of
the seat occupant's head.
Lumbar support*
You can also adjust the contour of the backrest
to obtain additional support in the lumbar
region.
The upper hips and spinal column receive sup-
plementary support to help you maintain a
relaxed, upright sitting position.
> Increase or decrease curvature: press front
or rear section of switch.
> Shift curvature up or down: press upper or
lower section of switch.
Seat, mirror and steering
wheel memory*
You can store and request two different posi-
tions for the driver's seat and passenger seat
*,
exterior rearview mirrors, and steering wheel.
The adjustment of the backrest width and lum-
bar support is not stored in the memory.
Storing
1. Switch on radio readiness or ignition, refer
to page 65.
2. Set the desired seat, exterior mirror and
steering wheel positions.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
51
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
3. Press the button:
The LED in the button lights up.
4. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2:
The LED goes out.
The positions of the driver's seat, the exte-
rior rearview mirrors, and steering wheel are
stored for the remote control currently in
use.
Calling up automatically
You can choose when the stored positions of
the driver's seat, exterior rearview mirrors, and
steering wheel are activated.
> Calling up when unlocking vehicle
> Calling up when opening driver's door
When using this feature, always make
sure that the footwell behind the driver's
seat is empty and unobstructed. Failure to do
so could cause injury to persons or damage to
objects behind the seat as a result of a rearward
movement of the seat.<
The system cancels the adjustment procedure
when you briefly press one of the seat adjust-
ment switches or one of the memory buttons.
Selecting calling up automatically
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Door locks" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Central locking" and press the con-
troller.
7. Select "Last seat pos." and press the con-
troller.
8. Select "After unlocking" or "After door
opened".
9. Press the controller.
Deactivating calling up automatically
Select "Deactivated" and press the controller.
Calling up manually
Do not call up a position from the memory
while the vehicle is moving. There is a risk
of accident from unexpected movement of the
seat or steering wheel.<
Comfort mode
1. Open the driver's door after unlocking or
switch on radio readiness.
2. Briefly press the desired memory button 1
or 2.
The system cancels the adjustment procedure
when you briefly press one of the seat adjust-
ment switches or one of the memory buttons.
Safety feature
1. Close the driver's door and switch the igni-
tion on or off.
2. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2
and maintain pressure until the adjustment
process has been completed.
If the button was pressed inadvertently:
press the button again; the LED goes out.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Adjusting
52
Head restraints
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of spinal injury in the event of an accident.
Adjust the head restraint so that its center
is approx. at ear level. Otherwise there is
increased danger of injury in the event of an
accident. Only remove the head restraints if the
respective seat is not occupied. Reinstall the
head restraints before transporting passen-
gers, as otherwise the head restraint cannot
provide its protective function.<
Active front head restraints
In the event of a rear-end collision of sufficient
severity, the active head restraint reduces the
distance to the head.
Do not use seat covers or head restraint
covers that could impede the proper
functioning of the active head restraint. Other-
wise, there is no assurance that the active head
restraint will perform its protective function and
it is not possible to take advantage of its injury-
reducing potential in the event of a rear-end
collision.
Have the active head restraints reset after they
are triggered in a rear-end collision. Have this
work carried out only at a BMW Sports Activity
Vehicle Center or at a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel. Otherwise,
correct operation of this safety equipment is not
guaranteed.<
Removal and installation of the front head
restraints should be performed by a BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center.<
Front seats: height adjustment
You can adjust the height of the head restraints
electrically.
Front seats: adjusting distance from
back of head
> Forward: pull up.
> Back: press the button and slide the head-
rest cushion toward the rear.
Do not place any objects behind the
headrest cushion. Otherwise, you can
impair the proper function of the head
restraint.<
Comfort seat*
You can adjust the distance from the back of the
seat occupant's head using the shoulder sup-
port, refer to page 50.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
53
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Adjusting side extensions
You can fold the side extensions on the head
restraint forward for increased lateral support in
the resting position.
BMW X5: rear seats and 3rd row seats*,
adjusting height
> To raise: pull up.
> To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint downward.
In vehicles equipped with 3rd row seats, the
height of the middle head restraint is not adjust-
able.
Removing
1. Pull the head restraint upward to the stop.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head
restraint all the way out.
BMW X5: rear seats
2nd row seats
With a divided* row of seats you can adjust
both sides individually.
Never adjust the 2nd row seats while the
vehicle is moving, as otherwise the pas-
sengers on the 3rd row seats could be injured.
Make sure that the locking devices of the 2nd
row seats engage properly. Otherwise the
restraining effect of the safety belts during an
accident could be reduced.<
Longitudinal direction*
1. Pull the lever and slide the seat into the
desired position.
2. Release the lever and move the seat slightly
forward or back so that it engages properly.
Backrest*
The backrests can be adjusted in four steps.
Pull the lever and apply weight to or remove
weight from the backrest as needed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Adjusting
54
Access to 3rd row seats*
Pull the lever and fold the seat forward.
The handle recess on the interior trim of
the door pillar makes climbing in easier.<
When folding back the 2nd row seats,
make sure that the footwell under the
2nd row seats is clear. Otherwise persons in the
3rd row seats could be injured or objects dam-
aged.<
Warning lamp for 2nd row seats:
Lights up when the 2nd row seats are
not locked. A message also appears
on the Control Display.
3rd row seats*
The 3rd row seats are divided and offer space
for two persons.
Folding up backrest
Before folding the seats up, remove the roll-up
cover, refer to page 130, and if need be, slide
the 2nd row seats slightly forward.
1. Pull the lever, refer to arrow. The backrest is
unlocked.
2. Fold up and engage the backrest.
Make sure that the catch engages
securely. If it is not properly engaged,
transported cargo could enter the passen-
ger compartment during braking or evasive
maneuvers and endanger the vehicle occu-
pants.<
3. Push the head restraints into the top posi-
tion.
Folding backrest down
1. Push down the head restraint, refer to
page 53.
2. Pull the lever, refer to arrows. The backrests
are released.
3. Fold the backrest down.
Safety belts
To ensure that the safety systems con-
tinue to provide optimized protection,
observe the adjustment instructions on
page 48.<
Before every drive, make sure that safety belts
are being worn at all of the occupied seats. Air-
bags complement the safety belt as an addi-
tional safety device, but they do not represent a
substitute.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
55
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Fastening
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in
the belt buckle.
Safety belt reminder for driver's seat
and passenger seat
The indicator lamp lights up and a
signal sounds. A message also
appears on the Control Display.
Please check whether the safety belt is cor-
rectly fastened.
The safety belt reminder is operative at speeds
above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h. It can also be acti-
vated if objects are placed on the passenger
seat.
Releasing
1. Grasp the belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the buckle.
3. Guide the belt into its reel.
The shoulder strap's anchorage point will be
correct for adult seat occupants of every build if
the seat is correctly adjusted, refer to page 49.
BMW X5: the two rear safety belt buckles inte-
grated into the rear seat are for passengers sit-
ting on the left and right. The belt buckle
embossed with the word CENTER is intended
exclusively for use by passengers riding in the
center position.
Damage to safety belts
In the event of loads caused by accidents
or other damage: replace the belt system
including the safety belt tensioners and any
child restraint devices, and have the belt anchor
points checked. Only have this work carried out
at a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or at a
workshop that works according to BMW repair
procedures with correspondingly trained per-
sonnel. Otherwise correct operation of this
safety equipment is not guaranteed.<
Belt-force limiter
The effect of the belt-force limiter on the
driver's seat is dependent on the position of the
driver's seat.
To maintain the long-term accuracy of this
function, the driver's seat must be calibrated if a
corresponding message is displayed on the
Control Display.
Calibrating driver's seat
The warning lamp lights up. A mes-
sage also appears on the Control Dis-
play. Please calibrate the driver's
seat.
1. Move the driver's seat forward until it stops.
2. Move the driver's seat forward again. It
briefly moves toward the front in the pro-
cess.
3. Set the desired seating position again.
The calibration is completed when the message
on the Control Display disappears. Should this
message continue to be displayed, repeat the
calibration. If the message does not disappear
even after repeated calibration, have the sys-
tem checked as soon as possible.
Never carry out calibration while the vehi-
cle is moving, as this can cause accidents.
Make sure that no persons or objects become
wedged during the calibration process, as this
can cause injuries or damage.<
Seat heating*
Front
The temperature setting progresses one step
through its control sequence each time you
press the button. The maximum temperature is
supplied when three LEDs are lit.
To switch off: press the button longer.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Adjusting
56
The temperature is reduced, if need be, down to
no heat in order to reduce the load on the bat-
tery. The LEDs remain lit.
Rear
Operation similar to front seat heating; without
temperature distribution.
Active seat ventilation* and
seat heating*
Front
1 Seat heating
2 Active seat ventilation
Press button 1 or 2 once depending on the
temperature or ventilation position. The LED in
the respective button lights up.
The temperature or ventilation levels are shown
on the Control Display.
The air quantity is reduced and if need be, the
ventilation is switched off in order to reduce the
load on the battery. The LEDs remain lit.
To switch off: press button 1 or 2 longer.
Temperature distribution without
active seat ventilation
The heat output can be distributed variously in
the seat cushion and the backrest.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to open "Cli-
mate".
3. Select "Seat heater distribution" and press
the controller.
4. Move the controller to the left or right to
select "Driver" or "Passenger".
5. Turn the controller. The adjustment is
applied; the field can be changed.
Temperature distribution with active
seat ventilation
The heat output can be distributed variously in
the seat cushion and the backrest.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to open "Cli-
mate".
3. Select "Driver's seat climate" or "Passen-
ger's seat climate" and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
57
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
4. Turn the controller to adjust the distribu-
tion.
The setting is applied.
Heated rear seats
Operation similar to front seat heating; without
temperature distribution, refer to page 55.
Active seat*
The seat cushion is actively varied by alter-
nately raising and lowering the right and left half
of the seat cushion. This reduces muscular ten-
sion and fatigue to help prevent lower back
pain.
Press the button to switch on; the LED lights
up.
The action of the system is reduced and if need
be, switched off in order to reduce the load on
the battery. The LED remains lit.
If you switch off the active seat, it can take up
to 1 minute before the two halves of the seat
cushion have returned to their initial position.
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
The mirror on the passenger's side is
more curved than the driver's mirror.
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than
they appear. Do not estimate the distance of
following traffic based on what you see in the
mirrors; otherwise, there is an increased risk of
accident.<
1 Adjusting
2 Switching to the other mirror or to the auto-
matic curb monitor
3 Folding mirrors in and out
*
Storing the mirror positions, refer to Seat, mir-
ror and steering wheel memory on page 50.
Adjusting manually
The mirrors can also be adjusted manually:
press the edge of the glass.
Folding mirrors in and out*
Pressing button 3 allows you to fold the mirrors
in and out again up to a speed of approx.
12 mph/20 km/h. This is advantageous, for
example, in car washes, narrow streets or for
bringing mirrors that have been manually folded
in back into the correct position.
Folded in mirrors fold out again at a speed of
approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Before going through a car wash, fold the
mirrors in manually, or with button 3, oth-
erwise they could be damaged, depending on
the width of the car wash system.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Adjusting
58
Automatic heating
Below a certain outdoor temperature, both
exterior mirrors are automatically heated when
the motor is running or the ignition is switched
on.
Tilting down passenger-side exterior
mirror – automatic curb monitor*
Activating
1. Slide switch into the driver's side mirror
position, arrow 1.
2. Engage transmission position R.
The mirror glass tilts downward somewhat
on the passenger side. This allows the
driver to see the area immediately adjacent
to the vehicle – such as a curb – when park-
ing, etc.
Deactivating
Slide switch into the passenger side mirror
position, arrow 2.
Interior rearview mirror
To reduce the dazzle effect of following vehi-
cles at night, turn the knob.
Interior and exterior mirrors,
automatic dimming feature*
This feature is controlled by two photocells in
the inside rearview mirror, one on the front and
one on the back.
For trouble-free operation, keep the photocells
clean and do not cover the area between the
interior rearview mirror and the windshield. Do
not attach stickers of any kind to the windshield
in front of the mirror, either.
Steering wheel
Adjusting
Do not adjust the steering wheel while the
vehicle is moving. There is a risk of acci-
dent as the result of unexpected movement.<
The steering wheel can be adjusted in four
directions.
Storing steering wheel positions, refer to Seat,
mirror and steering wheel memory on page 50.
Easy entry/exit*
To facilitate entry and exit, the steering wheel
temporarily moves into the uppermost position.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
59
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Steering wheel heating*
Press the button.
When the steering wheel heater is switched on,
the LED in the button lights up.
Programmable buttons on steering
wheel
You can program the buttons individually.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Steering wheel buttons" and press
the controller.
A list of different functions appears:
> "Navigation voice instructions"
Voice instructions for the navigation
system
*
> "Air recirculation on / off"
Permanently shutting off outside air,
refer to AUC Automatic recirculated-air
control
* on page 117
> "Mute on / off"
Mutes the audio sources
> "Monitor on / off"
Switches the Control Display on/off
> "Telephone list"
*
Display/hide phone book or last list of
stored phone numbers
> "Next entertainment source"
Changes audio source
5. Select the desired function and press the
controller.
6. Select the button if necessary and press the
controller.
You can operate the selected function using the
corresponding button.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Adjusting
60
Operating function
Press the corresponding button on the steering
wheel.
If you have programmed "Navigation voice
instructions" for one of the buttons:
> To switch voice instructions on/off:
Hold the button down.
> To repeat the last voice instruction:
Press the button.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
61
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Transporting children safely
The right place for children
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, otherwise they could endanger
themselves and other persons, e.g. by opening
the doors.<
Children always in rear
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is on the rear seat.
Children younger than 13 years of age or
with a height under 5 ft/150 cm may only
be transported on the 2nd row seats in child
restraint devices which correspond to the age,
weight and height of the child. Otherwise there
is an increased danger of injury in an accident.<
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
device can no longer be used due to their age,
weight and size.
Exception for front passenger seat
Should it be necessary to use a child
restraint device on the front passenger
seat, the front and side airbags on the passen-
ger side must be deactivated. Otherwise, there
is an increased risk of injury for the child if the
airbags are triggered, even with a child restraint
device.<
For more information on automatic deactivation
of the front passenger airbags, refer to
page 106.
Installing child restraint
devices
Follow the child restraint device manufac-
turer's instructions for selection, installa-
tion, and use of child restraint devices. Other-
wise, the degree of protection may be
reduced.<
BMW X5: for equipment with 3rd row
seats
*, make sure that the seat of the 2nd
row seats on which the child restraint device is
mounted is properly locked. Otherwise there is
an increased risk of injury for the child in an
accident.
Do not mount child restraint devices on the
3rd row seats, as otherwise the protection pro-
vided by these child restraint devices may be
reduced.<
On front passenger seat
After mounting a child restraint device on
the front passenger seat, make sure that
the front and side airbags on the front passen-
ger side are deactivated; otherwise, there is an
increased risk of injury if the airbags are trig-
gered.<
Backrest width*
The backrest width adjustment of the
front passenger seat must be completely
open. After installing the child's seat, no mem-
ory position may be called up; otherwise, the
stability of the child's seat on the front passen-
ger seat is reduced.<
1. Open backrest width adjustment com-
pletely, refer to page 50.
2. Install child's seat.
Child seat security
The rear safety belts, in the BMW X5 all of the
safety belts of the 2nd and 3rd
* row seats and
the passenger safety belt can be locked to pre-
vent them from being pulled out in order to
secure child restraint devices.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Transporting children safely
62
Locking safety belt
1. Secure the child restraint device with the
belt.
2. Pull out the belt webbing completely.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and
pull taut against the child restraint device.
The safety belt is locked.
Unlocking safety belt
1. Open the belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint device.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com-
pletely.
LATCH child restraint fixing
system
LATCH: Lower Anchor and Tethers for CHil-
dren.
Follow the system manufacturer's
instructions on installation and use of
LATCH child restraint devices; otherwise, their
protective function may be reduced.<
Before attaching the child's seat, pull the belt
away from the region of the child restraint fixing
system.
BMW X5: before installing the child's
seat, remove the covers
* from the
mounts for the LATCH anchor fittings, as other-
wise the LATCH anchor fittings have no
restraining effect.<
Make sure that the LATCH mounts have
properly clicked into place and that the
child restraint device is resting snugly against
the backrest. Otherwise, the protective action
may be reduced.<
The mounts for the LATCH anchors are located
at the points indicated by the arrows.
Child restraint device with tether strap
Only use the top tether mounting points
to secure child restraint devices, other-
wise the mounting points could be damaged.
Do not mount child restraint devices on the
3rd row seats in the BMW X5; otherwise the
protection provided by these child restraint
devices may be reduced.<
BMW X5
There are three additional mounting points for
child restraint devices with a tether strap on the
2nd row seats, refer to arrows. Fold out before
using the center mounting point.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
63
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
BMW X6
For child restraint devices with tether strap,
there are two additional attachment points on
the back of the rear seat backrests, refer to
arrows.
Placement of tether strap
Make sure that the tether strap is not
routed over sharp edges and does not
twist on its way to the attachment point; other-
wise, the belt cannot properly secure the child
restraint device in the event of an accident.<
BMW X5
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Tether strap hook
4 Mounting point
5 Backrest
6 Tether strap of child restraint device
When using the cargo bay cover, route the
tether strap through between the backrest of
the 2nd row seats and the cargo bay cover.
BMW X6
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Tether strap hook
4 Mounting point
5 Backrest
6 Tether strap of child restraint device
When using the cargo bay cover, route the
tether strap through between the rear seat
backrest and the cargo bay cover.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Transporting children safely
64
Attaching tether strap to the backrest
of the 2nd row seats
BMW X5:
On outer seats:
1. Slide the head restraint upward.
2. Guide the tether strap between the head
restraint brackets.
3. Hook in the tether strap on the mounting
point with the hook.
4. Slide the head restraint into the bottom
position.
5. Pull tether strap taut.
On center seat with equipment with two rows of
seats:
1. Fold the center armrest somewhat toward
the front.
2. Guide the tether strap through the opening
in the center armrest.
3. Fold back and engage the center armrest.
4. Hook in tether strap on mounting point.
5. Pull tether strap taut.
On center seat with equipment with three rows
of seats:
1. Slide the head restraint upward.
2. Guide the tether strap between the head
restraint brackets.
3. Hook in the tether strap on the mounting
point with the hook.
4. Slide the head restraint into the bottom
position.
5. Pull tether strap taut.
BMW X6:
1. Route tether strap over the middle of the
head restraint.
2. Hook in the tether strap on the mounting
point with the hook.
3. Pull tether strap taut until it compresses the
cushion of the head restraint, thus prevent-
ing the tether strap from sliding off.
On trips
Child-safety locks for rear doors
Slide down the safety lever on the rear doors:
The door can now be opened from the outside
only.
Safety switch for power windows
Always press the safety switch for the power
windows, refer to page 42, when children are
riding in the rear of the vehicle.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
65
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Driving
Ignition lock
Inserting remote control into ignition
lock
Insert the remote control as far as possible into
the ignition lock.
Radio readiness switches on. Some electronic
systems/consumers are ready for operation.
Comfort access*
With comfort access, only insert the remote
control into the ignition lock in exceptional
cases, refer to page 39.
Removing remote control from ignition
lock
Do not pull the remote control out of the
ignition lock using force, as otherwise
damage may result.<
Before removing the remote control, first press
it in as far as possible to release the locking
device.
The ignition is switched off if it was still
switched on.
Start/Stop button
Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the
radio readiness or the ignition on and off.
Pressing the Start/Stop button with the
brake pedal depressed starts the
engine.<
Radio readiness
Some electronic systems/consumers are ready
for operation. The time and outside tempera-
ture are displayed in the instrument panel.
Radio readiness is automatically switched off:
> when the remote control is removed from
the ignition lock
> with comfort access
* by touching the sen-
sitive surface above the door lock, refer to
Locking on page 40
Ignition on
All electronic systems/consumers are ready for
operation. The odometer and the trip odometer
are displayed in the instrument panel, refer to
page 78.
Please switch off the ignition and the
electronic systems/consumers which are
not required when the engine is not running to
save the battery.<
Radio readiness and ignition off
All indicator lamps, warning lamps, and displays
in the instrument panel go out.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Driving
66
The ignition switches off automatically
* if the
driver's door is opened. Pressing the start/stop
button again switches the ignition back on.
For example, the ignition is not switched off in
the following situations:
> the brakes are actuated
> the low beams are switched on
Starting engine
Do not run the engine in closed rooms,
otherwise the inhalation of toxic exhaust
gases can cause unconsciousness and death.
The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide,
an odorless and colorless, but highly toxic gas.
Never leave an unattended vehicle with the
engine running, as such a vehicle represents a
potential safety hazard.
To prevent the vehicle from rolling, always
engage transmission position N or P and set the
parking brake before leaving the vehicle with
the engine running.<
Do not allow the engine to warm up by leaving it
running while the vehicle remains stationary.
Instead, begin to drive at a moderate engine
speed.
The engine starts when you depress the
brake pedal while pressing the Start/Stop
button.<
Avoid frequent starting in quick succes-
sion or repeated starting attempts in
which the engine does not start. Otherwise, the
fuel is not burned or inadequately burned and
there is a danger of overheating and damaging
the catalytic converter.<
Remote control in ignition lock or with comfort
access in vehicle, refer to page 39.
1. Depress brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The system responds by automatically engag-
ing the starter for a certain period and automat-
ically disengaging it as soon as the engine
starts.
Diesel engine
When the engine is cold and outside tempera-
tures are below approx. 327/06, the starting
process may be briefly delayed by an automatic
preglow phase. The preglow indicator lamp
lights up in the instrument panel and a message
appears on the Control Display.
Switching off engine
When leaving the vehicle, always take
along the remote control.
Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth-
erwise, the vehicle could roll.<
Procedure
1. Engage transmission position P with the
vehicle stationary.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Remove the remote control from the igni-
tion lock, refer to page 65.
Before driving into a car wash
The vehicle can roll if you proceed according to
the following steps:
1. With comfort access
*: insert the remote
control into the ignition lock.
2. Depress brake pedal.
3. Engage transmission position N.
4. Release the parking brake or deactivate
Automatic Hold.
5. Switch off the engine.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
67
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Transmission position P will be engaged:
> automatically after approx. 30 minutes
> if you remove the remote control from the
ignition lock
Parking brake
The concept
Your BMW is equipped with an electromechan-
ical parking brake.
The parking brake is primarily intended to pre-
vent the vehicle from rolling while parked.
You can use the parking brake in two ways:
> manually, by pulling and pushing the button
> automatically, by activating Automatic
Hold, refer to page 67
With the engine stopped, the parking brake acts
on the rear wheels via an electromechanical
system. When the engine is running, the park-
ing brake acts on the disk brakes of the front
and rear wheels via the brake hydraulics.
Setting manually
Pull button. The parking brake is set.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
panel lights up red. The parking brake is
set.
Indicator lamp on Canadian models.
The remote control does not have to be
inserted into the ignition lock for the parking
brake to be set.
While driving
If exceptional circumstances should make it
necessary to set the parking brake while the
vehicle is in motion, pull on the button longer.
The vehicle continues to brake forcefully for as
long as you pull on the button.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
panel lights up red, a chime sounds and
the brake lamps light up.
Indicator lamp on Canadian models.
As soon as you brake the vehicle almost to a
stop, i.e., down to a speed of approx. 2 mph/
3 km/h or below, the parking brake remains set.
Releasing manually
Press the button with the brake depressed.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
panel goes out.
Indicator lamp on Canadian models.
When leaving the vehicle, always take
along the remote control; this precaution
prevents children from releasing the parking
brake, for example.<
Automatic Hold
The concept
This function assists you as you drive by auto-
matically setting and releasing the parking
brake, e.g. when you are stopped at a traffic sig-
nal or in stop-and-go traffic.
When Automatic Hold is activated, the vehicle is
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Driving
68
automatically held in place when standing.
When driving up inclines, the system prevents
your vehicle from rolling backward in an undes-
ired way.
After the engine is started, the system can be
activated and deactivated at any time the
driver's seat is occupied until the next time the
engine is switched off.
Activating
Press the button. The LED in the button lights
up and the indication AUTO H appears in the
instrument panel.
Automatic Hold is activated.
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic
Hold, the indicator light in the instru-
ment panel also lights up in green.
Indicator lamp on Canadian models.
Deactivating
Press the button again, the LED in the button
and the indication AUTO H in the instrument
panel go out.
Automatic Hold is deactivated.
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,
then press on the brake pedal to deactivate it.
When the parking brake is set manually, refer to
page 67, Automatic Hold is automatically deac-
tivated.
Driving
With Automatic Hold activated, the vehicle is
automatically prevented from rolling after it
comes to a stop.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
panel lights up in green.
Indicator lamp on Canadian models.
If the transmission is in a drive position, simply
press on the gas pedal to begin driving. The
brake is automatically released and the indica-
tor lamp goes out.
Before driving into the car wash, deacti-
vate Automatic Hold; otherwise, the park-
ing brake will be automatically set after stop-
ping and the vehicle can no longer roll.<
Parking
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold
and you switch off the motor, the parking brake
is automatically set.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
panel changes from green to red.
Indicator lamp on Canadian models.
The parking brake is not set if you have
already switched off the engine while the
vehicle is rolling to a stop.
Automatic Hold is deactivated.<
You can manually release the parking brake
even after switching off the motor as long as the
remote control remains in the ignition lock, refer
to page 67. Use this function in car washes, for
example.
When leaving the vehicle, always take
along the remote control; this precaution
prevents children from releasing the parking
brake, for example.<
For your safety
Automatic Hold is automatically deactivated
when:
> the engine is switched off
> no one is detected in the driver's seat when
the engine is running
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
69
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
> the vehicle is braked to a stop during driv-
ing.
In the instrument panel, the indicator
lamp changes from green to red and
the indication AUTO H goes out.
Indicator lamp on Canadian models.
Before you start to drive, either release the
parking brake manually, refer to page 67, or
reactivate Automatic Hold, refer to page 68.
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine
running, shift the selector lever into posi-
tion P of the automatic transmission and make
sure that the parking brake is set. Otherwise,
the vehicle may begin to roll.<
Malfunction
If the parking brake fails or malfunctions, secure
the vehicle against rolling, e.g. with a wheel
chock, if you leave the vehicle.
Releasing parking brake manually
In the event of an electrical power loss or elec-
trical malfunction, you can release the parking
brake manually.
Before manually releasing the parking
brake and each time you park the vehicle
without setting the parking brake, make sure
that the automatic transmission is in position P,
refer to page 71. Be sure to pay attention to the
information in the instrument panel.
In addition, secure the vehicle against rolling,
e.g. with a wheel chock. Otherwise there is a
danger that the vehicle could roll if parked on a
steep slope.<
If it becomes necessary to also release the
transmission lock of the automatic transmission
manually, follow this sequence:
1. If necessary, start by releasing the parking
brake manually.
2. Then release the automatic transmission's
transmission lock manually, refer to
page 72.
Jump starting and towing, refer to information
starting on page 280.
Releasing
1. Open the left-hand side panel in the cargo
bay.
2. Remove the first-aid kit
* and the warning
triangle
* if necessary. Close the bracket of
the warning triangle.
3. Insert the releasing tool, contained in the
onboard tool kit under the floor panel, refer
to page 269, at the releasing point.
4. Firmly pull the releasing tool upward against
the mechanical resistance, refer to arrow,
until a considerable increase in force is felt
and the parking brake is then clearly heard
to release.
5. Stow the releasing tool, warning triangle
*
and first-aid kit* and close the left side
panel in the cargo bay.
Only have a malfunction corrected by the
nearest BMW Sports Activity Vehicle
Center or a workshop that works in accordance
with BMW guidelines and uses appropriately
trained personnel. If the parking brake has been
released manually in response to a malfunction,
only technicians can return it to operation.<
Following manual release, the actual sta-
tus of the parking brake may deviate from
that displayed by the indicator lamp.<
Operation after interruptions in power
supply
The parking brake can only be used again
if it was manually released due to an inter-
ruption in the supply of electrical power. Other-
wise the operation of the parking brake is not
ensured and there is a danger of the vehicle roll-
ing despite the parking brake being set.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Driving
70
Procedure
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Press the button with the brake depressed.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
panel goes out as soon as the parking
brake is ready for operation again.
Indicator lamp on Canadian models.
Any noises which occur are normal. Start-up
may take several seconds.
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic
In addition to fully automatic operation, you can
also manually shift with the Steptronic, refer to
page 71.
Transmission positions
P R N D M/S + –
To prevent the vehicle from creeping
after you select a driving position, main-
tain pressure on the brake pedal until you are
ready to start.<
Displays in instrument panel
P R N D, DS*, S1* through S6*, M1 through M6
The transmission position and the currently
engaged gear are displayed.
Engaging transmission position
> You can only engage transmission posi-
tions D, R or N when the engine is running.
> With the vehicle stationary, depress the
brake pedal before shifting out of P or N;
otherwise the shift command will not be
executed: shiftlock.
To prevent the vehicle from creeping
after you select a driving position,
maintain pressure on the brake pedal until
you are ready to start.<
Shifting into D, R, N
Briefly press the selector lever in the desired
direction, beyond a resistance point if neces-
sary. When shifting out of P or into R, simulta-
neously press button 1.
The engaged transmission position is displayed
on the selector lever.
The selector lever immediately returns to the
center position when released.
Engaging P
Press button P.
Also observe the additional information on the
automatic transmission.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
71
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
The transmission automatically shifts into
park if you release the driver's safety belt
and open the driver's door with the engine run-
ning while in reverse or drive.
The picture from the rear view camera
* and
PDC Park Distance Control
* on the Control
Display is hidden.<
R Reverse
Select only with the vehicle stationary.
An interlock prevents inadvertent gearshifts
into transmission position R. To deactivate the
interlock, press the release button 1.
P Park
Select only with the vehicle stationary. The rear
wheels are locked.
P is engaged automatically as soon as
you switch off the engine unless N is
engaged and on vehicles with comfort access
the remote control is inserted in the ignition
lock, refer to page 65.<
N Neutral
Can, for example, be engaged in automatic car
washes. The vehicle can roll.
N remains engaged even after the engine
is switched off whenever you leave the
remote control in the ignition lock. This function
is used, for example, in a car wash, refer to
page 66. After approx. 30 minutes P is auto-
matically engaged.<
D Drive, automatic position
Position for normal vehicle operation. All for-
ward gears are available.
Under normal operating conditions, the fuel
consumption is lowest when driving in posi-
tion D.
Kick-down
The kick-down mode provides maximum accel-
eration.
Press the accelerator pedal beyond the
increased resistance at full throttle.
Sport program and manual mode M/S
Press selector lever out of transmission
position D toward the left:
The sport program is activated and DS is
displayed in the instrument cluster; in the
BMW X6, S1 through S6 are displayed. This
position is recommended for a performance-
oriented driving style.
When the selector lever is pressed forward or
back, the manual mode is activated and the
Steptronic shifts the gear. The instrument
panel shows M1 through M6.
Upshifts and downshifts are executed only
when they will result in a plausible combination
of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example,
a downshift that would cause the engine to
overrev will not be executed by the system. The
selected gear is briefly displayed in the instru-
ment panel, followed by the current gear.
To use the automatic function again, press the
selector lever to the right into position D.
BMW X6: changing gears using shifting
paddles on steering wheel
The shifting paddles make it possible to quickly
change gears since both hands can remain on
the steering wheel.
> In automatic mode D, if you shift using the
shifting paddles on the steering wheel, then
the system switches into manual mode.
> If, after a certain amount of time, you neither
shift with the shifting paddles nor acceler-
ate, then the system switches back into
automatic mode D.
With the transmission position M/S
selected, the manual mode remains
active.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Driving
72
> Upshifting: pull on one of the shifting pad-
dles, arrows +.
> Downshifting: press on one of the shifting
paddles, arrows –.
Upshifts and downshifts are executed only
when they will result in a plausible combination
of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example,
a downshift that would cause the engine to
overrev will not be executed by the system. The
selected gear is briefly displayed in the instru-
ment panel, followed by the current gear.
Manually releasing and engaging
transmission lock
In case of a power failure, e.g. when the
battery is drained or disconnected, or an
electrical malfunction, the transmission lock
must be manually released, as otherwise the
rear wheels are blocked and the vehicle cannot
be towed.<
Step on the brake when manually releas-
ing the transmission lock; otherwise,
there is a danger of the vehicle rolling.<
The transmission lock should only be released
for towing. Reengage the transmission lock
after parking the vehicle at its destination.
If it also becomes necessary to manually
release the parking brake, follow this sequence:
1. Secure the vehicle against rolling.
2. Manually release the parking brake, refer to
page 69.
3. Manually release the transmission lock of
the automatic transmission.
Releasing
1. Slide back the cover of the cup holder and
remove the floor mat on the bar between
the cup holders, arrow 1.
2. Open the cover in the bottom of the cup
holder with the releasing tool from the
onboard tool kit, page 269, refer to arrow 2.
3. If necessary, unlock the lock
* with the inte-
grated key of the remote control, refer to
page 28, and remove it.
4. Insert the releasing tool into the opening,
arrow 3.
5. Turn the releasing tool as far as possible,
arrow 4, and then press downward and
leave it in. The transmission lock is
released.
Engage the transmission lock after park-
ing the vehicle at its destination. Other-
wise there is a danger of the vehicle rolling.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
73
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Locking
1. Pull out the releasing tool.
The transmission lock is engaged again.
2. If necessary, insert the lock
* and lock it.
3. Close the cover in the bottom of the cup
holder and lay in the mat again.
4. Close the cover of the cup holder and stow
the releasing tool.
Information on jump starting and towing, from
page 280.
Turn signals/headlamp
flasher/high beams
1 High beams
2 Headlamp flasher
3 Turn signals
Using turn signals
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
To switch off manually, press the lever up to the
resistance point.
Atypically rapid flashing of the indicator
lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb
needs to be replaced.<
Signaling briefly
Press lever to resistance point and hold for as
long as you wish to signal.
Triple turn signal activation
Press the lever up to the resistance point. The
turn signal flashes three times.
You can activate or deactivate this function.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Lighting" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Triple turn signal" and press the
controller.
Triple turn signaling is activated.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Driving
74
Washer/wiper system
1 Switching on wipers
2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe
3 Activating/deactivating intermittent wipe or
rain sensor
*
4 Cleaning windshield and headlamps*
5 Setting interval for intermittent wipe or sen-
sitivity of the rain sensor
*
Switching on wipers
Pull the lever upward, arrow 1.
The lever automatically returns to its initial posi-
tion when released.
Normal wiper speed
Press once.
The system reverts to operation in the intermit-
tent mode with the vehicle stationary.
Fast wiper speed
Press twice or press beyond the resistance
point.
The system reverts to normal speed with the
vehicle stationary.
Intermittent operation or rain sensor*
With the rain sensor, the wiper operation is con-
trolled automatically as a function of the rain
intensity. The rain sensor is located on the
windshield, directly in front of the interior rear-
view mirror.
Activating intermittent operation or
rain sensor
Press the button, arrow 3. The LED in the but-
ton lights up.
Setting interval for intermittent wipe or
sensitivity of the rain sensor
Turn the serrated dial 5.
Deactivating intermittent operation or
rain sensor
Press the button again, arrow 3. The LED goes
out.
Deactivate the rain sensor when passing
through an automatic car wash. Failure to
do so could result in damage caused by undes-
ired wiper activation.<
Cleaning windshield and headlamps*
Pull the lever, arrow 4.
The system sprays washer fluid against the
windshield and activates the wipers for a brief
period.
When the vehicle lighting system is switched
on, the headlamps are also cleaned at regular
and appropriate intervals.
Do not use the washers if there is any
danger that the fluid will freeze on the
windshield. If you do so, your vision could be
obscured. To avoid freezing, use a washer fluid
antifreeze, refer to Washer fluid. Do not use
washing mechanisms when the washer fluid
reservoir is empty, otherwise you will damage
the washer pump.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
75
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Windshield washer nozzles
Both windshield washer nozzles are automati-
cally heated with the engine running or the igni-
tion switched on.
BMW X5: rear window wiper
1 Intermittent mode. When reverse gear is
engaged, continuous operation is switched
on automatically
2 Cleaning the rear window
Do not use washing mechanisms when
the washer fluid reservoir is empty, other-
wise you will damage the washer pump.<
Washer fluid
Washer fluid antifreeze is flammable. For
this reason, keep it away from ignition
sources and store only in the closed original
container out of reach of children. Otherwise,
there is the danger of bodily injury. Always
observe the instructions for use provided on the
containers.<
Filler neck for washer fluid
Only add washer fluid with the engine
cooled down to exclude contact with hot
engine components. Otherwise there is a dan-
ger of fire and to personal safety if the fluid is
spilled.<
All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser-
voir.
Fill with water and – if required – with a washer
antifreeze, according to manufacturer's recom-
mendations.
In order to maintain the mixture ratio, mix
the washer fluid before filling.<
Capacity
Approx. 6.3 US quarts/6 liters.
Cruise control*
The concept
The cruise control with a braking function is
available for use at speeds of approx. 20 mph/
30 km/h and higher. The vehicle stores and
maintains the speed that you set using the lever
mounted on the steering column. To keep the
specified speed constant, the system brakes if
the engine braking effect is not sufficient on a
downhill grade.
Do not use the cruise control under driv-
ing conditions that do not permit a con-
stant speed, e.g. when driving on winding
roads, in heavy traffic or in poor road conditions
such as snow, rain, ice, and loose road surface.
Otherwise you could lose control of the vehicle
and cause an accident.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Driving
76
One lever for all functions
1 Storing speed and maintaining or increas-
ing
2 Storing speed and maintaining or decreas-
ing
3 Deactivating cruise control
4 Resuming stored speed
Maintaining current speed
Briefly press, arrow 1, or briefly pull, arrow 2
lever.
The speed currently being driven is stored and
maintained. It is indicated on the speedometer
and briefly in the instrument panel.
The controlled speed can drop on uphill grades
if the engine output is insufficient. If the engine
braking effect is not sufficient on a downhill
grade, the system lightly brakes the vehicle.
Increasing speed
Repeatedly press the lever up to or beyond the
resistance point, arrow 1, until the desired
speed is set.
> Each time the lever is pressed to the resis-
tance point, the speed is increased by
approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.
> Each time the lever is pressed beyond the
resistance point, the desired speed
increases by a maximum of 5 mph or
10 km/h.
The system stores the setting and maintains
the set speed.
Accelerating with lever
Accelerate slightly:
Press the lever up to the resistance point,
arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached.
Accelerate more rapidly:
Press the lever beyond the resistance point,
arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached.
The vehicle accelerates without pressure on
the accelerator pedal. The system stores the
setting and maintains the set speed.
Reducing speed
Repeatedly pull the lever up to the resistance
point or beyond, arrow 2, until the desired
speed is displayed.
> Each time the lever is pulled up to the resis-
tance point, the desired speed decreases
by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.
> Each time the lever is pulled beyond the
resistance point, the desired speed is
decreased by a maximum of 5 mph or
10 km/h until the minimum speed of
20 mph or 30 km/h is reached.
The system stores the setting and maintains
the set speed.
Deactivating cruise control
Briefly press the lever up or down, arrow 3.
The displays in the speedometer go out.
In addition, the system is automatically deacti-
vated:
> when braking
> when transmission position N is engaged
> when DTC is activated or DSC is deacti-
vated
> when HDC is activated
> when the parking brake is set
> when driving stability control systems inter-
vene
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
77
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Accelerating does not deactivate the cruise
control. After releasing the accelerator pedal,
the stored speed is reached and maintained
again.
Warning lamp
The warning lamp lights up if the
cruise control has been deactivated
automatically, e.g. by a control inter-
vention of the DSC. A message appears on the
Control Display.
Resuming stored speed
Briefly press the button, arrow 4. The stored
speed is resumed and maintained.
With the ignition switched off, the stored speed
value is deleted and cannot be resumed again.
Displays in instrument panel
1 Stored desired speed
2 Selected desired speed appears briefly
If --- mph or --- km/h temporarily appears
in the instrument panel display, it is possi-
ble that the system prerequisites for operation
are currently not met.<
Malfunction
The warning lamp lights up if the sys-
tem has failed. A message appears on
the Control Display. Detailed informa-
tion is provided from page 85.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Everything under control
78
Everything under control
Odometer, outside
temperature display, clock
1 Knob in the instrument panel
2 Time, outside temperature, and date
3 Odometer and trip odometer
Knob in the instrument panel
> With ignition switched on
Press knob:
Resetting trip odometer
Press the knob for approx. 5 seconds:
Displaying service requirements, refer to
page 82
> With ignition switched off
Press knob:
Briefly displaying time, outside temperature
and odometer
Units of measure
To select the respective units of measure, miles
or km for the odometer as well as 7 or 6 for
the outside temperature, refer to page 89.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Time, date, outside temperature
From radio readiness the outside temperature
and the time are displayed.
Setting the time, refer to page 88.
Retrieving date
Press the button on turn signal lever upward;
the date appears.
To set the date, refer to page 89.
Pressing the button upward or downward sev-
eral times changes the display between clock,
outside temperature, date, and Check Control
messages, refer to page 86.
Outside temperature warning
If the display drops to +377/+36, a signal
sounds and a warning lamp lights up. A mes-
sage appears on the Control Display. There is
an increased danger of ice.
Even at temperatures above +377/
+36 ice can form. Therefore, drive care-
fully, e.g. on bridges and sections of road in the
shade, otherwise there is an increased accident
risk.<
Odometer and trip odometer
Resetting trip odometer:
Press knob 1 in the instrument panel with the
ignition switched on.
When vehicle is parked
To briefly display the time, outside temperature
and mileage after the remote control has been
removed from the ignition lock:
Press knob 1 in the instrument panel.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
79
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Tachometer
Do not operate the engine with the needle in the
red overspeed zone of the gauge, refer to arrow.
At high revs in this range, the flow of fuel is
interrupted to protect the engine.
Coolant temperature
Should the coolant, and with it the engine
become too hot, a warning lamp lights up. In
addition, a message appears on the Control
Display.
Checking coolant level, refer to page 262.
Engine oil temperature*
When the engine is at operating temperature,
the engine oil temperature is between approx.
1707/806 and approx. 2507/1206.
When the engine oil temperature is too high, a
warning lamp lights up in the instrument panel.
Energy control*
Displays the current fuel consumption. This
allows you to see whether your current driving
style is conducive to fuel economy with mini-
mum exhaust emissions.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Everything under control
80
Fuel gauge
Fuel tank capacity: approx. 22.5 US gal/
85 liters. You will find information on refueling
on page 244.
If the tilt of the vehicle varies for a longer period,
when you are driving in mountainous areas, for
example, the indicator may fluctuate slightly.
Reserve
After the reserve quantity has been reached, a
message briefly appears on the Control Display;
the remaining range is shown in the computer.
Below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km, the
message remains on the Control Display.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
Computer
Displays in instrument panel
To display the information, press the BC button
on the turn signal lever.
The following information is displayed:
> Cruising range
> Average speed
> Average fuel consumption
> BMW X6: Dynamic Performance Control,
refer to page 97
Cruising range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel. The range is projected
based on the driving style over the last 20 miles/
30 km.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
Average speed
Periods with the vehicle parked and the engine
stopped are not included in the calculations of
average speed.
To reset average speed: press the BC button on
the turn signal lever for approx. 2 seconds.
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the time during which the engine is running.
To reset average fuel consumption:
Press the BC button on the turn signal lever for
approx. 2 seconds.
For different routes
You can display the average speed and average
consumption for two different routes on the
Control Display, refer to the following and to
Trip computer
*.
Displays on Control Display
You can also call up the computer via iDrive.
For operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the right to open
"Navigation".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
81
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Without navigation system*:
Open "Car Data".
3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.
4. Select "Onboard info" and press the con-
troller.
> Estimated time of arrival at destination and
remaining distance:
> Entering a distance manually in the com-
puter, see below.
> Entering a destination in the navigation
system
*, refer to page 150.
> Cruising range
> Average speed
> Average fuel consumption
Resetting values
You can reset the values for the average speed
and average fuel consumption:
1. Select the respective menu item and press
the controller.
2. To confirm your selection, press the con-
troller again.
Entering a distance manually
1. Select "Distance to dest. " and press the
controller.
2. Turn the controller to select the distance to
your destination.
3. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The distance is automatically preset during the
destination guidance of the navigation sys-
tem
*.
Trip computer*
The trip computer is suitable, for example, for a
vacation trip.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Open "Navigation".
Without navigation system
*:
Open "Car Data".
3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.
4. Select "Trip computer" and press the con-
troller.
> Departure time
> Driving time
> Distance traveled
> Average speed
> Average fuel consumption
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Everything under control
82
Starting or stopping the trip computer, or reset-
ting all values:
1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
2. Select the desired menu item.
3. Press the controller.
Display options
You can display the computer or the trip com-
puter in the assistance window.
1. Move the controller to the right to change to
the assistance window and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "Onboard info" or "Trip computer".
3. Press the controller.
Service requirements
The remaining driving distance and the date for
the next maintenance are displayed briefly with
the ignition switched on.
To determine the extent of maintenance
required, you can also display the remaining
distance or the service date individually in the
instrument panel.
1. With the ignition switched on, press the
knob in the instrument panel, refer to
page 78, for approx. 5 seconds until the
service requirements are displayed.
2. Press the knob repeatedly to display the
individual service requirement items.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
83
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Displaying service requirements
1 Knob for selecting display
2 Service requirements
3 Engine oil
4 Legally mandated inspections
*
5 Front brake pads
6 Rear brake pads
7 Brake fluid
The sequence of the displayed maintenance
items can vary. First the data for the next main-
tenance are displayed.
Additional information
You can select a display of more detailed infor-
mation on the maintenance scope on the Con-
trol Display. For operating principle refer to
page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Info sources" and press the control-
ler.
4. Select "Service Info" and press the control-
ler.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Service requirements" is
selected and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Everything under control
84
6. Select "Status" and press the controller.
The display shows a list of selected service and
maintenance procedures, as well as legally
mandated inspections.
You can request more detailed information on
every entry.
Select the entry and press the controller.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Symbols
No service is currently required.
The deadline for service or a legally man-
dated inspection is approaching. Please
arrange a service appointment.
The service deadline has already passed.
Entering deadlines for legally
mandated inspections*
Make sure the date on the Control Display is set
correctly, refer to page 89; otherwise, the effec-
tiveness of CBS Condition Based Service is not
ensured.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Info sources" and press the control-
ler.
4. Select "Service Info" and press the control-
ler.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Service requirements" is
selected and press the controller.
6. Select "Status" and press the controller.
7. Select "State inspection" and press the
controller.
8. Select "Set service date" and press the
controller. The month is highlighted.
9. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
10. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The year is highlighted.
11. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
12. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The date entry is stored.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
85
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Check Control
The concept
The Check Control monitors functions in the
vehicle and issues a message if there is a mal-
function in the monitored systems. This kind of
Check Control message consists of indicator
and warning lamps in the instrument cluster,
and if necessary an acoustic signal and text
messages at the bottom of the Control Display.
Indicator and warning lamps
The indicator and warning lamps can light up in
different combinations and colors.
means that a Check Control message has
been generated. The symbol continues to be
visible even when the Check Control message
disappears after a short time. The warning
lamps and text messages are stored and can be
displayed later, also refer to page 86.
Explanatory text messages
Text messages at the bottom edge of the Con-
trol Display explain the meaning of the dis-
played indicator and warning lamps.
You can display additional information on most
Check Control messages later, e.g. on the
cause of the malfunction and on corresponding
need for action, see below.
In the case of corresponding urgency, this infor-
mation is displayed immediately when the
related lamp lights up.
Exit the displayed information:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press the button in the turn signal lever up or
down.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Everything under control
86
Some Check Control messages are displayed
until the malfunctions have been rectified. They
cannot be hidden. If a number of malfunctions
occur simultaneously, they are displayed in
succession.
Other messages are automatically hidden after
approx. 20 seconds, but remain stored.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
1. Press the button on the turn signal lever
downward. "CHECK OK" or the stored
Check Control messages appear in the dis-
play.
"CHECK OK" is shown if no messages are
present.
Check Control messages are accompanied
by text messages on the Control Display.
2. Press the button to display additional mes-
sages, the time and outside temperature, or
the date.
Displaying additional information later
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Info sources" and press the control-
ler.
4. Select "Service Info" and press the control-
ler.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Check Control messages"
is selected and press the controller.
6. Select a text message and press the con-
troller.
To exit the display:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Indication of malfunction urgency
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
stored Check Control messages are also dis-
played with the following symbols:
No malfunctions are present in the moni-
tored systems.
Malfunctions are present in the moni-
tored systems. Depending on the mal-
function, supplementary information is
shown on the Control Display.
The symbols also indicate the status of the ser-
vice requirements display, refer to page 84.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
87
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Speed limit
You can enter a speed and a Check Control
message indicates when you have reached this
speed. This enables you, for example, to
receive warnings if you exceed a speed limit in
an urban area.
You are only warned of reaching this speed a
second time if your vehicle speed falls below it
again by at least 3 mph/5 km/h.
Displaying, setting or changing limit
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Open "Navigation".
Without navigation system
*:
Open "Car Data".
3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.
4. Select "Limit" and press the controller.
5. Select the speed value and press the con-
troller.
6. Turn the controller to set the limit.
7. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The limit is automatically activated.
Applying your current speed as limit
Select "Select current speed" and press the
controller. The system applies your current
speed as the limit.
Activating limit
Select "On" and press the controller.
Limit is automatically activated.
Stopwatch
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Open "Navigation".
Without navigation system
*:
Open "Car Data".
3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.
4. Select "Stopwatch" and press the control-
ler.
Starting, stopping or resetting
> Select "Start" and press the controller.
The stopwatch starts at the displayed time.
> Select "Reset" and press the controller.
The stopwatch is reset and it restarts if it
was running beforehand.
> Select "Stop" and press the controller.
This stops the timer.
Taking an intermediate time reading
Select "Interim time" and press the controller.
The interim time appears below the ongoing
primary stopwatch count.
All of the remaining functions remain
available at all times while the stopwatch
is running. The stopwatch continues operation
in the background.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Everything under control
88
Settings on Control Display
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button once or twice until
the start menu appears.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
Setting time
1. Turn the controller until "Time / Date" is
selected and press the controller.
2. Move the controller once to the front if nec-
essary to change to the first field from the
top.
3. Turn the controller until "Time" is selected
and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Set time" is
selected and press the controller.
Making settings
1. Turn the controller to set the hours and
press the controller.
2. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller.
The changed time is stored.
Switching on hour signal*
You will hear tones just before each full hour.
Select "Hour memo" and press the controller.
The hour signal is activated.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
89
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Setting time format
1. Select "Time format" and press the control-
ler.
2. Select the desired format and press the
controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Setting date
1. Select "Date" and press the controller.
2. Select "Set date" and press the control-
ler.The first section of the date display is
highlighted, in this case the month.
3. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
4. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The next setting is highlighted.
5. Make the remaining adjustments. After the
last adjustment, the date is stored.
Changing date format
1. Select "Date format" and press the control-
ler.
2. Select the desired format and press the
controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Brightness of Control Display
The brightness is automatically adapted to the
ambient lighting conditions. However, you can
change the basic setting.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Display settings" and press the
controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Brightness" is selected and
press the controller.
6. If necessary, move the controller to the right
to select "Display".
7. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Units of measure
You can change the units of measure for con-
sumption, distances, temperature and pres-
sure.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Language / Units" and press the
controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Units" is selected and press
the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Everything under control
90
6. Select the menu item to be set and press
the controller.
7. Select the desired unit of measure and
press the controller.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Language on Control Display
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Language / Units" and press the
controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Languages" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Text language" and press the con-
troller. You can change the language of the
text displays.
7. Select and activate the desired language by
pressing the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Volume of warning tones*
On vehicles equipped with a single drive, you
can increase or decrease the volume of the
warning tones, e.g. for the safety belt reminder,
compared to the entertainment sound output.
The warning tones have a specified minimum
and maximum volume that cannot be dropped
below or exceeded.
1. Select "Tone / Volume" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "Volume settings" and press the
controller.
3. Change to the second field from the top if
necessary. Select "Warning tones" and
press the controller.
4. If necessary, change to the right-hand field
and turn the controller.
The setting is applied.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
91
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Technology for comfort, convenience and
safety
PDC Park Distance Control*
The concept
The PDC assists you when you are parking.
Acoustic signals and an optical displays
alert
you to the approach of an object in front of
* or
behind your vehicle. To measure the distance,
there are four ultrasonic sensors in each
bumper. The range of these sensors is approx.
7 ft/2 m. But an acoustic warning only sounds at
approx. 24 in/60 cm for the sensors at the
front
* and at the two rear corners and at approx.
5 ft/1,50 m for the middle sensors at the rear.
PDC is a parking aid that can indicate
objects when they are approached
slowly, as is usually the case when parking.
Avoid approaching an object at high speed, oth-
erwise the physical circumstances would mean
that the system warning was too late.<
Automatic activation
Whenever the engine is running or the ignition
is on, each time you move the selector lever into
position R, the PDC system is activated after
approx. 1 second.
Wait this short period before driving off.
Manual activation
Press the button, the LED lights up.
Manual deactivation
Press the button again; the LED goes out.
Automatic deactivation
After driving approx. 165 ft/50 m or at over
approx. 20 mph/30 km/h, the system is
switched off and the LED goes out. You can
reactivate the system manually as needed.
Signal tones
When nearing an object, the position is corre-
spondingly indicated by an interval tone. Thus,
an object detected to the left rear of the vehicle
will be indicated by a signal tone from the left
rear speaker, etc. As the distance between
vehicle and object decreases, the intervals
between the tones become shorter. If the dis-
tance to the nearest object falls to below
roughly 1 ft/30 cm, then a continuous tone
sounds.
An intermittent tone is interrupted after approx.
3seconds:
> if you remain in front of an object that was
only detected by one of the corner sensors
> if you drive parallel to a wall
Adjusting
You can adjust the volume of the warning tones
if the vehicle is equipped with a single drive,
refer to page 90.
Malfunction
The LED in the button flashes and a message
appears on the Control Display. PDC is mal-
functioning. Have the system checked.
To prevent this problem, keep the sensors
clean and free of ice or snow in order to ensure
that they will continue to operate effectively. Do
not spray the sensors with high-pressure clean-
ers for long periods and maintain a distance of
at least 4 in/10 cm to them.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
92
PDC with visual warning
You can also have the system show distances
to objects on the Control Display. Objects that
are farther away are already shown there before
a signal tone sounds.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
If the vehicle is equipped with a rear view cam-
era, refer to Displays on page 95.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Maneuvering aids" is
selected and press the controller.
6. Turn the controller until "View selection" is
selected and press the controller.
7. Select "PDC in main window only" and
press the controller.
The PDC screen is activated.
The display appears on the Control Display as
soon as PDC is activated.
System limits
Even with PDC, final responsibility for
estimating the distance between the
vehicle and any obstructions always remains
with the driver. Even when sensors are pro-
vided, there is a blind spot in which objects can
no longer be detected. The system's detection
of objects is also subject to the physical limits
that apply to all forms of ultrasonic measure-
ment, such as those encountered with tow bars
and trailer couplings, thin or wedge-shaped
objects etc. Low objects already displayed, e.g.
the curb, can also disappear from the detection
area of the sensors again before or after a con-
tinuous tone already sounds. Higher, protrud-
ing objects, e.g. ledges, cannot be detected.
For this reason, drive with care; otherwise, there
is a danger of personal injury or property dam-
age.
Loud sources of sound, inside and outside the
vehicle, could drown out the PDC signal tone.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
93
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Rear view camera*
The concept
The rear view camera in the liftgate displays the
area behind your vehicle on the Control Display.
Also check the traffic situation around the
vehicle during parking and maneuvering
with direct vision, as otherwise danger of an
accident could result, for example, from road
users or objects located outside the picture
area of the rear view camera.<
Switching on
Automatically
With the engine running, shift into reverse.
If the image of the PDC Park Distance
Control appears on the Control Display,
you can switch the image to the rear view cam-
era, refer to Displays on page 95.<
Manually
Press the button.
PDC is activated at the same time, refer to
page 91.
If the image of the PDC Park Distance
Control appears on the Control Display,
you can switch the image to the rear view cam-
era, refer to Displays on page 95.<
Switching off
Automatically
When driving forward at over approx. 12 mph/
20 km/h or after driving approx. 164 ft/50 m.
Manually
Press the button again; the LED goes out.
Driver assistance functions
The following functions can improve the effect
of the rear view camera depending on the situa-
tion.
They can only be activated when the liftgate is
completely closed.
Pathway lines
The pathway lines are shown in the picture of
the rear view camera. They help you to estimate
the space required when parking and maneu-
vering on level roads.
The pathway lines are dependent on the current
steering angle and are continuously adjusted to
the steering wheel movements.
Turning lines
The static turning lines are displayed in the pic-
ture of the rear view camera and show you the
course of the smallest possible turning circle on
level roads.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
94
Parking using pathway and turning
circle lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning lines
guide within the limits of the parking space.
2. Turn the steering wheel so that the pathway
lines cover the corresponding turning lines.
This results in a steering wheel position that
makes full use of the smallest possible turning
circle of the vehicle when parking.
Virtual camera panning
The displayed picture area is dependent on the
current speed:
At low speeds, the camera view is panned
toward the street, and at higher speeds toward
the horizon.
This enables the currently relevant picture area
to be shown enlarged on the Control Display.
To activate the virtual camera panning, select
the camera view "Camera view: full screen",
refer to Displays on page 95.
Obstacle marking
Spatially shaped markings are shown in the pic-
ture of the rear view camera. Their stepped col-
ors correspond to the markings of the Park Dis-
tance Control and support you in estimating the
distance to the object shown.
The obstacle marking is deactivated when driv-
ing in reverse from approx. 12 mph/20 km/h.
Activating driver assistance functions
The driver assistance functions can be active at
the same time. The zoom function for trailer
towing can only be activated individually with
the rear view camera switched on.
With rear view camera switched on
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the controller.
2. Select the desired function and press the
controller.
You can also adjust the brightness of the cam-
era view.
With rear view camera switched off
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Maneuvering aids" is
selected and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
95
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
6. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
7. Select the desired functions and press the
controller.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Displays on Control Display
You can have the picture from the rear view
camera displayed in several formats and in
combination with the PDC Park Distance Con-
trol, refer to page 92.
In addition, you also have the option of display-
ing only the PDC Park Distance Control.
> "Camera picture and PDC"
The rear view camera picture is shown in
the main window of the Control Display.
> "Camera view: full screen"
The picture of the rear view camera is
shown on the entire Control Display.
> "Camera view: main window"
The picture of the rear view camera is
shown in the main window of the Control
Display.
> "PDC in main window only"
PDC is shown in the main window of the
Control Display.
Selecting displays
1. Select "Maneuvering aids" and press the
controller, refer to Activating driver assis-
tance functions.
2. Turn the controller until "View selection" is
selected and press the controller.
3. Select the desired display and press the
controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
The picture of the rear view camera and
PDC is hidden when the vehicle is
stopped, the transmission is in R or D, and you
disconnect the driver's safety belt and open the
driver's door.<
Setting brightness
You can set the brightness of the camera view
with the rear view camera switched on.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the controller.
2. Turn the controller until "Brightness" is
selected and press the controller.
3. Set the desired brightness.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
96
Cleaning rear view camera
The lens of the rear view camera is located on
the liftgate.
The picture quality of the rear view camera may
be impaired by dirt. Clean the lens with a moist,
nonabrasive cloth.
The lens is automatically heated in case of frost.
Driving stability control
systems
Your BMW is equipped with an extended array
of systems designed to enhance and maintain
vehicle stability under extreme conditions.
ABS Antilock Brake System
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking. Safe steering response is maintained
even during full braking. Active safety is thus
increased.
ABS is operational every time you start the
engine. Braking safely, refer to page 140.
CBC Cornering Brake Control
When braking during curves or when braking
during a lane change, driving stability and steer-
ing response are improved further.
Electronic brake-force distribution
The system controls the brake pressure in the
rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.
Brake assistant
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the maximum braking
force boost and thus helps to achieve the short-
est possible braking distance during full brak-
ing. This system exploits all of the benefits pro-
vided by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the full braking.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels
when starting off and accelerating. The system
also identifies unstable driving conditions, such
as a loss of traction at the rear of the vehicle or
sliding of the vehicle in its front wheels. In these
cases, DSC helps the vehicle maintain a safe
course within physical limits by reducing engine
output and through braking actions in the indi-
vidual wheels.
The laws of physics cannot be repealed,
even with DSC. An appropriate driving
style remains the responsibility of the driver.
Therefore, do not restrict the additional safety
margin with a risky driving style, as otherwise
there is a risk of an accident.<
Deactivating DSC
Press the button until the DSC indicator lamp in
the instrument panel lights up, but not longer
than approx. 10 seconds. DTC Dynamic Trac-
tion Control and DSC are deactivated together.
Stabilizing interventions are now not carried
out.
A message appears on the Control Display.
Please note any supplementary information
that appears there.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
as soon as possible.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
97
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Activating DSC
Press the button; the indicator lamp in the
instrument panel goes out.
For better control
The indicator lamp flashes:
DSC controls the drive forces and
brake forces.
The indicator lamps light up:
DSC is deactivated.
DTC Dynamic Traction Control
DTC is a version of DSC in which the drive out-
put is optimized for particular road conditions,
e.g. unplowed snow-covered roads. The sys-
tem assures the maximal drive output, but with
reduced driving stability. It is therefore neces-
sary to drive with appropriate caution.
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC
under the following special circumstances:
> When driving in sand, on snowy inclines, in
slush or on unplowed, snow-covered road
surfaces
> When rocking a stuck vehicle free or start-
ing off in deep snow, sand or on loose
ground
> When driving with snow chains
*
Activating DTC
Press the button briefly; the DTC indicator lamp
in the instrument panel lights up.
For better control
The indicator lamp flashes:
DTC controls the drive forces and
brake forces.
The indicator lamps light up:
DTC is activated.
Deactivating DTC
Press the button again; the DTC indicator lamp
in the instrument panel goes out.
xDrive
xDrive is the 4-wheel drive system of your
BMW. The combined effects of xDrive and DSC
further optimize the traction and dynamic driv-
ing characteristics. The 4-wheel drive system
xDrive variably distributes the drive forces to
the front and rear axle depending on the driving
situation and prevailing road conditions.
BMW X6: Dynamic Performance
Control
The concept
Dynamic Performance Control optimizes the
handling characteristics of your BMW when
starting off, cornering, and during evasive
maneuvers. To achieve this, the system variably
distributes the drive torque of the rear axle to
the two rear wheels. This further increases the
steering precision and tracking stability of your
vehicle.
Display
The instrument panel display shows how xDrive
and Dynamic Performance Control are distrib-
uting the drive torque.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
98
Press the BC button on the turn signal lever
repeatedly until the display appears, refer to
arrow.
The drive train and wheels are schematically
depicted.
Bar graphs show the current distribution of
drive torque. The longer an illuminated bar is,
the greater the drive torque in the related wheel.
Malfunction
If xDrive and Dynamic Performance Control are
malfunctioning, the instrument panel display
appears in gray.
HDC Hill Descent Control
The concept
HDC is a system for driving downhill in steep
terrain. This system reduces vehicle speed on
steep downhill gradients, thus allowing you to
maintain even better control of your BMW
under these conditions. The vehicle moves at
approximately walking speed without active
intervention from the driver.
HDC is available for activation at vehicle speeds
below approx. 22 mph/35 km/h. When driving
down steep hills with a speed below approx.
22 mph/35 km/h, the vehicle reduces speed
automatically down to approximately walking
speed, approx. 5 mph/8 km/h, and then main-
tains this speed at a constant.
Only use HDC in transmission positions D or R.
Increasing or reducing speed
You can use the accelerator or brakes to vary
this automatically controlled speed within a
range extending from approx. 4 mph/6 km/h to
15 mph/25 km/h.
You can specify a target speed within the same
range by using the lever of the cruise control.
With downhill grade over 10Ξ you can reduce
the speed to approx. 3mph/4km/h. Pull the
lever of the cruise control beyond the resis-
tance point, arrow 3.
1 Increasing speed
2 Pull to the resistance point:
Reduce speed to approx. 4 mph/6 km/h
3 Pull beyond the resistance point:
With downhill grade over 10Ξ, reduce
speed to approx. 3 mph/4 km/h.
Activating HDC
Press the button; the LED lights up.
The HDC display is shown in the instrument
panel.
The LED flashes when the brakes are applied
automatically.
Deactivating HDC
Press the button again. The LED and the HDC
display go out.
HDC is automatically deactivated at speeds
over approx. 37 mph/60 km/h.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
99
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Displays* in instrument panel
1 Display for target speed
2 HDC display
Malfunction
HDC is temporarily unavailable in the following
situations due to a high brake temperature:
> The LED in the button and the display HDC
go out during HDC operation.
> The LED in the button and the HDC display
do not light up when the button is pressed.
Malfunction of driving stability control
systems
When driving on poor roads, avoid using
full throttle or pressing the accelerator
beyond the kick-down point and also avoid
heavy braking. Otherwise, the drive train may be
damaged or accidents can occur.<
Adaptive Drive*
The concept
Adaptive Drive reduces the body roll which
occurs when cornering quickly or during fast
evasive maneuvers. In addition, Adaptive Drive
reduces the steering angle requirement,
improves the running comfort and increases
the dynamic driving characteristics of your
BMW.
Chassis and suspension tuning
You can choose between two types of chassis
and suspension tuning.
> Normal:
The comfortable basic setting offers opti-
mum comfort when traveling.
> Sport:
The sporty basic setting offers increased
driving agility.
Selecting chassis and suspension
tuning
Press the button.
The system switches between the two chassis
and suspension tuning settings.
> Sport:
The LED in the button lights up and SPORT
is displayed in the instrument panel.
> Normal:
The LED in the button goes out.
The selection of the chassis and suspension
tuning setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Starting assistant
The starting assistant enables you to start off
conveniently on slopes. The parking brake is
not required for this purpose.
1. Hold the vehicle with the footbrake.
2. Release the footbrake and immediately
drive off quickly.
The starting assistant holds the vehicle
for approx. 2 seconds after releasing the
footbrake. Depending on the load, the vehicle
may also roll back slightly during this time.
After releasing the footbrake, immediately start
quickly, otherwise the starting assistant no
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
100
longer holds the vehicle after approx. 2 seconds
and it begins to roll back.<
Self-leveling suspension*
Malfunction
The warning lamp for self-leveling
suspension lights up yellow and a
message is shown on the Control
Display. A malfunction has occurred in the self-
leveling suspension. Stop and check the vehi-
cle. If it is considerably lower at the rear than at
the front, and possibly also on one side – rear
left compared to rear right –, proceed to the
nearest BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or
a workshop that works according to BMW
repair procedures with correspondingly trained
personnel. Drive with appropriate caution in the
meantime. The vehicle has reduced ground
clearance and driving comfort may be notice-
ably reduced. Even if the orientation of the vehi-
cle is normal, when a malfunction is indicated
on the display, you should proceed to the near-
est BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a
workshop that works according to BMW guide-
lines and uses appropriately trained personnel.
FTM Flat Tire Monitor*
The concept
The Flat Tire Monitor detects a pressure loss in
one tire by comparing the speeds of the individ-
ual wheels during driving.
In the event of a pressure loss, there is a change
in the rolling circumference and therefore the
rotation speed of the corresponding wheel. The
system detects this change and reports it as a
flat tire.
Function requirements
In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat
tire, the system must be initialized for the cor-
rect tire inflation pressure.
The initialization must be repeated after
each time the tire inflation pressure is cor-
rected and after every tire or wheel change.<
System limits
The Flat Tire Monitor cannot indicate
sudden severe tire damage caused by
outside factors and does not detect a natural,
even pressure drop in all four tires.<
In the following situations, the system could be
delayed or malfunction:
> System has not been initialized
> Driving on snowy or slippery road surface
> Sporty driving style: slip in the drive wheels,
high lateral acceleration
> Driving with snow chains
*
When you are driving with the compact wheel*
the Flat Tire Monitor is unable to function.
Initializing system
The initialization finishes during driving,
which can be interrupted at any time.
When driving resumes, the initialization is con-
tinued automatically. Do not initialize the sys-
tem when driving with snow chains
* or with the
compact wheel
*.<
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
101
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "FTM" is selected and press
the controller.
6. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
7. Select "Reset" and press the controller.
8. Select "Yes" and press the controller. The
message "resetting FTM …" is displayed.
9. Start to drive.
The initialization finishes during driving.
Indication of a flat tire
The warning lamp lights up red. A
message appears on the Control Dis-
play. In addition, an acoustic signal
sounds. There is a flat tire or extensive inflation
pressure loss.
If you have deactivated DSC, it will be activated
automatically.
1. Cautiously reduce speed to below 50 mph/
80 km/h. Avoid sudden braking and steer-
ing maneuvers. Do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
In case of further air loss of the defective
wheel, its position will be indicated to you
on the Control Display.
If the vehicle is not equipped with run-
flat tires as provided at the factory,
refer to page 256, do not continue driving.
Continuing to drive with a flat tire could
cause severe accidents.<
2. At the next opportunity, check the air pres-
sure in all four tires.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor
may not have been initialized. The system
must then be initialized.<
3. In the event of complete tire pressure loss,
0 psi/0 kPa, you can estimate the possible
distance for continued driving on the basis
of the following guide values:
> With a light load:
1 to 2 persons without luggage:
approx. 155 miles/250 km
> With a medium load:
2 persons, cargo bay full, or
4 persons without luggage:
approx. 95 miles/150 km
> With a full load:
4 or more persons, cargo bay full:
approx. 30 miles/50 km
Drive cautiously and do not exceed
speeds of 50 mph/80 km/h or else you
run the risk of causing an accident. In the event
of pressure loss, vehicle handling changes. This
includes reduced tracking stability in braking,
extended braking distance and altered natural
steering characteristics.
If unusual vibrations or loud noises occur while
the vehicle is being driven, this can indicate final
failure of the damaged tire. Reduce speed and
stop at a suitable location as soon as possible,
otherwise pieces of the tire could become
detached and cause an accident. Do not con-
tinue driving, but instead contact the BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center.<
TPM Tire Pressure Monitor*
The concept
TPM checks the tire inflation pressure in the
four mounted tires. The system reports when
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
102
the tire inflation pressure has dropped consid-
erably in one or several tires.
Function requirements
In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat
tire, the system must have been reset with the
correct tire inflation pressure.
Always use wheels with TPM electronics, oth-
erwise fault-free operation of the system is not
ensured.
Reset the system again after each correc-
tion of the tire inflation pressure and after
every tire or wheel change.<
System limits
TPM cannot announce sudden serious
tire damage caused by external influ-
ences.<
The system does not function properly if it has
not been reset, e.g. a flat tire is reported despite
correct tire inflation pressures.
The system is inactive and cannot display a flat
tire if a wheel has been mounted without TPM
electronics, e.g. a compact wheel
*, or if TPM is
temporarily interfered with by other systems or
devices which use the same radio frequency.
Status display on Control Display
The tire and system status is indicated by the
color of the tires.
TPM takes the fact that the tire pressure
changes during driving into account. A correc-
tion is only required if requested by TPM with
the color.
Green
The tire pressure matches the learned set state.
"TPM active" is displayed on the Control Dis-
play.
One wheel is yellow
Flat tire or a major drop in inflation pressure in
the indicated tire. A message appears on the
Control Display.
All wheels are yellow
Flat tire or a major drop in inflation pressure in
several tires. A message appears on the Control
Display.
Gray
The system cannot detect a flat tire.
Reasons for this can be:
> TPM is being reset
> Temporary interference due to systems or
devices which use the same radio fre-
quency
> Malfunction
Resetting system
Reset the system again after each correc-
tion of the tire inflation pressure and after
every tire or wheel change.<
Resetting finishes during driving, which can be
interrupted at any time. When driving resumes,
resetting is continued automatically. Do not
reset the system when driving with a compact
wheel
*.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "TPM" is selected and press
the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
103
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
6. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
7. Select "Reset" and press the controller.
8. Select "Yes" and press the controller.
9. Start to drive.
The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting
TPM..." is displayed.
After a few minutes of driving, the set tire infla-
tion pressures in the tires are applied as the set
values to be monitored. Resetting finishes dur-
ing driving. The tires are shown in green on the
Control Display.
If a flat tire is detected during resetting
and applying the tire inflation pressures,
all tires are shown in yellow on the Control Dis-
play. The message "Tire low!" is displayed.<
Message with low tire inflation
pressure
The warning lamp lights up yellow. A
message appears on the Control Dis-
play. In addition, an acoustic signal
sounds. There is a flat tire or extensive inflation
pressure loss.
1. Cautiously reduce speed to below 50 mph/
80 km/h. Avoid sudden braking and steer-
ing maneuvers. Do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
If the vehicle is not equipped with run-
flat tires as provided at the factory,
refer to page 256, do not continue driving.
Continuing to drive with a flat tire could
cause severe accidents.<
2. In the event of complete tire pressure loss,
0 psi/0 kPa, you can estimate the possible
distance for continued driving on the basis
of the following guide values:
> With a light load:
1 to 2 persons without luggage:
approx. 155 miles/250 km
> With a medium load:
2 persons, cargo bay full, or
4 persons without luggage:
approx. 95 miles/150 km
> With a full load:
4 or more persons, cargo bay full:
approx. 30 miles/50 km
Drive cautiously and do not exceed
speeds of 50 mph/80 km/h or else you
run the risk of causing an accident. In the event
of pressure loss, vehicle handling changes. This
includes reduced tracking stability in braking,
extended braking distance and altered natural
steering characteristics.
If unusual vibrations or loud noises occur while
the vehicle is being driven, this can indicate final
failure of the damaged tire. Reduce speed and
stop at a suitable location as soon as possible,
otherwise pieces of the tire could become
detached and cause an accident. Do not con-
tinue driving, but instead contact the BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center.<
Malfunction
The yellow warning lamp flashes and
then lights up continuously. The tires
are shown in gray on the Control Dis-
play and a message is displayed. No flat tire can
be detected.
A message like this is displayed in the following
situations:
> In case of a malfunction:
Have the system checked
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
104
> If a wheel without TPM electronics is
mounted, e.g. a compact wheel
*
> If TPM is temporarily interfered with by
other systems or devices which use the
same radio frequency
Explanation according to the NHTSA/
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
Systems
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-
ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehi-
cle has tires of a different size than the size indi-
cated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres-
sure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel effi-
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if underinflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the system
detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain con-
tinuously illuminated. This sequence will con-
tinue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the mal-
function indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire pres-
sure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure
that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
Active steering*
The concept
The active steering actively varies the steering
angle of the front wheels in relation to the steer-
ing wheel movements. In addition, it also varies
the steering force required for steering depend-
ing on the vehicle's speed.
When you are driving in the low road speed
range, e.g. in a town or when parking, the steer-
ing angle increases, i.e. the steering becomes
very direct. In the higher speed range, on the
other hand, the steering angle is reduced more
and more. This improves the handling capability
of your BMW over the entire speed range.
In critical situations, the system can make tar-
geted corrections to the steering angle pro-
vided by the driver and thus stabilize the vehicle
before the driver intervenes.
Malfunction
The warning lamp lights up yellow
and a message is shown on the Con-
trol Display. The active steering is
defective or has been temporarily
deactivated. At low speeds, greater steering
wheel movements are required, whereas at
higher speeds, the vehicle reacts more sensi-
tively to steering wheel movements. The stabil-
ity-promoting intervention can also be deacti-
vated. Proceed cautiously and drive
defensively. If active steering is defective, have
the system checked.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
105
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Brake force display*
BMW X5
On the left: normal braking.
On the right: heavy braking.
BMW X6
On the left: normal braking.
On the right: heavy braking.
Airbags
The following airbags are located under the
marked covers:
1 Front airbags
2 Head-level airbags in front and rear
3 Side airbags in backrests
Protective action
To ensure that the safety systems con-
tinue to provide optimized protection,
observe the adjustment instructions on
page 48.<
The front airbags help protect the driver and
front passenger by responding to frontal
impacts in which safety belts alone cannot pro-
vide adequate restraint. When needed, the
head and side airbags help provide protection in
the event of side impact. The relevant side air-
bag supports the side upper body area. The
head air bag supports the head.
The airbags are deliberately not triggered in
every impact situation, e.g. less severe acci-
dents or rear-end collisions.
Do not apply adhesive materials to the
cover panels of the airbags, cover them or
modify them in any other way.
Keep the instrument cluster and window in the
region of the passenger seat free of foreign
materials, i.e. do not cover them with adhesive
film or covers and do not attach mounts, e.g. for
a navigation device or mobile phone to them.
Do not install cosmetic covers, seat cushions,
or other items on the front seats that are not
especially approved for seats with integrated
side airbags. Do not hang articles of clothing
such as jackets over the backrests.
Do not attempt to remove the airbag restraint
system from the vehicle. Do not modify or
tamper with either the wiring or the individual
components in the airbag system. This includes
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
106
the upholstery in the center of the steering
wheel, on the instrument cluster, the doors, and
the roof pillars as well as the sides of the head-
liner. Do not attempt to remove or dismantle the
steering wheel. Do not touch the individual
components immediately after the system has
been triggered, because there is a danger of
burns.
In the event of malfunctions, deactivation, or
triggering of the airbag restraint system, have
the testing, repair, removal, and disposal of air-
bag generators executed only by a BMW Sports
Activity Vehicle Center or a workshop that
works according to BMW repair procedures
with correspondingly trained personnel and has
the required explosives licenses. Otherwise
unprofessional attempts to service the system
could lead to failure in an emergency or undes-
ired airbag triggering, either of which could
result in personal injury.<
Warnings and information on the airbags is also
provided on the sun visors.
Automatic deactivation of front
passenger airbags
The occupation of the seat is detected by eval-
uating the impression on the occupied seat sur-
face of the front passenger seat. The front and
side airbags on the front passenger side are
activated or deactivated accordingly by the sys-
tem.
The current status of the front passenger
airbag, i.e. deactivated or activated, is
indicated by the indicator lamp over the interior
rearview mirror, refer to Operating state of front
passenger airbags in the following.<
Before transporting a child on the front
passenger seat, read the safety informa-
tion and follow the instructions under Trans-
porting children safely, refer to page 61.
When teenagers and adults assume certain sit-
ting positions, this can cause the front and side
airbags to deactivate. The indicator lamp for the
front passenger airbags lights up when this
occurs. In these cases, change the sitting posi-
tion so that the front passenger airbags are acti-
vated and the indicator lamp goes out. If the
desired status cannot be produced by changing
the sitting position, transport the correspond-
ing person on the rear seat. Do not fit seat cov-
ers, seat cushion padding, ball mats or other
items onto the front passenger seat unless they
are specifically recommended by BMW. Do not
lay objects under the seat which could press
against the seat from below. Otherwise a cor-
rect evaluation of the occupied seat surface
cannot be ensured.<
Operating state of front passenger
airbags
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
arrangement of the switches and indicator
lamps may differ somewhat.
The indicator lamp for the front passenger air-
bags indicates the operating status of the front
and side airbags on the front passenger side
depending on the seat occupation. The indica-
tor lamp shows whether the front passenger
airbags are activated or deactivated.
> The indicator lamp lights up when a child in
a child restraint device intended for the pur-
pose is properly detected on the seat.
The front and side airbags on the front pas-
senger side are not activated.
Most child's seats are detected by the
system. Especially the child's seats
required by the NHTSA at the time the vehi-
cle is manufactured. After installing a child's
seat, make sure that the indicator lamp for
the front passenger airbags lights up. This
indicates that the child's seat has been
detected and the front passenger airbags
are not activated.<
> The indicator lamp does not light up when,
for example, a correctly seated person of
sufficient height is detected on the seat.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
107
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
The front and side airbags on the front pas-
senger side are activated.
> The indicator lamp does not light up when
the seat is empty.
However, the front and side airbags on the
front passenger side are not activated.
Operational readiness of airbag system
From radio readiness, refer to page 65, the
warning lamp lights up briefly, indicating the
operational readiness of the entire airbag sys-
tem and the safety belt tensioners.
Airbag system malfunction
> Warning lamp does not light up from radio
readiness.
> Warning lamp lights up continuously.
Have the airbag system checked immedi-
ately in case of a malfunction, otherwise
there is a danger that the airbag system may not
respond in the expected manner in an accident
despite an impact of corresponding intensity.<
Head-Up Display*
The concept
With the Head-Up Display important informa-
tion is projected into the driver's field of view,
e.g. navigation instructions. This enables you to
take in this information without looking away
from the road.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
1 Navigation information or Check Control
messages
2 Cruise control
3 Speed
Selecting displays
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Display settings" and press the
controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
108
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Head-Up Display" is
selected and press the controller.
6. Change into the second field from the top.
Turn the controller until "Head-Up Display"
is selected and press the controller.
7. Select desired information of Head-Up Dis-
play.
8. Press the controller.
The information is shown on the Head-
Up Display.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Adjusting brightness and height of
display
The brightness of the display is automatically
adapted to the ambient lighting conditions.
However, you can change the base setting.
With the low beams switched on, the brightness
can also be adjusted with the serrated dial of the
instrument lighting.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Display settings" and press the
controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Head-Up Display" is
selected and press the controller.
6. Change into the second field from the top.
Turn the controller until "Brightness / Posi-
tion" is selected and press the controller.
7. If necessary, move the controller to the left
or right to select "Brightness" or "Display
position".
8. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Notes
The visibility of the displays in the Head-Up Dis-
play is influenced by:
> Sunglasses with certain polarization filters
> Certain sitting positions
> Objects on the cover of the Head-Up Dis-
play
> Wet road surface and unfavorable lighting
conditions
If the image is distorted, have the basic setting
checked at a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Cen-
ter.
Special windshield
The windshield is part of the system. The shape
of the windshield complies with the require-
ments of the Head-Up Display to enable a pre-
cise display. A film in the windshield prevents
the double images from being displayed.
Windshield replacement should be carried out
by a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a
workshop that works according to BMW repair
procedures with correspondingly trained per-
sonnel.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
109
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Care instructions
Important information on this topic is provided
on page 268.
Only clean the cover of the Head-Up Dis-
play with a soft, lint-free cloth or with a
display cleaning cloth, otherwise damage may
result.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Lamps
110
Lamps
Parking lamps/low beams
0 Lights off and daytime driving lamps*
1 Parking lamps and daytime driving lamps*
2 Low beams and welcome lamps
3 Automatic headlamp control
*, daytime
driving lamps
*, welcome lamps and Adap-
tive Head Light
*
If you open the driver's door with the ignition
switched off, the exterior lighting is automati-
cally switched off when the light switch is in
position 0, 2 or 3.
If necessary, switch on the parking lamps,
switch position 1.
Parking lamps
In switch position 1, the front, rear and side
vehicle lighting is switched on. You can use the
parking lamps for parking.
The parking lamps drain the battery. Do
not leave them switched on for long peri-
ods of time, otherwise it may no longer be pos-
sible to start the engine. It is better to switch on
the roadside parking lamps on one side, refer to
page 112.<
Low beams
The low beams light up when the light switch is
in position 2 and the ignition is on.
Automatic headlamp control*
In switch position 3, the system activates the
low beams and switches them on or off in
response to changes in ambient light condi-
tions, for instance, in a tunnel, at dawn and dusk
and in case of precipitation. Adaptive Head
Light
* is active. The LED next to the symbol
lights up when the low beams are on. You can
activate the daytime driving lamps, refer to
page 111. In the situations named above, the
system then automatically switches over to the
low beams.
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
The low beams remain switched on inde-
pendent of the ambient lighting condi-
tions when you switch on the fog lamps
*.<
The automatic headlamp control cannot
serve as a substitute for your personal
judgment in determining when the lamps
should be switched on in response to ambient
lighting conditions. For example, the sensors
cannot detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid
safety risks, you should always switch on the
low beams manually under these conditions.<
Welcome lamps
When parking the vehicle, if you leave the light
switch in position 2 or 3, the parking lamps and
the interior lamps light up briefly when the vehi-
cle is unlocked.
Activating/deactivating welcome
lamps
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
111
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Lighting" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Welcome light" and press the con-
troller.
The welcome lamps are switched on.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Pathway lighting
When you activate the headlamp flasher after
parking the vehicle and switching off the lamps,
the low beams will come on for a brief period.
You can set the duration or deactivate the func-
tion via iDrive.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Lighting" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Pathway lighting" and press the
controller.
7. Turn the controller to select the desired
duration.
8. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Daytime driving lamps*
The daytime driving lamps light up in position 0,
1 and 3. If the light switch remains in position 1,
the parking lamps light up after the ignition is
switched off.
Activating/deactivating daytime
driving lamps
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Lighting" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Daytime running lamps" and press
the controller.
Daytime driving lamps are switched on.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Lamps
112
Adaptive Head Light*
The concept
Adaptive Head Light is a variable headlamp
control system that enables better illumination
of the road surface. Depending on the steering
angle and other parameters, the light from the
headlamp follows the course of the road.
In tight curves, e.g. serpentines, or when turn-
ing, one of the two front fog lamps is also
switched on up to a speed of approx. 45 mph/
70 km/h. This provides improved illumination of
the area inside the curve.
Activating Adaptive Head Light
With the ignition switched on, turn the light
switch to position 3, refer to page 110.
The turning lamps are automatically switched
on depending on the steering angle or the use
of turn signals.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive
Head Light directs light towards the front pas-
senger side when the vehicle is at a standstill.
When driving in reverse, both turning lamps are
active.
High beams/
roadside parking lamps
1 High beams
2 Headlamp flasher
3 Roadside parking lamps
Roadside parking lamps, left or right*
You also enjoy the option of lighting up just one
side of your vehicle when parking.
Switching on
After parking the vehicle, press the lever up or
down beyond the resistance point for approx.
1second, arrow3.
The roadside parking lamps drain the bat-
tery. Do not leave them switched on for
long periods of time, otherwise it may no longer
be possible to start the engine.<
Switching off
Briefly press the lever in the opposite direction
up to the resistance point, arrow 3.
Fog lamps*
First, switch on the parking lamps or the low
beams. The green indicator lamp in the instru-
ment panel lights up whenever the fog lamps
are on.
If the automatic headlamp control is acti-
vated, the low beams will come on auto-
matically when you switch on the fog lamps.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
113
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Instrument lighting
You can control the lighting intensity by using
the serrated dial.
Interior lamps
The interior lamps, footwell lamps*, door entry
lighting
*, cargo bay lamps, and the courtesy
lamps
* are controlled automatically.
With the courtesy lamps, LED lights are located
in the door handles to illuminate the exterior
area before the doors.
To protect the battery, all lamps in the
vehicle are switched off approx. 15 min-
utes after radio readiness is switched off, refer
to Start/Stop button on page 65.<
Switching interior lamps on and off
manually
Press the button.
If you wish the interior lamps, footwell lamps,
door entry lighting and courtesy lamps to
remain switched off all the time, press the but-
ton for approx. 3 seconds.
Reading lamps
Reading lamps are provided in the front and
rear
* adjacent to the interior lamps. Press the
button to switch the lamps on and off.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Climate
114
Climate
1 Air toward the windshield and side windows
2 Air for the upper body region, refer to
Front ventilation on page 118
3 Air to footwell
4 Automatic climate control with 2-zone
control, refer to page 115
Automatic climate control with 4-zone
control, refer to page 119
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
115
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Automatic climate control with 2-zone control
1 Seat heating and ventilation, driver's
side 56
2 Temperature, left side of passenger
compartment
3 AUTO program
4 Temperature, right side of passenger
compartment
5 Maximum cooling
6 Seat heating
and ventilation,
front passenger side 56
7 Manual air distribution, front passenger side
8 Switching cooling function on and off
manually
9 AUC Automatic recirculated-air control/
recirculated-air mode
10 Manual air volume, switching off automatic
climate control, residual heat
11 Rear window defroster
12 Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
13 Air grill for interior temperature sensor –
please keep clear and unobstructed
14 Manual air distribution, driver's side
The current setting for manual air distribution
is displayed on the Control Display.
A congenial climate
The AUTO program offers the optimum air dis-
tribution and air volume for virtually all condi-
tions, refer to AUTO program below. Now you
only need to select an interior temperature
pleasant to you.
The following sections contain more detailed
information on the available setting options.
Most settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, also refer to Personal Profile
settings on page 28.
AUTO program
The AUTO program handles the
adjustment of air volume and air
distribution to the windshield and
side windows, in the direction of
the upper body and in the footwell.
It also adapts your instructions for the tempera-
ture to outside influences throughout the year.
The cooling is switched on automatically with
the AUTO program. At the same time, a con-
densation sensor controls the program in such
a way that window condensation is prevented
as much as possible.
Intensity of AUTO program
You can adjust the intensity of the AUTO pro-
gram by repeatedly pressing the AUTO button.
The respective current setting is displayed
when the button on the display of the automatic
climate control is pressed.
You can also adjust the intensity of the AUTO
program via iDrive.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to open "Cli-
mate".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Climate
116
3. Select "Automatic programs" and press the
controller.
4. Select the desired intensity and press the
controller.
The selected intensity level of the auto-
matic program is switched on.
Temperature
Set the desired temperature indi-
vidually on the driver's and front
passenger side.
The automatic climate control
adjusts this temperature as quickly as possible
at any time of year, if necessary with the maxi-
mum cooling or heating capacity, and then
keeps it constant.
In the highest setting you activate the maximum
heating capacity, regardless of the outside tem-
perature. And in the lowest setting, the maxi-
mum cooling capacity.
When switching between different tem-
perature settings in rapid succession, the
automatic climate control does not have suffi-
cient time to adjust the set temperature.<
Adjusting temperature in upper body
region
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to open "Cli-
mate".
3. Select "Vent settings" and press the con-
troller.
4. Select the driver's or front passenger side
if necessary. Move the controller to the right
or left repeatedly until the driver's or front
passenger side is selected.
5. Move the controller to select the field.
6. Turn the controller to adjust the tempera-
ture.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Quickly remove ice and condensa-
tion from the windshield and front
side windows.
To do this, also switch on the cooling function.
Rear window defroster
The rear window defroster
switches off automatically after a
while. Depending on the vehicle
equipment, upper wires are used
as an antenna and are not part of the rear win-
dow defroster.
Air volume, manual
You can vary the air volume by
pressing on the corresponding
side. You can reactivate the auto-
matic mode for the air volume with the AUTO
button.
Air distribution, manual
You can route the air flowing out into the vehicle
interior via various programs, separately for the
driver and passenger side.
> Upper body region
> Upper body region and footwell
> Footwell
> Driver's side: windows and footwell
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
117
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
> Individual program
Selecting program
Press the button repeatedly until
the desired program is shown on
the Control Display.
Adjusting air distribution individually –
individual program
The settings are stored in this program.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to open "Cli-
mate".
3. Select "Vent settings" and press the con-
troller.
The driver's and front passenger side can
be adjusted separately with the fields on the
right or left side.
4. Select the driver's or front passenger side
if necessary.
Move the controller to the right or left
repeatedly until the driver's or front passen-
ger side is selected.
5. Select the desired field by moving the con-
troller.
6. Turn the controller to adjust the air distribu-
tion.
Driver's side:
1 Air toward the windshield and side windows
2 Air for the upper body
3 Air to footwell
Front passenger side:
4 Air for the upper body
5 Air to footwell
Pressing the AUTO button cancels the
manual air distribution settings.<
The automatic mode for the air volume remains
effective with manual air distribution.
Switching cooling function on and off
The cooling function cools and
dehumidifies the incoming air
before also reheating it as
required, according to the temperature setting.
This function is only available when the engine
is running.
The cooling function helps to avoid condensa-
tion on the window surfaces or to quickly
remove them.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog over briefly when the engine is started.
The cooling function is switched on automati-
cally with the AUTO program.
Maximum cooling
Maximally cooled air is obtained as
quickly as possible at an outside
temperature above approx. 327/
06 and with the engine running.
The automatic climate control switches into the
recirculated-air mode at the lowest tempera-
ture. The maximum air volume flows out of the
air vents for the upper body. Therefore, open
these vents for maximum cooling.
AUC Automatic recirculated-air
control/recirculated-air mode
You can respond to pollutants or
unpleasant odors in the immediate
environment by suspending the
supply of outside air. The system
then recirculates the air currently within the
vehicle. During AUC operation, a sensor
detects pollutants in the outside air and con-
trols the shut-off automatically.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Climate
118
By pressing the button repeatedly, you can
request three operating modes:
> LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
> Left LED on, AUC mode: the system
detects pollutants in the outside air and
shuts off the supply as needed.
> Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the
supply of outside air is permanently shut off.
Should the windows fog up in the recircu-
lated-air mode, press the AUTO button or
switch off the recirculated-air mode and
increase the air volume if necessary.
The recirculated-air mode should not be used
without interruption over an extended period of
time, as the air quality inside the vehicle deteri-
orates continuously.<
Residual heat
The heat stored in the engine is used to heat the
passenger compartment, e.g. while stopped at
a school to pick up a child.
Switching on
Pressing the right side switches on
the residual heat utilization when
the following conditions are met:
> up to 15 minutes after switching off the
engine
> with the engine at operating temperature
> with sufficient battery voltage
> at an outside temperature below 777/
256
REST appears on the display of the automatic
climate control when the residual heat utiliza-
tion is switched on.
From radio readiness the interior temperature,
the air volume and the air distribution can be
set.
Switching off
You can select the lowest blower speed by
pressing and holding the left side. Pressing
again switches off the residual heat utilization.
REST disappears from the display of the auto-
matic climate control.
Switching automatic climate control on
and off
You can select the lowest blower
speed by pressing and holding the
left side. Pressing again switches
off the automatic climate control.
You switch on the system again by pressing any
button of the automatic climate control.
Front ventilation
1 Serrated dials to smoothly open and close
air vents
2 Levers to change the air vent direction
Do not drop any foreign objects into the
air vents, otherwise these could be cata-
pulted outwards and lead to injuries.<
Ventilation for cooling
Adjust the air vents to direct the flow of cool air
in your direction, for instance, if the interior has
become too warm, etc.
Draft-free ventilation
Set the air vents so that the air flows past you
and is not directed straight at you.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
119
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Ventilation in rear
1 Serrated dials to smoothly open and close
air vents
2 Serrated dial for adjusting the temperature
in the upper body region:
> Turn toward blue: colder
> Turn toward red: warmer
3 Levers to change the air vent direction
BMW X5: heating and ventilation,
3rd row seats
The air in the area of the 3rd row seats can be
heated or recirculated. Air vents are located in
the storage compartment area between the
seats and in the footwell of the 3rd row seats.
1 Serrated dial:
> Activating heating and distributing air in
footwell:
Turn toward front
> Distributing air in storage compartment
area between seats:
Turn toward rear
2 Button for switching on blower:
LED lights up
The heating is not ready for operation
without switching on the blower. After the
heating is switched off, the blower can be used
to recirculate the air within the vehicle, e.g. at
high temperatures. To do this, turn the serrated
dial 1 toward the rear and switch on the blower,
button 2.<
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter removes dust and pollen from
the incoming air. The activated-charcoal filter
provides additional protection by filtering gas-
eous pollutants from the outside air. This com-
bined filter is changed during maintenance by
your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center.
You can select a display of more detailed infor-
mation on the Control Display, refer to page 82.
Automatic climate control
with 4-zone control*
Front operation
Corresponds to the operation of the automatic
climate control with 2-zone control, refer to
page 115.
Rear operation
The control unit is located in the center console
in the rear.
1 Temperature, left rear seating area
2 AUTO program
3 Display
4 Temperature, right rear seating area
5 Seat heating, right rear seat
6 Air volume, manual
7 Seat heating, left rear seat
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Climate
120
The current setting for the temperature and the
air volume is shown on display 3.
Activating
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to open "Cli-
mate".
3. Select "Rear climate control" and press the
controller.
4. Select the desired settings and press the
controller.
The rear automatic climate control is
activated and the settings of the automatic
climate control on the driver's side can be
applied if necessary.
The rear automatic climate control cannot
be operated if the front automatic climate
control is switched off. With the defrost win-
dows and eliminate condensation function acti-
vated, the rear automatic climate control is also
not ready for operation.<
AUTO program
The AUTO program assumes the
adjustment of the air distribution
toward the upper body and in the
footwell, as well as the air volume
for you. It also adapts your instruc-
tions for the temperature to outside influences
throughout the year.
Temperature
Set the desired temperature indi-
vidually on the left and right side.
The automatic climate control
adjusts this temperature as quickly
as possible at any time of year, if necessary with
the maximum cooling or heating capacity, and
then keeps it constant.
When switching between different tem-
perature settings in rapid succession, the
automatic climate control does not have suffi-
cient time to adjust the set temperature.<
Air volume, manual
You can vary the air volume by
pressing on the corresponding
side. You can reactivate the auto-
matic mode for the air volume with the AUTO
button.
Switching off rear automatic climate
control
You can select the lowest blower
speed by pressing and holding the
left side. Pressing again switches
off the automatic climate control.
The automatic climate control can also be
switched off with iDrive. To switch on the
automatic climate control again, the system
must first be reactivated, refer to Activating.<
You switch on the system again by pressing any
button of the rear automatic climate control.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
121
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Ventilation in rear
1 Serrated dials to smoothly open and close
air vents
2 Serrated dials to adjust temperature in
upper body region; can be adjusted sepa-
rately for left and right:
> Turn toward blue: colder
> Turn toward red: warmer
3 Levers to change the air vent direction
BMW X5
1 Levers to change the air vent direction
2 Serrated dial to smoothly open and close air
vents
For information on the ventilation of the 3rd row
seats, refer to page 119.
Parked-car ventilation*
The concept
The parked-car ventilation blows air into the
passenger compartment to lower interior tem-
peratures.
It is ready to use in the parked car mode at any
outside temperature.
You can set two different times for the system
to start. The parked-car ventilation can also be
switched on and off directly. It remains
switched on for 30 minutes.
Since the system uses a substantial amount of
electrical current, you should refrain from acti-
vating it twice in succession without allowing
the battery to be recharged in normal operation
between use.
The air emerges through the upper body region
air vents in the instrument cluster. Therefore,
please open the air vents.
The parked-car ventilation is operated via
iDrive.
Switching on and off directly
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to open "Cli-
mate".
3. Select "Parked car operation" and press the
controller.
4. Select "Automatic ventilation" and press
the controller.
5. Select "Parked car ventilation" and press
the controller.
The parked-car ventilation is switched on.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Climate
122
The symbol on the display of the automatic
climate control flashes.
Preselecting activation times
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to open "Cli-
mate".
3. Select "Parked car operation" and press the
controller.
4. Select "Activation time" and press the con-
troller.
5. Move the controller to the left or right to
select "Timer 1" or "Timer 2".
6. Select the time and press the controller.
The first time setting is highlighted.
7. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
8. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The next setting is highlighted.
9. Make the remaining adjustments. After the
last adjustment, the time is stored.
Activating activation time
Move the controller to the left or right to select
"Timer 1" or "Timer 2" and press the controller.
The activation time is activated.
The symbol on the display of the automatic
climate control lights up.
The symbol on the display of the automatic
climate control flashes when the parked-car
ventilation has switched on.
The parked-car ventilation is only avail-
able for activation within the next
24 hours. Then it must be activated again.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
123
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Practical interior accessories
Integrated universal remote
control*
The concept
The integrated universal remote control can
replace as many as three hand-held transmit-
ters for various remote-controlled accessories,
such as garage and gate or lighting systems.
The integrated universal remote control regis-
ters and stores signals from the original hand-
held transmitters.
The signal of an original hand-held transmitter
can be programmed on one of the three mem-
ory buttons 1. Then with the ignition switched
on, this programmed memory button 1 can be
used to operate the respective feature. The
LED 2 flashes to confirm transmission of the
signal.
Should you sell your vehicle one day, be sure to
delete the stored programs beforehand for your
safety, refer to page 124.
To prevent possible damage or injury,
before programming or using the inte-
grated universal remote control, always inspect
the immediate area to make certain that no peo-
ple, animals or objects are within the travel
range of the device. Also, comply with the
safety precautions of the original hand-held
transmitter.<
Checking compatibility
If you see this symbol on the packaging
or in the manual supplied with the orig-
inal hand-held transmitter, it is safe to
assume that it is compatible with the integrated
universal remote control.
Should you have additional questions,
please contact your BMW Sports Activity
Vehicle Center or call: 1-800-355-3515.
Information is also provided on the Internet at:
www.bmwusa.com or
www.homelink.com.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson
Controls, Inc.<
Programming
1 Memory buttons
2 LED
Fixed-code hand-held transmitters
1. Switch on ignition, refer to page 65.
2. When starting operation for the first time:
Press the left and right-hand memory but-
ton 1 for approx. 20 seconds until the
LED 2 flashes quickly. All stored programs
are deleted.
3. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at
a distance of approx. 4 in/10 cm to 12 in/
30 cm from the memory buttons 1.
The required distance between the
hand-held transmitter and the mem-
ory buttons 1 depends on the relevant sys-
tem of the original hand-held transmitter
used.<
4. Simultaneously press the transmit button
on the original hand-held transmitter and
the desired memory button 1 on the inte-
grated universal remote control. The LED 2
flashes slowly at first. As soon as the LED 2
flashes rapidly, release both buttons. If the
LED 2 does not flash rapidly after approx.
15 seconds, alter the distance and repeat
the step.
5. To program other original hand-held trans-
mitters, repeat steps 3 and 4.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
124
The corresponding memory button 1 is now
programmed with the signal of the original
hand-held transmitter.
You can operate the device when the engine is
running or when the ignition is switched on.
If the device cannot be used after
repeated programming, check whether
the original hand-held transmitter uses an alter-
nating-code system. To do so, either read the
instructions for the original hand-held transmit-
ter or hold down the programmed memory but-
ton 1 of the integrated universal remote control.
If the LED 2 on the integrated universal remote
control flashes rapidly for a short time and then
remains lit for approx. 2 seconds, this indicates
that the original hand-held transmitter uses an
alternating-code system. In the case of an alter-
nating-code system, program the memory but-
tons 1 as described at Alternating-code hand-
held transmitters.<
Alternating-code hand-held
transmitters
To program the integrated universal remote
control, consult the operating instructions for
the equipment to be set. You will find informa-
tion there on the possibilities for synchroniza-
tion.
When programming hand-held transmitters
that employ an alternating code, observe the
following supplementary instructions:
Programming will be easier with the aid of
a second person.<
1. Park your vehicle within the range of the
remote-controlled device.
2. Program the integrated universal remote
control as described above in the section
Fixed-code hand-held transmitters.
3. Locate the button on the receiver of the
device to be set, e.g. on the drive unit.
4. Press the button on the receiver of the
device to be set. After step 4, you have
approx. 30 seconds for step 5.
5. Press the programmed memory button 1
of the integrated universal remote control
three times.
The corresponding memory button 1 is now
programmed with the signal of the original
hand-held transmitter.
Should you have questions, please con-
tact your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle
Center.<
Deleting all stored programs
Press the left and right-hand memory button 1
for approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes
quickly:
All stored programs are deleted.
Reassigning individual programs
1. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at
a distance of approx. 4 in/10 cm to 12 in/
30 cm from the memory buttons 1.
The required distance between the
hand-held transmitter and the mem-
ory buttons 1 depends on the relevant sys-
tem of the original hand-held transmitter
used.<
2. Press the desired memory button 1 of the
integrated universal remote control.
3. When the LED 2 flashes slowly after approx.
20 seconds, press the transmit button of
the original hand-held transmitter. Release
both buttons as soon as the LED 2 flashes
rapidly. If the LED 2 does not flash rapidly
after approx. 15 seconds, alter the distance
and repeat the step.
Digital compass*
1 Adjustment button
2 Display
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
125
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
The display indicates the cardinal or intercardi-
nal direction in which you are currently driving.
Operating principle
You can run various functions by pressing the
adjustment button with a pointed object, e.g. a
ball-point pen etc. The following setting options
are displayed consecutively, depending on how
long the adjustment button is pressed:
> Press briefly: switch display on/off
> 3 to 6 seconds: set compass zone
> 6 to 9 seconds: calibrate compass
> 9 to 12 seconds: set left/right-hand drive
vehicle
> 12 to 15 seconds: set language
Setting compass zones
Set the respectively applicable compass zone
in your vehicle so that the compass functions
properly, refer to the map of the world with
compass zones.
To set the compass zones, press the adjust-
ment button for approx. 3-4 seconds. The dis-
play indicates the number of the currently set
compass zone.
To change the zone setting, briefly press the
adjusting button repeatedly until the number of
the compass zone that applies to your current
position is displayed.
The compass will be operational again after
approx. 10 seconds.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
126
Calibrating digital compass
Calibrate the digital compass In the following
situations:
> The wrong cardinal direction appears on
the display.
> The cardinal direction displayed does not
change despite a change in the direction of
travel.
> Not all cardinal directions are displayed.
Procedure
1. Make sure that there are no large metal
objects or overhead power lines in the vicin-
ity of your vehicle and that you have enough
space to drive in a circle.
2. Input the currently applicable compass
zone.
3. Press the adjustment button for approx.
6-7 seconds to display C. Then drive in a
complete circle at least once at a maximum
speed of 4 mph/7 km/h.
If the calibration is successful, display C is
replaced with the points of the compass.
Setting right/left-hand drive vehicle
Your digital compass is already set to right or
left-hand drive vehicle to match your vehicle at
the factory.
Setting language
You can set the language of the display.
Press the adjustment button for approx.
12-13 seconds. Briefly press the adjustment
button again to change between English "E"
and German "O".
The setting is automatically stored after approx.
10 seconds.
Roller sun blinds for rear side
windows*
Pull the loop of the roller sun blind and hook
onto bracket.
Do not open the window with the roller
blind raised, as otherwise there is a dan-
ger of damage, and therefore a danger of inju-
ries at higher speeds.<
Glove compartment
Opening
Press the button. The covers open upward and
downward and the lighting in the glove com-
partment switches on.
To prevent injury in the event of an acci-
dent while the vehicle is being driven,
close the glove compartment immediately after
use.<
Closing
Press one of the two covers closed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
127
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Center armrest front
A storage compartment is located under the
armrest between the front seats and, depend-
ing on the vehicle's equipment, also a cover for
the mobile phone bracket or the snap-in
adapter. Also refer to page 220.
Opening cover
Push cover down slightly and press the button.
The cover folds upward.
Connection for external audio device
You can connect an external audio device such
as a CD or MP3 player and play audio tracks
over the vehicle's speaker system:
> AUX-In connection, refer to page 200
> USB audio interface, refer to page 201
Storage compartments
Compartments are located in the doors, in the
center console in the front and rear
* as well as
in the rear console in the X6.
Storage nets
* are located on the backrests of
the front seats.
Do not stow hard or sharp-edged objects
in the storage nets; otherwise there is an
increased risk of injury in the event of an acci-
dent.<
Clothes hooks
When hanging clothing on the hooks,
ensure that it will not obstruct the driver's
vision. Do not hang heavy objects on the hooks.
If you do so, they could cause personal injury to
occupants during braking or evasive maneu-
vers.<
BMW X5
Clothes hooks are located near the grab han-
dles in the rear.
BMW X6
To fold out, press against upper edge.
Cup holders
Use lightweight, unbreakable containers
and do not transport hot beverages; oth-
erwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the
event of an accident. Do not force unsuitable
containers into the cup holders, as otherwise
damage can result.<
Front
Slide the cover back.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
128
Rear
BMW X5
Unlock the center armrest with the button in the
lower section of the opening and fold down.
Press the button; the cover folds forward.
With the 3rd row seats
*:
Fold down the center armrest.
Press the button; the cup holders are opened.
The cup holders of the 3rd row seats are
located in the center console between the
seats.
BMW X6
Slide the cover forward.
Remove the beverage container before
folding the rear seat backrest forward or
using the ski bag; otherwise it may cause dam-
age.<
Ashtray
Front
To open the cover, slide it forward.
Press the button. The ashtray insert raises
slightly and can be removed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
129
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Rear
BMW X6
Slide the cover back.
Remove the insert to empty.
Lighter
Front
Press in the lighter with the engine running or
the ignition switched on.
The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops
back out.
Hold or touch the hot cigarette lighter by
the knob only. Holding or touching it in
other areas could result in burns.
Always take along the remote control when you
leave the vehicle, otherwise children could, for
example, use the lighter and burn themselves.<
Rear
Refer to Cigarette lighter, front.
Connecting electrical devices
Sockets
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, the cigarette lighter socket can be used as a
power outlet for hand flashlights, car vacuum
cleaners, etc., with power ratings of up to
approx. 200 W at 12 V. Avoid damaging the
socket due to inserting plugs of different
shapes or sizes. The same is true for all power
outlets in the vehicle.
In cargo bay
Access to socket:
Fold open the cover.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
130
In rear center console
Depending on your vehicle's equipment pack-
age, the socket in the rear is covered with a cap
or equipped with a lighter. Refer to Cigarette
lighter, front, page 129.
Access to socket:
Remove cap or lighter.
In storage compartment under center
armrest
Access to socket*:
Pull off the cover.
BMW X6: in rear console
Slide the cover back.
Access to socket:
Pull off the cover.
Rear center armrest
BMW X6 and BMW X5 with 3rd row
seats*
Pull on the loop and fold down the center arm-
rest.
BMW X5 without 3rd row seats*
Unlock the center armrest with the button in the
lower section of the opening and fold down.
Cargo bay
BMW X5: roll-up cover
Pull out the roll-up cover and hook it into the
brackets.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
131
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Do not place heavy or hard objects on the
roll-up cover. If you do so, they may
already pose a danger to vehicle occupants dur-
ing braking or evasive maneuvers.
Do not allow the roll-up cover to snap back, oth-
erwise it can be damaged.<
Removing
1. Unlock the case with the button, arrow 1.
2. Swing the case somewhat to the left,
arrow 2, and remove.
Installing
When installing, proceed in the opposite order
of removal.
1. Lay on the case on the left-hand side and
push it forward, arrow 1.
2. Swing the case toward the inside, refer to
arrow 2.
3. Push the case forward at the ends until it
engages in the two side brackets.
4. Check whether the case is properly locked
in place by pulling it with a sudden move-
ment.
BMW X6: cargo bay cover
Deploy cargo bay cover by pulling back.
Do not place heavy or hard objects on the
cargo bay cover. If you do so, they may
pose a danger to vehicle occupants during
braking or evasive maneuvers.<
Removing
1. Grasp retracted cargo bay cover under-
neath the upper fold on both sides.
2. Pull the cover back out of the side brackets.
3. Depending on your vehicle's equipment
package, you can store the cover under the
floor panel in the cargo bay.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
132
Installing
When installing, proceed in the opposite order
of removal.
1. Set the cargo bay cover into place on the
left and right sides.
2. Lift the back of the cover slightly and slide
forward until it snaps into the two side
brackets.
Expanding cargo bay
The rear seat backrest is divided. You can fold
down both sides separately in order to expand
the cargo bay.
BMW X6: before folding the rear seat
backrest forward or using the ski bag,
remove beverage containers from the cup
holder and close the cup holder.<
Reach into the recess and pull toward the front.
When you fold back the backrest, be sure
that the catch engages securely. The red
warning indicator disappears in the recess
when the catch is engaged. If it is not properly
engaged, transported cargo could enter the
passenger compartment during braking or eva-
sive maneuvers and endanger the vehicle occu-
pants.<
To ensure that the safety systems con-
tinue to provide optimized protection,
observe the safety belt information on
page 48.<
Storage compartments in
cargo bay
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the fol-
lowing storage compartments are provided in
the cargo bay.
> Storage compartments behind the remov-
able side panels on the right and left side of
the cargo bay
* and under the floor panel
flap, storage compartment
* right side of
cargo bay.
> Storage tray
* under the floor panel flap,
capacity approx. 21 US gal/80 liter.
> Retaining straps
* on the left and right side
panel for securing small objects.
> Hooks
*, e.g. for hanging up shopping bags
or carrier bags on the left and right in the
cargo bay.
> Net
* on the left side panel of the cargo bay
for smaller objects.
> Lashing rail with lashing eyes
*. You can
secure heavy-duty cargo straps on the lash-
ing eyes.
They can be removed at the notches in the
rails. To move the lashing eyes, press the
button.
Read and comply with the information
enclosed with the heavy-duty cargo
straps.<
Floor panel flap
To access the onboard toolkit etc.
To open, swing up the flap by the handle, refer
to arrow.
The floor panel flap can be locked
*.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
133
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Adaptive fixing system*
The adaptive fixing system is used to divide up
the cargo bay. It consists of two brackets with a
telescopic rail and retaining straps. These are
guided into the two rails on the cargo bay floor.
Before using the adaptive fixing system,
fold up and lock the rear seat backrest;
otherwise, the cargo could be thrown into the
vehicle interior in an accident.<
1 Brackets
2 Telescopic rail
3 Notch in the cargo bay rail
Mounting brackets
The two brackets are connected with a tele-
scopic rail.
1. Insert the brackets at the respective notch
in the rail on the cargo bay floor.
2. Press down the brackets to push them into
the desired position.
3. Check the firm seating of the brackets.
They must be clearly heard to engage.
Do not lay cargo on the brackets, as oth-
erwise they could be unlocked.<
Dividing up cargo bay
You can position the cargo as follows:
> between the rear seat backrest and the
telescopic rail
> between the telescopic rail and the retain-
ing strap
Positioning cargo between telescopic rail and
retaining strap:
1. Lay the cargo on the telescopic rail. Press
the button, arrow 1, and route the retaining
strap around the cargo, arrow 2.
2. Hook the retaining strap into the mount 3
on the telescopic rail.
3. Press the button of the bracket, arrow 1.
The retaining strap is tensioned.
You can also hook both retaining straps
into each other.<
When you are finished using the adaptive fixing
system, unhook the retaining strap and guide it
back into the bracket in order to prevent dam-
age and injury.
Then slide the fastening system toward the
front in order to permit the best possible use of
the cargo bay.
Removing brackets
Press down the brackets, slide them up to the
notches of the rails and remove them.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment pack-
age, you can store the adaptive fixing system
under the floor panel in the cargo bay.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
134
Ski bag*
The ski bag is designed for safe, clean transport
of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up to 2 snow-
boards.
With the ski bag you can stow skis with a length
of up to 6.9 ft/2.10 m. When skis of 6.9 ft/
2.10 m in length are loaded, the ski bag will tend
to contract, reducing its overall capacity.
Before loading the ski bag, fold in the dis-
play screen of the DVD system in the
rear
*, as otherwise the display screen could be
damaged.<
Loading
1. Fold down the center armrest, press the
button and open the cover.
2. Press the button again; the cover in the
cargo bay opens. If you press the button
firmly the first time, this cover also opens.
3. Extend the ski bag between the front seats
and fill it. The zipper facilitates access to the
stowed items and drying of the ski bag.
4. BMW X5: insert the latch plate of the ski bag
retaining strap into the center safety belt
buckle that is marked CENTER.
BMW X6: attach the hook of the ski bag
retaining strap to the eyelet on the rear seat
backrest.
Only stow clean skis in the ski bag. Wrap sharp
edges to prevent damage.
Securing cargo
After loading, secure the ski bag and its con-
tents. Tighten the retaining strap on the ten-
sioning buckle for this purpose.
Secure the ski bag in this way. If you fail to
do so, it could endanger occupants dur-
ing braking or evasive maneuvers.<
To store the ski bag, perform the above steps in
reverse order.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Controls
135
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Removing ski bag
The ski bag can be completely removed, e.g. for
faster drying or to allow you to put it to other
uses.
1. Pull the handle toward the front, arrow 1.
2. Take out the ski bag upward, arrow 2.
3. Close the cover in the cargo bay.
Details on various inserts are available
from your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle
Center.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Driving tips
This section is designed to provide you
with extra support by supplying information
useful in dealing with specific driving
and operating conditions.
Driving tips
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
138
Things to remember when driving
Break-in period
Moving parts need breaking-in time to adjust to
each other. To ensure that your vehicle contin-
ues to provide optimized economy of operation
throughout an extended service life, we request
that you devote careful attention to the follow-
ing section.
Engine and differential
Always obey all official speed limits.
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Drive at changing engine and vehicle speeds,
however do not exceed:
> Gasoline engine
4,500 rpm or 100 mph/160 km/h
> Diesel engine
3,500 rpm or 90 mph/150 km/h
Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the
transmission's kick-down mode during these
initial miles.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
increased.
Tires
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac-
tion potential until after an initial break-in
period. Therefore, drive reservedly during the
first 200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of
approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
contact and wear patterns between brake pads
and rotors. Drive in a reserved manner during
this break-in period.
Following part replacement
Observe the break-in instructions again if com-
ponents mentioned above must be replaced
after subsequent driving operation.
Saving fuel
The fuel consumption of your vehicle depends
on various factors. Through a few simple steps,
your driving style, and regular maintenance, you
can have a positive influence on your fuel con-
sumption and environmental impact.
Removing unnecessary cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Removing add-on parts after use
Remove unneeded auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear
luggage racks after use. Add-on parts attached
to the vehicle impede the aerodynamics and
increase the fuel consumption.
Closing windows and glass sunroof*/
panorama glass sunroof*
An open glass sunroof/panorama glass sunroof
or open windows likewise increase the drag
coefficient and therefore the fuel consumption.
Checking tire inflation pressures
regularly
Check and correct the tire inflation pressure as
needed at least twice a month and before long
trips.
An insufficient tire inflation pressure increases
the rolling resistance and thus increases the
fuel consumption and tire wear.
Driving off immediately
Do not allow the engine to warm up by leaving it
running while the vehicle remains stationary.
Instead, begin to drive at a moderate engine
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Driving tips
139
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
speed. This is the fastest way for the cold
engine to reach its operating temperature.
Thinking ahead when driving
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
To do so, maintain the appropriate distance
from the vehicle in front of you. An anticipatory
and smooth driving style reduces fuel con-
sumption.
Avoiding high engine speeds
Driving at a low engine speed reduces fuel con-
sumption and minimizes wear.
Taking advantage of coasting
The flow of fuel is interrupted when coasting.
Switching off engine during longer
stops
Switch off the engine at longer stops such as
traffic signals, railroad crossings, or in traffic
jams. Even having the engine switched off for
approx. 4 seconds results in fuel savings.
Switching off functions currently not
required
Functions such as air conditioning, seat heat-
ing, or rear window defrosting consume a lot of
energy and require additional fuel. Their influ-
ence is particularly pronounced in city traffic
and stop & go operation. For this reason, it is a
good idea to switch these functions off when
they are not really needed.
Having maintenance carried out
Have the vehicle serviced regularly in order to
achieve the optimum economy and service life
of your vehicle. BMW recommends having the
maintenance performed by a BMW Sports
Activity Vehicle Center. Also pay attention to
the BMW maintenance system, refer to
page 263.
General driving notes
Closing liftgate
Operate the vehicle only when the liftgate
is completely closed. Otherwise, exhaust
fumes could enter into the passenger compart-
ment.<
If it is absolutely necessary to drive with the lift-
gate open:
1. Close all windows as well as the glass sun-
roof
*/panorama glass sunroof*.
2. Increase the air volume of the automatic cli-
mate control to a high level, refer to
page 116.
Hot exhaust system
As in all vehicles, extremely high temper-
atures are generated on the exhaust sys-
tem. Do not remove the heat shields installed
adjacent to it, and never apply undercoating to
them. When driving, standing at idle and while
parking take care to avoid possible contact
between the hot exhaust system and any highly
flammable materials such as hay, leaves, grass,
etc. Such contact could lead to a fire, and with it
the risk of serious property damage as well as
personal injury. Do not touch hot tailpipes, as
otherwise there is a danger of burns.<
Diesel particulate filter*
Soot particles are collected in the diesel partic-
ulate filter and are periodically cleared out
through high-temperature combustion. This
cleaning process lasts for several minutes. You
may sometimes notice it by the fact that the
engine temporarily runs a little less smoothly
and requires a somewhat higher engine speed
to achieve the usual power. You may also notice
additional sounds and small amounts of smoke
coming from the exhaust, even for a brief time
after switching off the engine.
Hydroplaning
When driving on wet or slushy roads,
reduce road speed. If you do not, a wedge
of water can form between tires and road sur-
face. This phenomenon is referred to as hydro-
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
140
planing, and is characterized by a partial or
complete loss of contact between the tires and
the road surface, ultimately undermining your
ability to steer and brake the vehicle.<
The risk of hydroplaning increases as the tread
depth of the tires decreases, also refer to Mini-
mum tread depth on page 255.
Driving through water
Maximum water depth:
> BMW X5 20 in/50 cm
> BMW X6 17 in/45 cm
Only drive through water up to the above-
mentioned depth at no greater than walk-
ing speed; otherwise, the engine, electrical sys-
tem, and transmission can be damaged.<
Braking safely
Your BMW is equipped with ABS as a standard
feature. In situations that require it, it is best to
brake with full force. Since the vehicle maintains
steering responsiveness, you can still avoid
possible obstacles with a minimum of steering
effort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal, combined with
sounds from the hydraulic circuits, indicate that
ABS is in its active mode.
Do not drive with your foot resting on the
brake pedal. Even light but consistent
pedal pressure can lead to high temperatures,
brake wear and possibly even brake failure.<
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet or there is heavy rain,
briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal
every few miles. Monitor traffic conditions to
ensure that this maneuver does not endanger
other road users. The heat generated in this
process helps dry the pads and rotors to ensure
that full braking efficiency will then be available
when you need it.
Hills
To prevent overheating and the resulting
reduced efficiency of the brake system,
drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear in which the least braking is required. Even
light but consistent pressure on the brake pedal
can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and
possibly even brake failure.<
The braking effect of the engine can be further
increased by downshifting in the manual mode
of the automatic transmission, if necessary into
first gear, refer to page 71. This prevents an
excessive strain on the brakes.
Do not drive in idle or with the engine
stopped, otherwise there will be no
engine braking action or support of the braking
force and steering.
Never allow floor mats, carpets or any other
objects to protrude into the area of movement
of the pedals and impair their operation.<
Corrosion on brake rotors
When the vehicle is driven only occasionally,
during extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all, and in operating conditions where
brake applications are less frequent, there is an
increased tendency for corrosion to form on
rotors, while contaminants accumulate on the
brake pads. This occurs because the minimum
pressure which must be exerted by the pads
during brake applications to clean the rotors is
not reached.
Should corrosion form on the brake rotors, the
brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating
effect that even extended application will fail to
cure.
When vehicle is parked
Condensation forms in the automatic climate
control system during operation, and then exits
under the vehicle. Traces of condensed water
under the vehicle are therefore normal.
Before driving into a car wash
Fold in the exterior mirrors, refer to page 57,
otherwise they could be damaged due to the
width of the vehicle.
Release the parking brake, particularly when
you have activated Automatic Hold, refer to
page 67.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Driving tips
141
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
General information on the care of your BMW is
provided beginning on page 265.
Mixed tires*
Before driving into a car wash, make sure
that the vehicle width is not too large for
the car wash, as otherwise the vehicle and the
car wash could be damaged.<
BMW X5: rear window wiper
The rear window wiper can be damaged in car
washes. Take appropriate protective measures;
ask the car wash operator if necessary.
With comfort access*
Insert the remote control into the ignition lock.
The engine can be switched off in transmission
position N, also refer to page 41.
Loading
To avoid loading the tires beyond their
approved carrying capacity, never over-
load the vehicle. Overloading can lead to over-
heating and increases the rate at which damage
develops inside the tires. The ultimate result
can assume the form of a sudden blow-out.<
Make sure that no fluids leak in the cargo
bay; otherwise the vehicle could be dam-
aged.<
Determining loading limit
1. Locate the following statement on your
vehicle's placard
*:
The combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
YYY lbs. or XXX kg. Otherwise, this could
damage the vehicle and produce unstable
vehicle operating conditions.<
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from YYY lbs. or XXX kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the YYY amount equals
1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lbs.
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs.:
1,400 lbs. minus 750 lbs. = 650 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, part of
the load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult the manual for
transporting a trailer to determine how this
may reduce the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
Load
BMW X5:
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
142
BMW X6:
The permissible load is the total of the weight of
occupants and cargo/luggage. The greater the
weight of occupants, the less cargo/luggage
can be transported.
Stowing cargo
BMW X5
BMW X6
> Load heavy cargo as far forward and as low
as possible, placing it directly behind the
backrest.
> Cover sharp edges and corners.
> When transporting very heavy cargo with
unoccupied rear seats, insert the safety
belts, the outer safety belts in the BMW X5,
into the buckles on the opposite sides.
> Do not pile objects higher than the top edge
of the backrest.
> Wrap sharp-edged or pointed objects
which could strike the rear window while
driving.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Driving tips
143
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Securing cargo
BMW X5
BMW X6
> Use the luggage net*, retaining straps*, or
securing straps to hold down small and
lightweight luggage and cargo.
> For larger and heavier pieces, heavy-duty
cargo straps
* are available from your BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center. Four lashing
eyes
* mounted in the cargo bay are used to
secure these heavy-duty cargo straps, refer
to illustrations.
> Observe the special instructions supplied
with the heavy-duty cargo straps.
Position and secure the cargo as
described above, so that it cannot endan-
ger the car's occupants, for example if sudden
braking or evasive maneuvers are necessary.
Never exceed either the approved gross vehicle
weight or either of the approved axle weights,
refer to page 289, as excessive loads can pose
a safety hazard, and may also place you in viola-
tion of traffic safety laws.
You should never transport unsecured heavy or
hard objects in the passenger compartment, as
they could fly around and pose a safety hazard
to the vehicle's occupants during abrupt brak-
ing or evasive maneuvers.
Use only the lashing eyes pictured to fasten the
heavy-duty cargo straps. Do not secure cargo
with the attachment points for the top tether,
refer to page 62; otherwise they could be dam-
aged.<
Roof-mounted luggage rack*
A special rack system is available as an option
for your BMW. Please comply with the precau-
tions included with the installation instructions.
Loading roof-mounted luggage rack
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of
gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on
its handling and steering response. You should
therefore always remember not to exceed the
approved roof load capacity, the approved
gross vehicle weight or the axle weights when
loading the rack.
You can find the specified weights under
Weights on page 289.
The load on the roof must be evenly distributed
and must not extend outward beyond the limits
of the loading surface. Always stow the heaviest
pieces on the bottom. Be sure that adequate
clearance is maintained for raising the glass
sunroof
*/panorama glass sunroof* and that
objects do not project into the opening path of
the liftgate.
Secure roof-mounted cargo correctly and
securely to prevent it from shifting or falling off
during the trip.
Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration and
braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
144
Driving on poor roads
Your BMW is at home on all roads and surfaces.
It combines a 4-wheel drive system with the
advantages of a normal passenger car.
Do not drive on unpaved terrain, as other-
wise the vehicle may be damaged.<
When you are driving on poor roads, there are a
few points which you should strictly observe for
your own safety, for that of your passengers,
and for the safety of the vehicle:
> Familiarize yourself with the vehicle before
driving off and avoid taking risks at all costs.
> Adapt your driving speed to the road condi-
tions. The steeper and rougher the road
surface is, the lower the speed should be.
> If you want to drive on very steep uphill or
downhill gradients, make sure beforehand
that the engine oil and coolant levels are
near the MAX mark, refer to page 259.
BMW X5: you can operate your vehicle on
uphill and downhill gradients with a maxi-
mum slope of 50%.
> On very steep downhill slopes, use Hill
Descent Control HDC, refer to page 98.
BMW X5: it is possible to start off on inclines
of up to 33%. The permissible body roll is
50%.
> While driving, watch carefully for obstacles
such as rocks or holes. Try to avoid these
obstacles whenever possible.
> Make sure that the undercarriage does not
touch the ground, for example on crests and
bumpy roads. The ground clearance of the
vehicle is a maximum of approx. 8 in/20 cm.
Please note that the ground clearance can
vary depending on loading and the driving
conditions of the vehicle.
> Only drive through road surface water up to
a maximum water depth of
> BMW X5 20 in/50 cm
> BMW X6 17 in/45 cm
and only drive at walking speed; do not
remain stationary.
> After driving through water at low speed,
lightly press the brake pedal several times
to dry the brakes and to prevent the braking
effect from being reduced by wetness.
> Depending on the condition of the surface,
it may be practical to briefly activate DTC,
refer to DTC Dynamic Traction Control on
page 97.
> If the drive wheels spin on one side, depress
the accelerator pedal sufficiently so that the
driving stability control systems can distrib-
ute the drive forces to the individual wheels.
Please note the following points after driving on
poor roads to maintain the driving safety of your
BMW:
> Clean the coarsest dirt from the body.
> Clean mud, snow, ice etc. from the wheels
and tires and check the tires for damage.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Navigation
This chapter describes how you can
enter destinations and specify your route
so that your navigation system guides you
reliably to your destination.
Navigation
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Starting navigation system
148
Starting navigation system
Your navigation system can use satellites to
ascertain the precise position of your vehicle
and guide you reliably to any destination you
enter.
Navigation DVD
The navigation system requires a special navi-
gation DVD. The latest version is available at
your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center.
Inserting navigation DVD
Use the lower drive for navigation DVD.
1. Insert the navigation DVD with the labeled
side up.
The navigation DVD is automatically pulled
in.
2. Allow several seconds for the system to
scan the data from the DVD.
Removing navigation DVD
1. Press the button 1.
The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.
2. Remove the DVD.
If the DVD is not ejected from the drive, it is pos-
sible that it is blocked. In this case a message is
also shown on the Control Display.
Display in assistance window
You can display the route or the current position
in the assistance window. This display remains
visible even if you change to another applica-
tion.
1. Move the controller to the right to change to
the assistance window.
2. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
3. Select the desired route view or "Current
position".
4. Press the controller.
Displaying arrow view in map view
If the navigation system suggests a change of
direction, the arrow view is briefly displayed.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
149
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
4. Turn the controller until "Language / Units"
is selected and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Languages" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Arrow display pop-up instructions"
and press the controller.
The arrow view appears in the assistance
window.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Destination entry
150
Destination entry
In entering your destination you can select from
among the following options:
> Entering a destination manually, see below
> Entering destination via voice*, refer to
page 153
> Selecting destination using information,
refer to page 156
> Selecting destination from a list, refer to
Destination list, page 157
> Selecting destination from address book,
refer to page 158
> Selecting home address, refer to page 160
After selecting your destination you can pro-
ceed to start the destination guidance, refer to
page 162.
You can also store a navigation destination on
the programmable memory buttons, refer to
page 21.
Enter data only with the vehicle station-
ary, and always give priority to the appli-
cable traffic regulations in the event of any con-
tradiction between traffic and road conditions
and the instructions issued by the navigation
system. If you do not observe this precaution,
you can endanger the vehicle occupants and
other road users.<
Opening navigation system
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the right to open
"Navigation".
3. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
The Control Display shows:
> the arrow view or map view during destina-
tion guidance
> the destination list when destination guid-
ance is switched off
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
151
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Entering a destination
manually
The system's word matching principle makes it
easier for you to enter the names of streets or
towns/cities, refer to page 161. This allows you
to enter different spellings and completes your
entry automatically so that stored names can be
called up quickly.
1. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Navigation" is selected and
press the controller.
"New destination" is selected.
2. Press the controller.
3. Select "Enter address" and press the con-
troller.
The system also supports you with the follow-
ing features:
> If you do not enter a street, the system will
guide you to the downtown area of a town or
city.
> You can skip the entry of country and town/
city if the current entries should be retained
for your new destination.
Selecting country
1. Select "State / Province" or the displayed
country and press the controller.
The list of available countries appears on
the display.
2. Select the country of destination and press
the controller.
In order to be able to start the destination guid-
ance, at least the town/city of the destination or
its zip code must be entered.
Entering destination via town/city
name
1. Select "Town / City" or the displayed town/
city and press the controller.
2. Select the starting letter and press the con-
troller.
A list of all towns/cities starting with this let-
ter appears on the Control Display.
3. To delete the letter entered if necessary:
> Delete individual numbers or letters:
Move the controller toward the right to
select and press the controller.
> Delete all numbers or letters:
Move the controller toward the right to
select and press the controller
longer.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Destination entry
152
4. If necessary, enter more letters.
The list gradually grows smaller each time
you enter a new letter.
> Enter blank space if necessary:
Select the symbol and press the con-
troller.
5. Change to the third field from the top if nec-
essary. Turn the controller until the town/
city name is selected from the list and press
the controller.
Entering destination via zip code
1. Select "Town / City" and press the control-
ler.
2. Enter the zip code:
Select the desired digits and press the con-
troller.
> Enter a blank space:
Select the symbol and press the con-
troller.
> Delete individual numbers or letters:
Move the controller toward the right to
select and press the controller.
> Delete all numbers or letters:
Move the controller toward the right to
select and press the controller
longer.
3. Select the zip code and press the controller.
The corresponding destination is displayed.
4. Change into the third field from the top.
Turn the controller until the destination is
selected and press the controller.
Entering street, house number and
intersection
After the street you can also enter the intersec-
tion or the house number.
Entering street and intersection
1. Select "Street" or the displayed street and
press the controller.
2. Enter the street.
The street is entered exactly like the desti-
nation.
The intersection is entered in the same way as
the street.
Entering a street without entering a
town/city of destination
You can also enter a street without entering a
town/city of destination. In this case all streets
of the entered country are offered for selection.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
153
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
The related town/city is displayed after the
street name.
If a town/city has already been entered, you can
undo this entry. This may be practical if the
desired street does not exist in the entered des-
tination, because, for example, it belongs to
another part of the town/city.
1. Change to upper field.
The arrow is selected.
2. Turn the controller to the right until the
request for the entry of a street in the coun-
try appears and press the controller.
3. Change to the second field from the top and
enter the street.
Entering house number
All house numbers stored for the street on the
navigation DVD can be entered.
1. Select "House number" and press the con-
troller.
2. Enter the house number:
Select the desired digits and press the con-
troller.
3. Change into the third field from the top.
Turn the controller until the house number
is selected and press the controller.
Starting destination guidance with
manual destination entry
> Select "Start guidance" and press the con-
troller.
Destination guidance starts immediately.
> If the destination guidance does not need to
be started immediately:
Select "Add to destination list" and press
the controller.
The destination is stored in the destination
list, refer to page 157.
Entering destination via
voice*
You can enter a desired destination with the
voice activation system. When entering the
destination, it is possible to change between
voice command and iDrive at any time. Reacti-
vate the voice command system for this pur-
pose if necessary.
With {Options} you can have the possible
commands read aloud.<
1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
2. {Enter address}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Destination entry
154
Selecting country
1. Wait for the system to ask for the country of
destination.
Say the name of the country of destination in
the language of the voice activation system.
Entering destination
The destination can be spelled or entered as an
entire word.
Spelling destination
To enter the destination, spell it using the
orthography of the country of destination.
Pronounce the letters smoothly and at normal
volume, avoiding excessive emphasis and
pauses.
The system can suggest up to 20 destina-
tions that match your entries. Up to
6 entries are displayed at once on the Con-
trol Display.
The town/city can also be selected from the list
via iDrive:
Turn the controller until the destination is
selected and press the controller.
Entering destination as an entire word*
Towns/cities and streets located in the region
where the language of the voice activation sys-
tem is spoken can be entered as an entire word.
Example: to enter a destination located in the
US as an entire word, the language of the sys-
tem must be English.
Speak smoothly and at normal volume, avoiding
excessive emphases and pauses.
1. Wait for the system to request the destina-
tion.
The system can suggest up to 6 destina-
tions that match your entries.
The town/city can also be selected from the list
via iDrive:
Turn the controller until the destination is
selected and press the controller.
Destinations that sound the same which
cannot be differentiated by the system
are summarized in a separate list and shown as
a destination followed by three dots.
2. Say the name of the country of destina-
tion.
1. Spell town/city name:
Say at least the first three letters of the
destination. The more letters you say,
the more exactly the system recognizes
the town/city.
A destination is suggested by the system.
2. Select city/town:
> Choose selected city/town: {Yes}
> Select other city/town: {No}
> Select entry, e.g. {Entry 3}
> Display additional entries of the list:
{Next page}
> Spell the city/town again: {Repeat}
2. Say the name of the destination.
A destination is suggested by the system.
3. Select city/town:
> Choose selected city/town: {Yes}
> Select other city/town: {No}
> Select entry, e.g. {Entry 3}
> Enter city/town again: {Repeat}
> To enter the town/city by spelling:
{Spell}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
155
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Select this entry with {Yes} if necessary. Then
select the desired city/town in this list.<
Entering street and house number
The street is entered in the same way as the
destination.
To enter the house number:
Up to 4-digit house numbers can be entered.
Say the house number as individual numbers.
Starting destination guidance
Destination guidance starts immediately.
Saving destination
The destination is added to the destination list
or can be stored in the address book.
Selecting destination via map
If you only know the location of the town/city or
street of the destination, then you can enter the
destination by using a map. You can use the
cursor to select the destination on the map and
then apply it in the destination guidance.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
"New destination" is selected.
2. Press the controller.
3. Select "Input map" and press the controller.
A section of a map is displayed on the Con-
trol Display:
> During destination guidance, around the
current destination
> With the destination guidance deacti-
vated, around the last destination
entered
4. Select destination with cursor.
> Changing scale: turn the controller.
> Moving map: move the controller in the
corresponding direction.
The controller can be moved to the left,
right, forward and back.
5. To apply or store the destination in the des-
tination guidance, press the controller.
The selected destination and other menu
items are displayed.
6. Select the desired menu item:
> "Start route guidance" starts destination
guidance.
> "Show current position" places the cur-
rent position in the center of the map.
> "Show destination position" places the
current destination in the center of the
map.
1. {House number}
2. Say the house number.
{Start guidance}
{Add to destination list} or
{Add to address book}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Destination entry
156
> "Return to map" changes back to the
"Input map".
> Exit the menu.
7. Press the controller.
The map for the destination entry can also be
displayed in the map display:
Select the symbol and press the controller.
Selecting destination using
information
You can obtain a display of selected destina-
tions, e.g. hotels, sights or hospitals, and apply
them in the destination guidance.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Select "Information" and press the control-
ler.
3. Select location:
> "On destination"
> "On location"
> "On a new destination"
4. Press the controller.
5. Make your selection, e.g. "Hotels and res-
taurants", and press the controller.
6. Enter search criteria if necessary, e.g. the
maximum distance from the current loca-
tion.
7. Select "<Start search>" and press the con-
troller.
These destinations are displayed on the
Control Display.
8. Select a destination and press the control-
ler.
The scope of the information and
symbols is dependent on the respec-
tive navigation DVD.<
9. Select the desired menu item:
> To apply the address in the destination
list and start the destination guidance:
Select the symbol and press the
controller.
> To establish a telephone connection:
Select the symbol and press the con-
troller.
> To display additional destinations:
Select the symbol and press the
controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
157
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
> To start a new search:
Select the symbol and press the con-
troller.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Symbols in map view
If, for example, you have selected the category
Hotels and have started the search, the hotels
are shown on the map as symbols.
To hide the symbols in the map view:
1. Select the symbol and press the control-
ler.
2. Select "Hide map icons" and press the con-
troller.
The symbols are hidden.
To display the symbols:
Select "Show map icons" and press the con-
troller.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Destination list
The last 20 entered destinations are shown in
the destination list. You can display these desti-
nations and apply them in the destination guid-
ance.
For example, to plan a longer route, you can
store all destinations you want to drive to in
advance in the destination list, refer to Entering
a destination manually on page 151.
Select "Navigation" and press the controller.
The last destination entered is the first item in
the destination list.
This symbol indicates the current destina-
tion during destination guidance.
To display additional destinations from the des-
tination list:
Turn the controller.
Applying destination in destination
guidance
1. Select the desired destination and press
the controller.
2. Select "Start guidance" and press the con-
troller.
Editing destination list
1. Select the desired destination in the desti-
nation list and press the controller.
2. The selected destination can be edited:
> Store entry:
Select "Add to address book".
> Display information on destination:
Select "Information on destination".
> Delete entry:
Select "Delete entry".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Destination entry
158
> Delete all entries:
Select "Delete list". The destination
guidance is switched off.
> Change entry:
Select "Edit". For operation, refer to
Entering destination via town/city name,
page 151.
3. Press the controller.
Address book
Opening address book
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
Select "Address book" and press the controller.
Storing destinations in address book
You can store approx. 100 destinations in the
address book.
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "New address" and press the con-
troller.
3. Select "Enter address" and press the con-
troller.
4. Enter name and address, also refer to
Entering a destination manually, page 151.
5. Select "Store in address book" and press
the controller.
The entry is stored in the address book.
You can also store a destination from the desti-
nation list into the address book, refer to
page 157.
Storing current position*
The current position can be applied in the
address book.
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
2. Change into the third field from the top.
Turn the controller until "New address" is
selected and press the controller.
3. Select "Use current location as address"
and press the controller.
The name given can be changed. For oper-
ation, refer to Entering a destination manu-
ally, page 151.
4. Select "Store in address book" and press
the controller.
You can also apply your current position in the
address book if you have left the sector covered
by the navigation DVD. In this case, you must
enter a name.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
159
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Selecting destinations from address
book
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
The stored entries appear on the Control
Display.
2. Select the entry and press the controller.
To start the destination guidance:
Select "Start guidance" and press the control-
ler.
Changing destinations from address
book
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select the entry and press the controller.
3. Select "Edit address" and press the con-
troller.
4. Change entry.
For operation, refer to Entering a destina-
tion manually, page 151.
5. Select "Store in address book" and press
the controller.
Deleting individual destinations from
address book
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select the entry and press the controller.
3. Select "Delete address" and press the con-
troller.
Deleting all destinations from address
book
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Delete data" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Delete address book" and press the
controller.
7. Select "Yes" and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Destination entry
160
Home address
You can store your current position or the cur-
rent destination as the home address in the
address book. This entry occupies the second
position in the address book.
Storing home address
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
2. Change into the third field from the top.
Turn the controller until "Home address" is
selected and press the controller.
3. Select "Use current location as address", or
"Save current destination" during the desti-
nation guidance, and press the controller.
4. Select "Store in address book" and press
the controller.
Applying home address as destination
1. Select "Home address" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "Start guidance" and press the con-
troller.
Changing home address
1. Select "Home address" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "Edit address" and press the con-
troller. For operation, refer to Entering a
destination manually, page 151.
Selecting route
You can influence the calculated route by
choosing certain route criteria. You can change
the route criteria as often as you like while
entering the destination and whenever the des-
tination guidance is active.
The route is planned according to fixed rules.
The road type is taken into account, e.g.
whether it is a highway or a winding road. The
road types are stored on the navigation DVD.
As a result, the routes recommended by the
navigation system may not always be the same
ones that you would choose based on personal
experience.
Changing route criteria
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Change into the third field from the top.
Turn the controller until "Route preference"
is selected and press the controller.
The various criteria are listed on the Control
Display.
3. Select a route criterion for the route:
> "With highways"
Freeways and major traffic arteries are
given priority
> "Avoid highways"
Freeways are avoided where possible
> "Fast route"
The short traveling time, being a combi-
nation of the shortest possible route and
the fastest roads
> "Short route"
Short route, irrespective of how fast or
slow progress will be
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
161
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
4. Press the controller.
The route criterion is highlighted.
5. If necessary, select an additional route cri-
terion and then press the controller:
> "Dynamic route"
Automatic changing of the route in case
of traffic obstructions. Depending on
road type and the kind and extent of the
traffic obstruction, the route can also be
calculated so that you travel through the
traffic obstruction.
> "Avoid tollroads"
Tollroads are avoided where possible.
> "Avoid ferries"
Ferries are avoided where possible.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
The route criteria can also be changed in the
arrow or map display.
1. Select the symbol for the route criterion and
press the controller.
2. Select a route criterion and press the con-
troller.
If the route criteria "Avoid highways",
"Avoid tollroads" or "Avoid ferries" are
selected, the calculation time for the route can
increase considerably.<
Word matching principle
The system supports the word matching princi-
ple to make it easier for you to enter the names
of streets or towns/cities. The system runs
ongoing checks, comparing your destination
entries with the data stored on the navigation
DVD as the basis for instant response. The user
benefits include:
> Names of specific locations can also vary
from the official versions if you are using a
spelling that is customary in another coun-
try.
Example:
Instead of "München", you can also enter
the English spelling "Munich" or the Italian
spelling "Monaco".
> When you are entering the names of towns/
cities and streets the system will complete
them automatically as soon as enough let-
ters are available to ensure unambiguous
identification.
> The system only accepts name entries
beginning with letters that are stored on the
navigation DVD. The system will not accept
non existent names and addresses.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Destination guidance
162
Destination guidance
Starting destination
guidance
Via iDrive
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Navigation" is selected and
press the controller.
2. Select a destination from the destination list
and press the controller or enter a new des-
tination, refer to page 150.
3. Select "Start guidance" and press the con-
troller.
After the route has been calculated, destination
guidance is indicated by arrows or a map dis-
play on the Control Display.
The destination guidance can also be started in
the arrow or map view:
Select the symbol and press the controller.
During destination guidance, you can operate
other equipment via iDrive at any time. You will
be punctually notified of a change of direction
by spoken instructions and the display of the
direction arrow.
Via programmable memory buttons
Press the ... button on which the
desired destination is stored, also refer to
page 22.
Ending/continuing
destination guidance
In arrow or map display
Select the symbol and press the controller.
In destination list
This symbol indicates the current destina-
tion.
1. Select the current destination and press the
controller.
2. Select "Stop guidance" and press the con-
troller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
163
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
When you park the vehicle before reaching the
entered destination, the following question is
displayed before beginning the next trip:
"Continue guidance to destination?".
The destination guidance starts automatically
after a short time.
To start the destination guidance:
Select "Yes" and press the controller.
Displaying route
You have the option of displaying various views
of the route during destination guidance.
From another menu, you can change
directly to the screen last displayed,
refer to Comfort opening of menu items,
page 18.<
Displaying arrow display
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Change into the fourth field from the top.
Turn the controller until "Arrow display" is
selected and press the controller.
The arrow display is shown.
1 Switching voice instructions on/off
2 Selecting route criteria
3 Starting/ending destination guidance
4 Arrow to destination from a bird's eye view
5 Distance to the next change of direction
6 Current position
7 Direction of travel
> Outline arrow:
Destination guidance on the calculated
route
> Solid arrow:
Arrow shows the route to be calculated
from a bird's eye view when the vehicle
is not located in an area contained on the
navigation DVD, e.g. in a multilevel park-
ing lot.
Depending on the equipment, the estimated
time of arrival and the distance to the destina-
tion are displayed in the top or bottom line of the
Control Display.
Before a change in direction, the representation
of the arrow changes.
1 Street name for change of direction
2 Distance up to change of direction
3 Change of direction
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Destination guidance
164
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Displaying map view
You can have your current position displayed on
a map. After starting the destination guidance,
the planned route is shown on the map.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Change into the fourth field from the top.
Turn the controller until the desired map
view is selected:
> "Map facing north"
> "Map direction of travel"
> "Perspective"
3. Press the controller.
1 Switching voice instructions on/off
2 Starting/ending destination guidance
3 Selecting destination via map
4 Displaying the menu in which the informa-
tion last selected can be displayed/hidden,
refer to Selecting destination using infor-
mation, page 156
5 Changing map display
> "Map facing north"
> "Map direction of travel"
> "Perspective"
6 Changing route criteria
7 Manually displaying traffic information
*
8 Arrow to destination from a bird's eye view
The estimated time of arrival and the distance
to the destination are shown in the bottom line
of the Control Display.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
At scales of less than 250 miles/500 km, you
have the option of deciding whether to orient
the map to north, toward your current direction
of travel, or show the map in perspective. At
scales of 250 miles/500 km or greater, the map
always points toward north.
Changing map display
Select the corresponding symbol and press the
controller.
The next map display is displayed.
Changing scale
Turn the controller to change the scale.
Displaying roads and towns/cities of
route
You can have the roads and towns/cities along
the route displayed during destination guid-
ance.
The distances remaining to be traveled on each
individual route are also displayed.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Change into the third field from the top.
Turn the controller until "Route list" is
selected and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
165
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Destination guidance via
voice instructions
Switching voice instructions on/off
Voice instructions can be switched on or off
during the destination guidance in the arrow or
map view:
Select the symbol and press the controller.
To switch the voice instructions on and off at
any time:
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Language / Units"
is selected and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Languages" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Navigation voice instructions" and
press the controller.
The voice instructions are switched on.
Repeating and canceling voice
instructions
With the programmable buttons on the steering
wheel you can also make the following settings,
refer to page 59:
> Repeat the voice instruction:
Press the button.
> Switch voice instructions on/off:
Hold the button down.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Destination guidance
166
Setting volume of voice instructions
The volume can only be adjusted while a voice
instruction is being output.
1. Repeat the last voice instruction, if neces-
sary.
2. Turn the knob during the voice instruction
to select the desired volume.
This volume is independent of the volume of the
audio sources.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Changing route
During destination guidance, you can revise the
navigation system's route recommendations to
avoid particular stretches of road. Enter the
number of miles/kilometers that you want to
travel before returning to the original route.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Change into the third field from the top.
Turn the controller until "New route" is
selected and press the controller.
3. Turn the controller to enter the desired
number and press the controller.
The route is recalculated.
To exit from the menu without changing the
route:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Traffic information*
In many congested areas, you can receive traf-
fic information transmitted by radio stations.
The traffic conditions are monitored by traffic
management centers and the traffic information
is periodically updated.
During destination guidance, the traffic infor-
mation relevant to your planned route is auto-
matically displayed and, if you wish, taken into
account in the route planning. Whether destina-
tion guidance is active or not, you can have the
traffic information displayed in the map view or
in the traffic info list.
Switching reception of traffic
information on/off
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Traffic Info set-
tings" is selected and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
167
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
5. Select "Traffic Info" and press the control-
ler.
The traffic information can be received and
displayed.
"AUTO": automatic selection of the Traffic Info
station with the strongest reception.
Depending on the station, either the sta-
tion name, frequency, local number or
other information is displayed.<
Manually displaying traffic information
During destination guidance
During destination guidance, traffic information
can be displayed in the arrow or map view.
If the symbol is shown with a red border, traf-
fic information is available for the planned route.
Select the symbol and press the controller.
During destination guidance, the traffic infor-
mation on the planned route is marked with a
yellow diamond.
First the traffic information along the planned
route is shown sorted according to the distance
to the current vehicle position.
With destination guidance switched off
1. Open the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the right to open
"Navigation".
3. Select "Traffic Info" and press the control-
ler.
First the traffic information along the planned
route is shown sorted according to the distance
to the current vehicle position.
Depiction of traffic information in map
view
The traffic information symbols are shown in
the map view up to a scale of 100 miles/200 km.
The section of the route affected by a traffic
report as well as the indication for the type of
incident, which will be described below, are dis-
played and hidden. This occurs as a function of
the scale selected.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Destination guidance
168
Displaying detailed traffic information
Select traffic information from the displayed list
and press the controller.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Symbols for traffic information
Traffic event with map scales greater
than 5 miles/10 km, arrow points in
the direction of travel concerned.
Several traffic events have been
received. Select a smaller scale to
display these individually.
Traffic light failure
Roadwork
General traffic obstruction
Transport of hazardous load
Vehicle on wrong carriage way
Danger
Low clearance
No parking
Fog
Heavy rain
Slippery road
Cross winds
Smog
Road closed
Slow traffic
Traffic back up
Stopped traffic
Icy roads
Uneven surface
Accident
Lane closure
Delay
Police checkpoint
Slow traffic or other traffic event
Stop-and-go traffic
Stopped traffic
Traffic event in both directions of
travel
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
169
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Traffic information during destination
guidance
If there are traffic obstructions on the planned
route, the traffic information symbols are dis-
played with a red border.
System response will vary depending on
whether or not "Dynamic route" is selected,
refer to page 160.
Displaying traffic obstructions
If a traffic obstruction is reported to the naviga-
tion system and "Dynamic route" is not
selected, then you will be provided with certain
information from a distance of approx. 25 miles/
40 km, e.g. the length of the traffic jam.
The last possible junction will be displayed
shortly before this.
Select "Detour" and press the controller.
The navigation system determines a new route
to bypass the traffic congestion.
This information is displayed even if you have
activated a different function on the Control
Display.
Dynamic route planning
When "Dynamic route" is selected, the route
will be changed automatically in the event of a
traffic obstruction. The system does not point
out traffic obstructions along the original route.
Depending on road type and the kind and extent
of the traffic obstruction, the calculated route
may nevertheless lead through the traffic
obstruction.
Displaying current position
You can have your current position displayed
even when the destination guidance is
switched off.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Change into the fourth field from the top.
Turn the controller until "Current position"
is selected and press the controller.
The current position of your BMW is displayed.
If the navigation system is unable to identify a
town or city, your current map coordinates will
appear.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
You can also have the current position dis-
played on a map, refer to page 164.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
What to do if …
170
What to do if …
What to do if …
> a navigation DVD is inserted, but an instruc-
tion to insert the DVD appears on the Con-
trol Display?
The navigation DVD may not be the correct
DVD for the navigation system. This infor-
mation is indicated on the DVD label.
> you request the current position of your
vehicle, but do not receive a precise dis-
play?
The system is unable to receive enough
GPS signals at your current position due to
obstructions, your position is not yet avail-
able on your navigation DVD, or the system
is in the process of calculating your posi-
tion. Reception is best when you have an
unobstructed view to the sky.
> the destination guidance does not accept a
destination?
The data of the destination is not stored on
the navigation DVD that is loaded. Select a
destination that is as close as possible to
the original.
> the destination guidance does not accept
an address without the street name?
On the navigation DVD, no downtown area
can be determined for the city or town
entered. Enter any street, or a destination
such as the railway station in the selected
town, and then start the destination guid-
ance.
> you want to enter a destination for the des-
tination guidance, but it is not possible to
select the letters for your desired entry?
The data of the destination is not stored on
the navigation DVD that is loaded. In this
case, the system will not offer you any let-
ters to choose from. Select a destination
that is as close as possible to the original.
> the system stops furnishing directions on
which way to turn as you approach intersec-
tions?
You are driving in an area that has not yet
been completely recorded on the naviga-
tion DVD. Instead of an arrow indicating a
turn, you will see an arrow which indicates
the general direction of your planned route.
Or you have left the recommended route
and the system requires a few seconds to
calculate a new recommended route.
> the navigation system does not react to
entries?
If the battery was disconnected, it takes
about 10 minutes before the system is once
again operational.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Entertainment
Operation of the radio and CD as well as their
tone settings are described in this chapter.
Entertainment
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
On/Off and settings
174
On/Off and settings
The following audio sources have shared con-
trols and setting options:
> Radio
> CD player
> CD changer
*
Controls
The audio sources can be controlled using:
> Buttons in the area of the CD player
> iDrive
> Buttons
on steering wheel, refer to page 11
> Programmable memory buttons, refer to
page 21
Buttons on CD player
Equipment with a single drive
1 Entertainment sound output on/off, volume
> Press: switch on/off.
When the system is switched on, the
most recently selected radio station or
CD track is played.
> Turn: adjust volume.
2 Eject CD
3 Drive for audio CDs
4 Station scan/track search
> Change radio station.
> Select track for CD player and
CD changer.
Equipment with two drives
1 Entertainment sound output on/off, volume
> Press: switch on/off.
When the system is switched on, the
most recently selected radio station or
CD track is played.
> Turn: adjust volume.
2 Drive for audio CDs
3 Eject CD
4 Station scan/track search
> Change radio station.
> Select track for CD player and
CD changer.
5 Drive for navigation DVDs
Operation via iDrive
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to open
"Entertainment".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
175
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
You have the following choices:
> "FM" and "AM": radio reception
> "WB": Weather Band station
> "SAT": satellite radio
*
> "CD": CD player or changer*
> "AUX": AUX-In connection, USB audio
interface
*
> "Set": depending on the audio source,
other adjustments can be made, e.g. with
the radio: update station with strongest
reception, store station, tone control, sam-
ple stations.
From another menu, you can change
directly to the screen last displayed,
refer to Comfort opening of menu items,
page 18.<
From radio readiness, the selected audio
source is stored for the remote control currently
in use.
Switching on/off
To switch the Entertainment sound output on
and off:
Press knob 1 on the CD player.
This symbol on the Control Display indi-
cates that sound output is switched off.
For equipment with a single drive, the sound
output is available for approx. 20 minutes with
the ignition switched off.
Switch on the sound output again for this pur-
pose.
Adjusting volume
Turn knob 1 on the CD player until the desired
volume is set.
You can also adjust the volume with buttons on
the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
From radio readiness, the setting is stored for
the remote control currently in use.
Tone control
You can alter various tone settings, e.g. treble
and bass, or the speed-dependent volume
increase.
The tone settings are set for all audio sources at
once.
From radio readiness, the settings are stored
for the remote control currently in use.
Changing tone settings
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Select "Audio" or "Tone / Volume" and
press the controller.
The tone settings can also be selected when
you have opened "Entertainment" in the start
menu:
Select "Set" and then "Tone", and press the
controller.
Treble and bass
1. Select "Treble / Bass" and press the con-
troller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
On/Off and settings
176
2. Move the controller to the left or right to
select "Treble" or "Bass".
3. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
Balance and fader
You can adjust the volume distribution in the
same manner as "Treble / Bass".
> "Balance": left/right volume distribution
> "Fader": front/rear volume distribution
Speed-dependent volume control
The speed-dependent volume control auto-
matically increases the volume with increasing
speed. You can set various stages for the
increase in volume.
When equipped with two drives:
1. Select "Speed volume" and press the con-
troller.
2. Turn the controller:
The adjustment is applied; the field can be
changed.
When equipped with a single drive:
1. Select "Volume settings" and press the
controller.
2. Change to the second field from the top if
necessary. Select "Speed volume" and
press the controller.
3. Turn the controller:
The adjustment is applied; the field can be
changed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
177
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Professional HiFi System*
You can choose between stereo and multichan-
nel playback, surround.
1. Select "Surround Settings" and press the
controller.
2. Select "Stereo" or "Surround".
3. Press the controller.
The spatial sound effect is activated.
Equalizer*
You can set individual sound frequency ranges.
1. Select "Equalizer" and press the controller.
2. Move the controller to the left or right to
select the desired frequency range.
3. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
Resetting tone settings
You can reset all tone settings to the default
settings.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Select "Audio" and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Reset" is selected and
press the controller.
6. When equipped with two drives:
Select "Yes" and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Radio
178
Radio
Your radio provides reception of the FM and AM
wavebands.
Listening to radio
Press the knob if the sound output is switched
off.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to open
"Entertainment".
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Select
"FM" or "AM".
4. Press the controller.
Stations are shown on the Control Display
on the basis of various selection criteria, e.g.
"Presets".
If "Autostore" does not display any stations or
if the stations displayed can no longer be
received in the AM reception range, update the
stations with the best reception, refer to
page 179.
Changing stations
Turn the controller.
Buttons on CD player
Press the button for the corresponding
direction.
The system changes to the next displayed sta-
tion.
You can also change stations with the buttons
on the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
Changing selection criteria
In addition to the stations currently displayed,
you can have stations with another selection
criterion displayed.
You can choose from the following selection
criteria:
> "All stations"
*:
Stations that can currently be received in
the "FM" waveband.
> "Autostore":
The stations with the strongest received
signals in the "AM" waveband.
With High Definition Radio: the stations with
the strongest received signals in the "FM"
waveband.
> "Presets":
Stations you have previously stored, refer to
page 180.
> "Manual":
To set stations that can be received in addi-
tion to those displayed, refer to Selecting
frequency manually on page 179.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
179
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
To change the selection criterion:
1. Change into the second field from the top.
2. Select the selection criterion and press the
controller.
Sampling stations, scan
The system automatically plays a brief sample
from each of the stations on the current wave-
band.
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-
ler.
"Set" is selected.
2. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
3. Select "Scan" and press the controller.
The stations are sampled.
To end sampling:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.
This cancels sampling of the stations, and the
radio remains on the current station.
Buttons on CD player
To sample the stations, press and hold the
button for the corresponding direction.
To end scanning, press the button again.
Selecting frequency manually
With "Manual" you can select stations that can
be received in addition to those displayed.
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-
ler.
2. Change into the second field from the top.
3. Select "Manual" and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller to set a certain fre-
quency.
Updating stations with best reception
If you are on a longer journey and leave the
transmission range of the stations originally set,
you can update the list of stations in the AM
range with the best reception.
1. Select "AM" and press the controller.
2. Change into the second field from the top.
3. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.
"Set" is selected.
4. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Radio
180
5. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.
The display of the stations with the strongest
reception is updated. The frequencies of the
stations are displayed.
Storing stations
Via iDrive
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-
ler.
2. Change into the second field from the top.
Turn the controller until the desired selec-
tion criterion is selected and press the con-
troller.
3. Select the desired frequency or station.
"Set" is selected.
4. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
5. Select "Store" and press the controller.
"Presets" is displayed.
6. Turn the controller until the desired mem-
ory position is selected.
7. Press the controller.
The station is stored.
The stations of the last selection criterion are
displayed once again after a short time.
From radio readiness, the stations are stored
for the remote control currently in use.
Via programmable memory buttons
You can also store a station on the programma-
ble memory buttons, also refer to page 21.
1. Select a station.
2. Press and hold the desired button
... .
Changing a memory position
1. Select "Presets" and press the controller.
2. Select the desired station.
"Set" is selected.
3. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
4. Select "Store" and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
181
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
5. Turn the controller until the desired mem-
ory position is selected.
The number of the memory position
appears beside the name or frequency of
the station.
6. Press the controller.
The station is stored.
RDS Radio Data System
In the FM frequency range, additional informa-
tion is transmitted via RDS. If the reception con-
ditions are good, the station names are shown
on the Control Display. If the reception is weak
or disrupted, it can take some time before the
station names are displayed.
Switching RDS on/off
1. Select "FM" and press the controller.
"Set" is selected.
2. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
3. Select "RDS" and press the controller.
RDS is activated.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
High Definition Radio*
Many stations transmit both analog and digital
signals. You can receive these stations digitally
and with improved sound quality.
A digital radio network must be available in
order to receive digital stations.
Activating/deactivating digital radio
reception
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Select "Audio" and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field. Turn the controller
until "HD radio" is selected and press the
controller.
6. Select "Off" and press the controller.
The reception of digital stations is acti-
vated.
This symbol is displayed when a station is
being received digitally.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Radio
182
With some stations the digital signals are not
transmitted simultaneously with the analog sig-
nals. If you are in an area in which the selected
station is not continuously received digitally,
playback changes between analog and digital
reception. This can result in repetitions or inter-
ruptions. In this case it may be advisable to
deactivate digital radio reception.
Selecting programs of a digital station*
Some stations transmit several programs on
one frequency. To select one of these pro-
grams:
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-
ler.
2. Select "Manual" and press the controller.
3. Select a station that is received digitally.
This symbol is displayed when a station
is being received digitally.
4. Switch to the next program of the digital
station with the buttons on the radio
or the steering wheel.
You can store a station, refer to page 180.
Updating stations offering digital
reception
If you are on a longer journey and leave the
transmission range of the stations originally set,
you can update the list of stations with the best
reception.
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-
ler.
2. Change into the second field from the top.
3. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.
4. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
5. Select "Autostore " and press the con-
troller.
The display of the stations offering digital
reception is updated. This can take up to 2 min-
utes.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
183
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Displaying additional information
With the digital stations, additional information
on the current track is displayed, e.g. the name
of the artist.
1. Select a station and press the controller.
2. Select "Details" and press the controller.
The information is displayed.
If a digital station is received again when the
station is changed, the additional information
will be displayed again following a brief interrup-
tion.
Weather news flashes*
Weather Radio is a service of the National Oce-
anic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA)
of the US Department of Trade. Weather news
flashes are repeated every four to six minutes
and are routinely updated at intervals of one to
three hours, and more often when necessary.
Most stations operate 24 hours a day. In case of
a storm, the National Weather Service inter-
rupts the routine weather news and transmits
special warning messages instead. If you have a
question about NOAA Weather Radio, please
contact the nearest office of the National
Weather Service. Details are also provided on
the Internet at www.nws.noaa.gov.
Calling up weather news flashes
1. Select "WB" and press the controller.
2. Select a station.
The station for weather news flashes may be
unavailable in some regions.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Satellite radio
184
Satellite radio
You can receive over 100 different channels
with high sound quality.
The channels are offered to you in predefined
packages. To receive the channels of your
choice, you must have this package enabled.
With this new technology the signal may
fail, causing interruptions in reception.<
Enabling or disabling
channels
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to open
"Entertainment".
3. Select "SAT".
4. Press the controller.
The channels are displayed.
These channels are enabled.
Enabling
1. Select a channel that has not yet been
enabled and press the controller.
A telephone number and the electronic
serial number, ESN, are displayed.
The electronic serial number is
required for enabling or disabling.<
2. To enable the channel:
Dial the phone number.
Disabling
1. Select an enabled channel and press the
controller.
2. Select "ESN" and press the controller.
The electronic serial number, ESN, is dis-
played.
The electronic serial number is
required for disabling.<
3. To disable the channel:
Dial the phone number.
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
185
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Selecting and storing channel
1. Select "SAT" and press the controller.
Channels or categories appear on the Con-
trol Display.
2. Select a menu item:
> "Presets":
Up to twelve channels you have stored
previously.
> "All channels":
All channels are displayed.
> "Categories":
All channels, sorted by categories, e.g.
news, jazz.
3. Press the controller.
4. If "Categories" has been selected:
Select the desired category and press the
controller.
The channels of this category are displayed.
5. Select a channel marked with this sym-
bol.
6. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
7. Select "Details" and press the controller.
Additional information
The name of the channel and additional infor-
mation on the current track are displayed, e.g.
the name of the artist.
1 Artist
2 Track
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Satellite radio
186
Storing channel
1. Select desired channel.
2. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
3. Select "Store" and press the controller.
"Presets" is displayed.
4. Turn the controller to select a memory loca-
tion and press the controller.
The channel is stored. The channels of the last
selection criterion are displayed once again
after a short time.
Changing channel with buttons on
CD player
Press the button for the corresponding
direction.
The system switches to the next enabled chan-
nel.
Notes
If no signal can be received for more than four
seconds, a message is displayed on the Control
Display.
Reception may not be possible for certain
reasons, e.g. environmental influences or
topographical conditions. The satellite radio
has no influence on this.
The signal may not be available in tunnels or
underground garages, next to tall buildings,
near trees, mountains or other sources of radio
interference.
Reception is usually possible again as soon as
the signal is available again.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
187
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
CD player and CD changer
Listening to CDs
When equipped with two drives:
The upper drive is for audio CDs.
Compressed audio files
CDs with compressed audio files, i.e. MP3, can
be played by the CD player and CD changer.
Starting CD player
Inserting CD
Insert the CD into the drive with the labeled side
up.
The CD is automatically pulled in. Playback
starts automatically if the sound output is on.
For CDs with compressed audio files, it can take
up to approx. 1 minute to read in the data
depending on the directory structure.
Via iDrive
Starting playback when there is already a CD in
the drive:
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to open
"Entertainment".
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Select
"CD" and press the controller.
4. Change to the second field from the top if
necessary. On vehicles with a CD changer,
select "CD" and press the controller to start
the CD player.
Playback starts automatically if the sound out-
put is switched on.
Via programmable memory buttons
You can store the CD player function on the
programmable memory buttons. To start the
CD player, refer to page 21.
Starting CD changer
Filling CD changer, refer to page 191.
Via iDrive
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to open
"Entertainment".
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Select
"CD" and press the controller.
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
CD player and CD changer
188
4. Change to the second field from the top if
necessary. Select the desired CD and press
the controller.
At the end of the last track, the next CD will be
selected.
Via programmable memory buttons
You can store a CD compartment of the CD
changer on the programmable memory but-
tons. To start the CD changer, refer to page 21.
Selecting a track
Buttons on CD player
Press the button for the corresponding
direction repeatedly until you reach the desired
track.
The track is displayed on the Control Display.
You can also change tracks using the buttons
on the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
Via iDrive
Select a track by turning the controller.
Compressed audio files
1. Select the directory if necessary and press
the controller.
2. Select the track and press the controller.
To change the directory:
Select the directory and press the controller.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
For equipment with two drives, you can save a
certain track on the programmable memory
buttons, refer to page 21.
Displaying information on track
With compressed audio files, you can display
any information stored on the current track, e.g.
the name of the artist.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
189
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Details" and press the controller.
The information for the current track are dis-
played.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Sampling tracks, scan
The system automatically plays a brief sample
from each of the tracks on the current CD.
1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.
To end sampling:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.
This cancels sampling of the tracks, and the
player remains on the current track.
Compressed audio files
1. Select the current track and press the con-
troller.
2. Select the desired menu item:
> To sample all tracks of the current direc-
tory, select "Scan directory" and press
the controller.
> To sample all tracks of the CD, select
"Scan all" and press the controller.
To end sampling:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Scan directory" or "Scan all" and
press the controller.
This cancels sampling, and the player remains
on the current track.
Repeating a track
1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
CD player and CD changer
190
2. Select "Repeat" and press the controller.
The current track on the CD is repeated.
To stop repeating:
1. Press the controller again.
2. Select "Repeat" and press the controller.
Compressed audio files
1. Select the current track and press the con-
troller.
2. Select the desired menu item:
> To repeat the selected track, select
"Repeat track" and press the controller.
> To repeat all tracks of the current direc-
tory, select "Repeat directory" and press
the controller.
To stop repeating:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Repeat track" or "Repeat directory"
and press the controller.
Random play sequence
In this mode, the tracks on the current CD are
played once in a random sequence.
1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
2. Select "Random" and press the controller.
To stop random function:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Random" and press the controller.
Compressed audio files
1. Select the current track and press the con-
troller.
2. Select the desired menu item:
> To play all tracks of the current directory
in random order, select "Random direc-
tory" and press the controller.
> To play all tracks of the CD in random
order, select "Random all" and press the
controller.
To stop random function:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Random directory" or "Random all"
and press the controller.
Fast forward/reverse
Buttons on CD player:
Press and hold the button for the corre-
sponding direction.
The tracks can be listened to with some distor-
tion.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
191
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
CD changer
The BMW CD changer for six CDs is installed in
the glove compartment.
Controls and displays
1 LEDs on CD bay
Flash when the CD can be inserted.
2 Buttons for CD compartments
LED lights up when CD compartment is
filled.
Filling CD changer
1. Press the button.
The LED on the first empty compartment
flashes.
2. Select another CD compartment if neces-
sary:
Press the ... button.
3. When the LEDs 1 on the CD bay flash, insert
an individual CD.
The CD is automatically pulled in and
inserted into the selected CD compartment.
Do not push in the CD until the
LEDs 1 on the CD bay are flashing;
otherwise, the CD or the CD changer may
be damaged.
Do not continue to push on the CD; this may
cause it to jam and prevent it from being
able to eject again.<
4. To fill additional CD compartments:
Repeat steps 1 to 3.
Filling empty CD compartments
1. Hold down the button.
The LEDs on the empty CD compartments
flash.
2. When the LEDs 1 on the CD bay flash, insert
an individual CD.
The CD is automatically pulled in and
inserted into the first available CD compart-
ment.
Do not push in the CD until the
LEDs 1 on the CD bay are flashing;
otherwise, the CD or the CD changer may
be damaged.
Do not continue to push on the CD; this may
cause it to jam and prevent it from being
able to eject again.<
3. Wait until the CD has been pulled in.
4. To fill additional CD compartments:
Repeat steps 2 and 3.
Removing CDs from CD changer
1. Press the button.
2. Press the ... button to select the
CD compartment.
The CD is pushed partially out of the CD
changer.
3. Remove the CD.
Removing all CDs from CD changer
1. Hold down the button.
The CDs are pushed partially out of the CD
changer in sequence.
2. Remove the CDs.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
CD player and CD changer
192
Notes
BMW CD/DVD players and changers are
officially designated Class 1 laser prod-
ucts. Do not operate if the cover is damaged,
otherwise severe eye damage can result.
Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs with labels
applied as these can become detached during
playback due to heat buildup and can cause
irreparable damage to the device.
Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard
diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs/
DVDs with an adapter, e.g. CD singles, as other-
wise the CD/DVD or the adapter can jam and
may no longer eject properly.
Do not use a combined CD/DVD, e.g. DVD
Plus
,
otherwise the CD/DVD can jam and will no
longer eject.<
General malfunctions
BMW CD/DVD changers and players have been
optimized for performance in vehicles. In some
instances they may be more sensitive to faulty
CDs/DVDs than stationary devices would be.
If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check if it
has been inserted correctly.
Humidity
High levels of humidity can lead to condensa-
tion on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens and
temporarily prevent playback.
Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs
If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/
DVDs, this can be due to one of the following
causes.
Filling CD/DVD changer or removing
CDs/DVDs
If all of the LEDs on the CD/DVD changer flash
rapidly, then a malfunction is occurring.
To rectify the malfunction:
1. Press the button.
The CD/DVD last inserted is ejected.
2. Remove the CD/DVD.
When the LEDs stop flashing rapidly, the CD/
DVD changer is once more operational.
Self-recorded CDs/DVDs
Possible reasons for malfunctions with self-
recorded CDs/DVDs are, e.g., inconsistent
data-creation or recording processes, or poor
quality or high age of the CD/DVD blank.
Only label CDs/DVDs on the upper side with a
pen intended for this purpose.
Avoiding damage
Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and mois-
ture.
Store CDs/DVDs in a sleeve.
Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures over
1226/506, high levels of humidity, or direct
sunlight.
CDs/DVDs with copy protection
CDs/DVDs are often provided with a copy pro-
tection feature by the manufacturer. This can
mean that some CDs/DVDs cannot be played or
can only be played to a limited extent.
Care
If necessary, clean the reflective scanning side
of the CDs/DVDs with a commercially available
cleaning cloth by wiping in straight lines from
the center outward.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
193
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
DVD changer
Installation position
The BMW DVD changer for six DVDs is installed
in the glove compartment.
Controls and displays
1 LEDs on DVD bay
Flash when the DVD can be inserted.
2 Buttons for DVD compartments
The LED lights up when DVD compartment
is filled.
Filling the DVD changer
1. Press the button.
The LED on the first empty compartment
flashes.
2. Select another DVD compartment if neces-
sary:
Press the ... button.
3. When the LEDs 1 on the DVD bay flash,
insert an individual DVD.
The DVD is automatically pulled in and
inserted into the selected DVD compart-
ment.
Do not push in the DVD until the
LEDs 1 on the DVD bay are flashing;
otherwise, the DVD or the DVD changer
may be damaged.
Do not continue to push on the DVD; this
may cause it to jam and prevent it from
being able to eject again.<
4. To fill additional DVD compartments:
Repeat steps 1 to 3.
Filling empty DVD compartments
1. Hold down the button.
The LEDs on the empty DVD compart-
ments flash.
2. When the LEDs 1 on the DVD bay flash,
insert an individual DVD.
The DVD is automatically pulled in and
inserted into the first available DVD com-
partment.
Do not continue to push on the DVDs;
this may cause them to jam and pre-
vent them from being able to eject again.<
3. Wait until the DVD has been pulled in and
the LEDs 1 on the DVD bay are flashing
again.
Do not push in the DVD until the
LEDs 1 on the DVD bay are flashing;
otherwise, the DVD or the DVD changer
may be damaged.<
4. To fill additional DVD compartments:
Repeat steps 2 and 3.
Removing DVDs from the DVD changer
1. Press the button.
2. Press the ... button in order to
select the DVD compartment.
The DVD is pushed partially out of the DVD
changer.
3. Remove the DVD.
If the DVD is not removed, it is pulled back
in again after about 10 seconds.<
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
DVD changer
194
Removing all DVDs from DVD changer
1. Hold down the button.
The DVDs are pushed partially out of the
DVD changer in sequence.
2. Remove the DVDs individually.
Malfunctions
If all of the LEDs on the DVD changer flash rap-
idly, then a malfunction is occurring. In this
case, proceed as follows.
1. Press the button or button.
The DVD last inserted is ejected.
2. Remove the DVD.
The DVD changer tests the DVD compartments
and the rapid flashing of the LEDs stops. The
DVD changer is once more operational.
DVD country codes
Your DVD player only plays DVDs with the cod-
ing of your home region, e.g. Europe = 2. The
country codes supported by your DVD are con-
tained in the information on your DVD. It is not
possible to change this coding. An overview of
the six coding zones:
DVDs with the code 0 can be played back
on all units.<
Playing DVDs
Depending on the equipment in your vehicle,
you have the option of playing back both the
audio track and video track of DVDs or only their
audio track.
> Vehicles with two drives: audio and video
playback
> Vehicles with a single drive: audio playback,
refer to page 197
Audio and video playback
For your own safety, the picture only appears on
the Control Display at speeds of up to about
2 mph/3 km/h. For certain national-market ver-
sions, the picture does not appear on the Con-
trol Display unless the vehicle is stationary and
the transmission is in Park.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to open
"Entertainment".
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Select
"DVD" and press the controller.
4. Change into the second field if necessary,
select the desired DVD and press the con-
troller.
It can take a little time for the DVD contents to
be scanned in. Then the DVD is played and the
DVD-specific menu is displayed.
DVD control
Using the DVD control, you can select the title
and chapter, open the DVD-specific menu and
operate functions such as language, fast for-
Code Region
1USA, Canada
2
Japan, Europe, Middle East,
South Africa
3Southeast Asia
4
Australia, Central and South America,
New Zealand
5 Northwest Asia, North Africa
6China
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
195
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
ward and reverse, or freeze frame.
A DVD can briefly deactivate functions of the
DVD control, under certain circumstances even
while the entire DVD is being played. It is not
possible to operate the DVD control under
these circumstances. In this case, try to make
the selection using the DVD-specific menu.
During playback:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "DVD control bar" if needed and
press the controller.
The DVD control is displayed.
The DVD control disappears again after a short
time if you have not selected a function.
Fast forward/reverse
Forward/reverse with DVD control
1. Press the controller during playback to hide
the DVD control.
2. Select the symbol and press the
controller.
3. Press the controller repeatedly to increase
the speed of the fast forward/reverse.
The DVD playback will be distorted.
To cancel fast forward/reverse:
Select the symbol and press the controller.
The DVD will start play at the point selected.
Forward/reverse using controller
1. Turn the controller during playback.
Fast forward/reverse is interrupted.
2. Turn the controller further.
The speed is increased.
3. Release the controller.
Fast forward/reverse is interrupted. The
current DVD will start play at the point
selected.
Skipping chapter
You can change to the next or previous chapter
during playback.
1. Press the controller during playback to hide
the DVD control.
2. Select the symbol and press
repeatedly until you reach the desired chap-
ter.
Or:
Press the button on the left or right
repeatedly until you reach the desired chapter.
Making settings for DVD
With some DVDs, it is only possible to
select language, subtitles, camera angle,
or title by using the DVD-specific menu.
Refer to the information on your DVD for possi-
ble selections.<
Tone control
In DVDs with multichannel or surround sound,
for optimum playback, select an audio track
with multichannel sound and set the tone set-
tings to Surround, refer to Selecting language
on page 196 and Professional HiFi System* on
page 177.
Function
Exit DVD control
"SET" Settings for playing DVD
Starting playback
Stop playback
Activating freeze frame
Skipping chapter
Fast forward/reverse
"Menu" Open DVD-specific menu
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
DVD changer
196
Adjusting brightness and contrast
1. Press the controller during playback.
2. Select "SET" and press the controller.
3. Select "Video settings" and press the con-
troller.
4. Select "Brightness" or "Contrast" and
press the controller.
5. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
Resetting to defaults:
Select "Reset" and press the controller.
DVD format
1. Press the controller during playback.
2. Select "SET" and press the controller.
3. Select "DVD format" and press the control-
ler.
> "Standard"
> "Zoom": full-screen playback
Selecting language
1. Press the controller during playback.
2. Select "SET" and press the controller.
3. Select "Language" and press the controller.
4. Select language or audio track and press
the controller.
The languages and audio tracks are generally
accompanied by an indication of how may
channels are included. 5.1 means multichannel.
Selecting subtitling
1. Press the controller during playback.
2. Select "SET" and press the controller.
3. Select "Subtitles" and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
197
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
4. Select the language of the subtitles and
confirm by pressing the controller.
Selecting title
1. Press the controller during playback.
2. Select "SET" and press the controller.
3. Select "Title" and press the controller.
4. Select the desired title.
Selecting viewing angle
Notes or symbols that appear during the play-
back of a film generally indicate the availability
of different camera angles. These are usually
only briefly available.
1. Press the controller during playback.
2. Select "SET" and press the controller.
3. Select "Angle of view" and press the con-
troller.
Opening DVD-specific menu
Additional functions may be available on DVDs.
For example, the viewer can select from several
possible plots or display information on the film.
1. Press the controller during playback.
2. Select "Menu" and press the controller.
3. Make your selection in the DVD-specific
menu. To do so, move the controller in the
corresponding direction in order to select
the menu items and then press the control-
ler.
4. Select "Confirm selection" and press the
controller.
You can also select language, subtitles,
camera angle, or title in the DVD-specific
menu.
Refer to the information on your DVD for possi-
ble selections.<
Closing settings menu
> Select "Return" and press the controller.
Audio playback
In vehicles equipped with a single drive, you
have the option of playing back the audio track
of a DVD, even when no video playback is pos-
sible in the vehicle.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to open
"Entertainment".
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Select
"DVD" and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
DVD changer
198
4. Change into the second field if necessary,
select the desired DVD and press the con-
troller.
Displaying DVD audio contents
DVDs are usually divided into titles that are
divided into chapters. The playback begins with
the title that contains the most chapters. For
example, this has the advantage that the intro-
duction of a DVD is not played first.
All of the chapters, numbered all the way
through, are show, i.e. the numbering is differ-
ent than on the DVD. The numbering of the
DVD is displayed in the status line.
Example:
Chapter 06 of the selection corresponds to
chapter 6 in title 1 of the DVD.
The behavior during playback of the DVD
can differ, depending on the DVD. It may
not be possible to play some DVDs or the play-
back may stop before the end. In this case, the
system usually skips to the next DVD in the
DVD changer.<
Selecting chapter
Select the chapter by turning the controller.
If playback does not automatically continue
after the end of a title, then use the controller to
select the next chapter.
A maximum of 99 chapters of a DVD can be
played back.
Tone control
In DVDs with multichannel or surround sound,
for optimum playback, select an audio track
with multichannel sound, refer to Selecting
audio language, and set the tone settings to
Surround, refer to Professional HiFi System* on
page 177.
Selecting audio language
If there are different languages on a DVD, you
can select the language.
1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
2. Select "Language / Audio format" and press
the controller.
Display in the status line Display in the
chapter selection
Title 1 Chapter 1 01
Chapter 2 02
Chapter 3 03
Chapter 4 04
Chapter 5 05
Chapter 6 06
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
199
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
The different languages of the DVD are dis-
played.
3. Select the desired language and press the
controller.
The languages and audio tracks are generally
accompanied by an indication of how may
channels are included. 5.1 means multichannel.
Notes
The DVD changer can play back the following
formats:
> DVD video
> Video CD
> CD-DA
> CD-DTS
> Compressed audio files
MACROVISION
This product includes copyright-protected
technology that is based on a series of regis-
tered US patents and the intellectual property
of the Macrovision Corporation and other man-
ufacturers. Use of this copyrighted material
must be approved by Macrovision. Unless oth-
erwise agreed upon with Macrovision, it is only
permissible for correspondingly protected
media to be produced for private use. The
copying of this technology is strictly forbidden.
Dolby
Manufactured under license from Dolby Labo-
ratories.
"Dolby", "Pro Logic", "MLP Lossless" and the
double-D symbol are registered trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
DTS
"DTS" and "DTS Digital Surround" are regis-
tered trademarks of DTS, Inc.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
AUX-In connection
200
AUX-In connection
You can connect an external audio device, e.g.
an MP3 player, and play the sound via the vehi-
cle speakers. The sound can be adjusted via
iDrive.
Connecting
Open the lid of the center armrest.
1 Connection for audio playback:
TRS connector 1/8 in/3.5 mm
To play audio tracks through the vehicle's
speaker system, connect the headphone or
line-out port of the device with the AUX-In con-
nection.
Starting audio playback
The audio device must be switched on.
Via iDrive
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to open
"Entertainment".
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "AUX" is selected and press
the controller.
4. Select "AUX IN" and press the controller.
5. Adjust volume and sound if necessary.
With external devices, the sound output
via the vehicle speakers can differ from
other audio sources. For a comparison of the
volume, adapt the sound output of the external
device.<
Via programmable memory buttons
You can save the "AUX" function on the pro-
grammable memory buttons. To start audio
playback, refer to page 21.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
201
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
USB audio interface
You can connect an external audio device or
USB device to the USB audio interface.
> MP3 player
> USB memory stick
> iPod/iPhone
> Suitable mobile phone:
You can operate these devices via iDrive, if they
are supported by the USB audio interface.
If equipped with an additional connection of the
music player in the mobile phone, connect the
phone by means of the snap-in adapter
*, refer
to page 233. The phone can then be used for
the hands-free system and audio playback. The
audio playback is only possible if no device is
connected to the USB audio interface.
The common audio files, e.g. MP3, WMA, WAV
(PCM) and AAC, as well as playback lists in the
M3U format can be played back.
Due to the large number of audio devices avail-
able on the market, operation via the vehicle
cannot be ensured for every audio device.
Ask your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center,
which audio devices, mobile phones, or USB
devices are suitable.
Connecting
Open the lid of the center armrest.
1 Connection for audio playback:
TRS connector 1/8 in/3.5 mm
2 USB interface
iPod/iPhone
In order to connect the iPod/iPhone, use the
BMW cable adaptor for Apple iPod/iPhone.
For more information, contact a BMW Sports
Activity Vehicle Center or consult our website:
www.bmw.com
For audio playback via the vehicle speakers,
connect the iPod/iPhone to the connections 1
and 2.
The menu structure of the iPod/iPhone is sup-
ported by the USB audio interface.
USB device
Use a flexible adapter cable for connec-
tion to protect the USB interface and your
USB device against mechanical damage.<
For audio playback via the vehicle speakers,
connect the USB device to the connection 2.
After connecting for the first time, the informa-
tion of all tracks, e.g. artist, music genres, and
the playback lists of the USB device are trans-
ferred to the vehicle. This process can take
some time. The time required is dependent on
the USB device and on the number of tracks.
During the transfer you can select the tracks via
the directories and file names.
Following the transfer you can call up the tracks
via the information and playback lists.
The information of up to four USB devices or for
a total of approx. 16,000 tracks can be stored in
the vehicle.
If a fifth USB device is connected or if more than
16,000 tracks are to be stored, then the infor-
mation about existing tracks is deleted if neces-
sary.
Music tracks with integrated Digital
Rights Management (DRM) cannot be
played.<
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
USB audio interface
202
Starting audio playback
Via iDrive
If the audio device has a device name, this will
be displayed if possible.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to open
"Entertainment".
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "AUX" is selected and press
the controller.
4. Select "USB" or the name of the audio
device and press the controller.
The playback starts with the first track.
With the connection of an iPhone by means of
the snap-in adaptor and a simultaneous con-
nection of an audio device at the Aux-In con-
nection, the audio signal is played back.
With external devices, the sound output
via the vehicle speakers can differ from
other audio sources. For a comparison of the
volume, adapt the sound output of the external
device.<
Via programmable memory buttons
You can save the "USB" function on the pro-
grammable memory buttons. To start audio
playback, refer to page 21.
Selecting a track
You can call up the tracks via the playback lists
and information. With USB devices you can also
call up the tracks via the file directory. The titles
can be displayed if they are stored in the Latin
alphabet.
1. Make your selection, e.g. "Playlists" or
"Artists", and press the controller.
2. Select the track and press the controller.
Displaying information on track
You can display any information stored on the
current track, e.g. the name of the artist.
1. Press the controller during playback.
2. Select "Details" and press the controller.
The information for the current track are dis-
played.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
203
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Repeating a track
1. Select the current track and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "Repeat track" and press the con-
troller.
To stop repeating:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Repeat track" and press the con-
troller.
Random play sequence
You can play back the tracks of the selected list
in random order, e.g. all tracks of an artist.
1. Select the current track and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "Random" and press the controller.
To end random playback:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Random" and press the controller.
Fast forward/reverse
Buttons on the steering wheel or on the CD
player:
Press and hold the button for the corre-
sponding direction.
Notes
Do not subject the audio device to
extreme environmental conditions, e.g.
extremely high temperatures, refer to the oper-
ating manual of the audio device. Otherwise the
audio device may be damaged, impairing driv-
ing safety while driving.<
Depending on the configuration of the audio
files, e.g. bit rates greater than 256 Kbit/s,
proper playback cannot always be ensured.
Information on connection
> The USB audio interface supplies the con-
nected audio device with power, provided
the audio device supports this function.
Therefore, do not connect the USB audio
device to a socket in the vehicle during
operation.
> Do not use force when plugging the con-
nector into the USB interface.
> Do not connect any devices, e.g. fans or
lamps, to the USB audio interface.
> Do not connect USB hard disks.
> Do not use the USB audio interface to
recharge external devices.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
DVD system in rear
204
DVD system in rear
With the DVD system in the rear you can play
CDs and DVDs with audio, video and image
data. External audio and video devices can also
be connected and played via the DVD system in
the rear.
Tone output is possible both via headphones
and via the vehicle speakers.
You can operate the DVD system in the rear
with the buttons on the CD/DVD player or with
the remote control.
Some functions can only be operated
with the remote control.<
Enabling DVD system
Enable the DVD system with iDrive.
For operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Unlock rear menu" and press the
controller.
5. Select "Rear enabled" and press the con-
troller.
The DVD system is enabled.
Controls
1 Display screen
2 Infrared interface for headphones
3 CD/DVD player
4 Headphone connection:
Jack 1/8 in/3.5 mm
5 12 V sockets, refer to page 130
Folding in display screen
When using the ski bag or when transporting
bulky pieces of luggage, the display screen
should be folded in, as otherwise it may be dam-
aged.
Do not open the covers of the center arm-
rest or rest your arm on the display screen
with the display screen folded in, as otherwise
the display screen may be damaged.<
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
205
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
1. Turn display screen, arrow 1.
The display screen switches off.
2. Fold in display screen, arrow 2.
The display screen is folded out in the reverse
order.
CD/DVD player
Controls
1 Press: switching DVD system on/off
Turn: volume for headphones on left
2 Eject CD, DVD
3 Start of track, reverse
Stop
Playback, pause, hold screen
Next track, fast forward
4 CD/DVD bay
5 Connection for external device:
Cinch sockets with protective cap
6 Press: switching DVD system on/off
Turn: volume for headphones on right
Connecting headphones
You can connect headphones with a jack plug
1/8 in/3.5 mm or operate them using the infra-
red interface.
Ask your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center
which infrared headphones are supported by
the infrared interface.
When using infrared headphones, the
infrared connection between the head-
phones and the infrared interface may not be
interrupted. This means that no obstacle may
be located between them and the cover of the
infrared interface may not be covered or
scratched. Unfavorable lighting conditions,
such as glaring ambient light, can result in poor
reception.<
Remote control
1 Menu navigation
2 Volume for headphones with jack plug
3 Change track or chapter with CD or DVD
playback, fast forward/reverse
4 Switch over headphones right/left
5 Open start menu for DVD system
Menu navigation
You can navigate through the menus with the
serrated dial 1 and the buttons 1. For operating
principle also refer to iDrive, page 16.
> Turn the serrated dial 1:
Selecting a menu item.
> Press buttons 1:
Changing between fields.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
DVD system in rear
206
> Press the button:
Activating menu item.
Changing batteries
1. Press the detent and remove the cover.
2. Change the batteries. The type and installa-
tion position are marked on the bottom of
the battery compartment.
3. Close the cover.
Return used batteries to a recycling col-
lection point or to your BMW Sports
Activity Vehicle Center.<
Sound output via speakers
In addition to the headphones, you can also play
the sound via the vehicle speakers.
As soon as a plug is inserted in the AUX-In con-
nection in the center console, the sound output
of the DVD system via the vehicle speakers is
interrupted.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to open
"Entertainment".
3. Select "AUX / Rear" and press the control-
ler.
Switching DVD system on/off
Press the button on the CD/DVD player.
The DVD system switches on automatically
when a CD or DVD is inserted.
Playing CD/DVD
The menu item with which the contents of the
CD/DVD can be called up is dependent on the
data on a CD or DVD:
> Video data via "DVD"
> Audio data via "CD"
> Images via "Photo"
Playing videos from CD/DVD
Country codes of DVDs
Your DVD player only plays DVDs with the
coding of your home region, e.g. Europe = 2.
The country codes supported by your DVD
are contained in the information on your DVD.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
207
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
An overview of the coding zones:
Starting playback
1. Push the CD/DVD into the drive with the
labeled side facing upward.
The CD/DVD is automatically pulled in.
> Playback usually begins automatically
after a few seconds.
> If playback does not begin automatically:
Select "DVD".
Press the button.
2. If the DVD controller or the DVD-specific
menu is displayed for a DVD, select the
desired option for menu guidance with the
remote control buttons.
Or:
Press the button on the CD/DVD player.
You can control the playback with the buttons
on the CD/DVD player or the DVD control.
Video CDs, VCD, and Super Video CDs,
SVCD, can be played like DVDs if they do
not have a DVD menu of their own.<
Ejecting CD/DVD
Press the button on the CD/DVD player.
The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.
DVD control
With the DVD control, you can select the title
and chapter, open the DVD-specific menu and
operate functions such as Language, Fast for-
ward and Reverse or Freeze frame.
A DVD can briefly deactivate functions of the
DVD control, under certain circumstances while
the entire DVD is being played. It is not possible
to operate the DVD control under these circum-
stances. In this case, try to make the selection
using the DVD-specific menu.
1. Press the button on the remote con-
trol during playback.
2. Press the buttons on the remote control
or turn the serrated dial to select the desired
function.
3. Press the button.
The DVD control disappears again after a short
time if you have not selected a function.
Or:
Press the button on the remote control
to exit the DVD control.
Fast forward/reverse
Forward/reverse with DVD control
1. Press the button on the remote con-
trol during playback.
2. Select the symbol.
Code Region
1USA, Canada
2
Japan, Europe, Middle East,
South Africa
3 Southeast Asia
4
Australia, Central and South America,
New Zealand
5Northwest Asia, North Africa
6China
Function
Exit DVD control
"SET" Settings for playing DVD
Starting playback
Stop playback
Activate and deactivate freeze
frame
Skipping chapter
Fast forward/reverse
"Menu" Open DVD-specific menu
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
DVD system in rear
208
3. Press the button.
4. Press the button several times to
increase the fast forward/reverse speed.
The DVD playback will be distorted.
To cancel fast forward/reverse:
1. Select the symbol.
2. Press the button.
Or:
Press the button on the CD/DVD player.
The DVD will start play at the point selected.
Forward/reverse with remote control
Press and hold the button until you reach
the desired point.
Or:
1. During playback, turn the serrated dial.
Fast forward/reverse is interrupted.
2. Continue to turn the serrated dial.
The speed is increased.
3. Press the button on the CD/DVD player.
Fast forward/reverse is interrupted.
The DVD will start play at the point selected.
Skipping chapter
You can change to the next or previous chapter
during playback.
1. Press the button on the remote con-
trol during playback.
2. Select the symbol.
3. Press the button repeatedly, continuing
until you reach the desired chapter.
Or:
Press the button on the left or right on the
remote control repeatedly until you reach the
desired chapter.
Freeze frame
1. Press the button on the remote con-
trol during playback.
2. Select the symbol.
3. Press the button.
To continue playback:
1. Select the or symbol.
2. Press the button.
As an alternative you can also stop and con-
tinue playback with the button on the CD/
DVD player.
Making settings for DVD
1. Press the button during playback.
2. Make the settings with the remote control:
> "Video settings":
> "Brightness", "Color" and "Contrast" of
screen display
> Additional settings can be made after
changing to the top field.
"Language": system language of DVD
system in rear.
"Display": background brightness of
screen.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
209
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
> "Tone":
> "Treble / Bass" and "Balance":
Separately adjustable for the left and
right-hand headphones and the infrared
headphones.
> "Reset":
The settings are reset to the default
value.
> "DVD format":
> "Standard"
> "Zoom": full-screen playback
> "Language":
Language or sound track of DVD playback.
The language advances one setting each
time the menu item is selected.
> "Subtitles":
Language of subtitles
"00 n/a": no subtitles.
> "Title":
Selection of a single track of the DVD.
> "Angle of view":
Camera angle
Notes or symbols that appear during the
playback of a film generally point out differ-
ent camera angles. These are usually only
briefly available.
> "Menu":
Call up the DVD-specific menu.
> "Return":
Exit menu or:
Press the buttons on the remote con-
trol.
Many DVDs offer dialogs and subtitles in vari-
ous languages or scene descriptions for the
hearing impaired. These functions are stored
on the DVD.
With some DVDs, it is only possible to
select language, subtitles, camera angle,
or title by using the DVD-specific menu.
Refer to the information on your DVD for possi-
ble selections.
Entries marked in gray in the menus cannot be
selected.<
Opening DVD-specific menu
Additional functions may be available on DVDs.
For example, it is possible to select from several
possible plots or display information on the film.
1. Press the button on the remote con-
trol during playback.
2. Select "Menu".
3. Press the button.
On some DVDs, selecting "Menu"
and "Title" gives you the option of
choosing from additional menus.<
To make a selection:
1. Use the buttons on the remote control to
select the desired function in the DVD-spe-
cific menu.
2. Press the button.
You can also select language, subtitles,
camera angle, or title in the DVD-specific
menu.
Observe the information on your DVD.<
Compressed video files
Playback
1. Select the directory if necessary.
2. Press the button.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
DVD system in rear
210
3. Select a track.
4. Press the button.
5. Select "Play".
6. Press the button.
To change the directory:
1. Select the directory.
2. Press the button.
Playback functions
1. Select a track.
2. Press the button.
3. Select a menu item:
> "Play":
Start playback.
> "Pause":
Stop and continue playback.
> "Repeat track":
Repeat the selected track.
> "Repeat directory":
Repeat the tracks in the current direc-
tory.
4. Press the button.
Playing audio tracks from
CD/DVD
Starting playback
Push the CD/DVD into the drive with the labeled
side facing upward.
The CD/DVD is automatically pulled in.
> Playback begins automatically after a
few seconds.
> If playback does not begin automatically:
Select "CD".
Press the button.
For CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files,
refer to page 211, it may take several minutes to
read the data depending on the directory struc-
ture.
To start playback when there is already a
CD/DVD in the drive:
1. Open the start menu with the remote con-
trol.
2. Select "CD".
As an alternative you can also control the play-
back with the buttons on the CD/DVD player.
To eject CD/DVD:
Press the button on the CD/DVD player.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
211
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Selecting a track
Buttons on CD/DVD player
Press the button for the corresponding
direction repeatedly until you reach the desired
track.
Playback begins at the start of the track.
Via the remote control
Press the button for the corresponding
direction repeatedly or turn the serrated dial
until you reach the desired track.
Playback begins at the start of the track.
Settings and playback functions for
audio CDs/DVDs
1. Select "SET".
2. Press the button.
3. Make the settings with the remote control:
> "Tone":
> "Treble / Bass" and "Balance":
Separately adjustable for the left and
right-hand headphones and the infrared
headphones.
> "Reset":
The settings are reset to the default
value.
> "Pause":
Stop and continue playback.
> "Random":
In this mode, the tracks on the CD/DVD are
played once in a random sequence.
> "Scan":
Automatically briefly sample all tracks of the
CD/DVD consecutively.
> "Repeat":
Repeat the current track. Select again to
end.
Fast forward/reverse
Buttons on the CD/DVD player:
Press and hold the button for the corre-
sponding direction.
Remote control:
Press and hold the button until you reach
the desired point.
Compressed audio files
With some CDs/DVDs playback may automati-
cally start with the first track.
Playback
1. Select the directory if necessary.
2. Press the button.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
DVD system in rear
212
3. Select a track.
4. Press the button.
To change the directory:
1. Select the directory.
2. Press the button.
Settings and playback functions for
compressed audio files
1. Select a track.
2. Press the button.
3. Make the settings with the remote control:
> "Tone":
> "Treble / Bass" and "Balance":
Separately adjustable for the left and
right-hand headphones and the infrared
headphones.
> "Reset":
The settings are reset to the default
value.
> "Pause":
Stop or continue playback.
> "Scan directory":
Briefly sample the tracks in the current
directory.
> "Scan all":
Briefly sample all tracks.
> "Random directory":
Play the tracks in the current directory in a
random sequence.
> "Random all":
Play all tracks in a random sequence.
> "Repeat track":
Repeat the selected track.
> "Repeat directory":
Repeat the tracks in the current directory.
> "Details":
Display any stored information on the cur-
rent track.
Displaying images from
CD/DVD
1. Push the CD/DVD into the drive with the
labeled side facing upward.
The CD/DVD is automatically pulled in.
2. Open the start menu with the remote con-
trol.
3. Select "Photo".
4. Press the button.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
213
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Displaying overview
1. Select the subdirectory if necessary.
2. Select "Overview".
3. Press the button.
It may take some time until the overview is
completely displayed.
4. Scroll through the overview with the menu
guidance of the remote control.
If a symbol is shown instead of an image,
the image cannot be shown in the over-
view.<
Displaying images
1. Select an image with the buttons of the
remote control.
2. Press the button.
3. Select type of display:
> Scroll with the menu guidance buttons
of the remote control.
> Show slide show:
Turn the serrated dial to set the display
duration and the sequence of the dis-
play.
Stop slide show:
Select "Stop".
Adjusting
1. Press the button.
2. Select a menu item:
3. Press the button.
Ending display
1. Press the button.
2. Select the symbol.
3. Press the button.
Ejecting CD/DVD
Press the button on the CD/DVD player.
Function
Return to the photo menu
"SET" "Display": adjusting the bright-
ness of the screen.
"Language": the language of the
system can be set after changing
to the top field
Start slide show.
Show first/last image
Rotate image by 90°
"Overview" Change to image overview
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
DVD system in rear
214
Information on CD/DVD
player
Safety notes
The BMW CD/DVD player is a Class 1
laser product. Do not operate if the cover
is damaged or open, otherwise severe eye dam-
age can result.<
Suitable media
Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs with
labels applied as these can become
detached during playback due to heat buildup
and can cause irreparable damage to the
device.
Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard
diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm.
Never play CDs/DVDs with adapters, e.g. sin-
gle-CDs, as otherwise the CDs or the adapter
can jam and may not be ejected.
Never use combined CD/DVD, e.g. DVD
Plus
or
hybrid disks, as otherwise the CD/DVD can jam
and may not be ejected.<
The CD/DVD player can play the following
media:
> Video DVD
> CD-DA (Audio CD)
> CDs/DVDs with compressed image files
> CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files
> CDs/DVDs with compressed video files
DVD Audio and SACD are not supported by the
DVD player. However, many audio DVDs avail-
able in stores also contain a video track in the
DVD Video format in addition to the audio track.
These DVDs can be played back by the DVD
player. Refer to the information on your DVD to
determine whether your audio DVD contains an
additional video track.
Depending on the authoring used, it is possible
that not all functions are available during play-
back.
Dual-sided DVDs available from retail suppliers
are coated on both sides and bear no markings.
This means both sides are information carriers.
To play the information on the other side, turn
over the DVD.
Supported formats
Depending on the compression method used,
not all files of the specified formats can be
opened.
Images
JPEG/JPG
With very large image files, it may take a longer
time until the images are shown.
Compressed audio files
> MP3
> WMA
> OGG
> AAC
Compressed video files
> VCD
> SVCD
> MPEG1
> MPEG2
> MPEG4
Digital Rights Management DRM
It may not be possible to play CDs/DVDs with
integrated Digital Rights Management.
General malfunctions
The BMW CD/DVD player is optimized for oper-
ation in the vehicle. It may react more sensi-
tively to defective CDs/DVDs than devices
intended for stationary use.
If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check
whether it has been inserted correctly.
Make sure that no foreign bodies or liq-
uids enter the CD-/DVD bay, as otherwise
the CD/DVD player will be damaged.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
215
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Humidity
High levels of humidity can lead to condensa-
tion on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens and
temporarily prevent playback.
Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs
If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/
DVDs, this can be due to one of the following
causes.
Copied or self-recorded CDs/DVDs
Possible reasons for malfunctions with copied
or self-recorded CDs/DVDs are, e.g., inconsis-
tent data-creation or recording processes, or
poor quality or high age of the CD/DVD blank.
Only label CDs/DVDs on the side with the label
using a pen intended for this purpose.
Damaged CDs/DVDs
Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and mois-
ture.
Store CDs/DVDs in a sleeve.
Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures over
1227/506, high levels of humidity, or direct
sunlight.
CDs/DVDs with copy protection
CDs/DVDs are often provided with a copy pro-
tection feature by the manufacturer. As a result,
some CDs/DVDs cannot be played, can only be
played to a limited degree, or cause the system
to switch off. In this case, wait a short while and
then switch the system back on again. Then
remove the CD/DVD from the drive.
CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files
If the language set for the CD/DVD player does
not match the language of the music track, the
music tracks may be displayed incorrectly.
Care instructions
Do not use cleaning CDs with a brush.
External device
Connecting
1 Connections for audio/video cables:
Watch the colors of the sockets when con-
necting.
Yellow socket: video
White socket: audio left
Red socket: audio right
2 Power supply for external device: sockets
with removable cap, also refer to page 129
Playback
1. Switch on the external device and start the
playback.
2. Open the start menu with the remote con-
trol.
3. Select "AUX".
4. Press the button.
For devices without a video signal, e.g. MP3
players, "No video signal" is shown. The sound
is nevertheless played.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
DVD system in rear
216
Settings for external devices
1. Press the button during playback.
2. Make the settings with the remote control:
> "Video settings":
> "Brightness", "Color" and "Contrast" of
video playback.
> "NTSC color":
The color can be adjusted on an external
device with the NTSC standard.
> "Standard":
The DVD system in the rear can be
adapted to external devices with various
TV standards. When doing so, also refer
to the operating manual of the external
device.
> "Reset":
The settings are reset to the default
value.
> "Tone":
> "Treble / Bass" and "Balance" can be
adjusted for the left and right-hand
headphones and the infrared head-
phones.
> "Reset":
Your settings are reset.
> Additional settings can be made after
changing to the top field.
"Audio": adjust the volume of the exter-
nal device to the volume of the CD/DVD
player.
"Language": system language of the
DVD system in the rear.
"Display": background brightness of
screen.
> "Video Format":
> "Standard"
> "Zoom": full-screen playback
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Communications
This chapter summarizes how to operate your
mobile phone using iDrive or voice control and
how to use BMW Assist or BMW TeleServices.
Communications
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Telephoning
220
Telephoning
The concept
Your BMW is equipped with a full mobile phone
preparation package. After pairing a suitable
mobile phone in the vehicle once, you can oper-
ate the mobile phone via iDrive, with the buttons
on the steering wheel and by voice.
Once a mobile phone has been paired in your
vehicle, it is automatically recognized as soon
as it is inside the vehicle while the engine is run-
ning or the ignition is switched on. The pairing
data of up to four mobile phones can be stored
simultaneously. If several mobile phones are
detected simultaneously, the respective last
mobile phone paired can be operated via the
vehicle.
Using a phone in your vehicle
Using snap-in adapter*
The so-called snap-in adapter, a mobile phone
cradle, enables the battery to be charged and
the mobile phone to be connected to the exter-
nal antenna of your vehicle. This ensures
improved network reception and a consistent
voice reproduction quality. Ask your BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center which mobile
phones snap-in adapters are offered for.
For your safety
A car phone makes life more convenient in
many ways, and can even save lives in an emer-
gency. While you should consult your mobile
phone's separate operating instructions for a
detailed description of safety precautions and
information, we request that you direct your
particular attention to the following:
Only make entries when the traffic situa-
tion allows you to do so. Do not hold the
mobile phone in your hand while you are driving;
use the hands-free system instead. If you do
not observe this precaution, your being dis-
tracted can endanger vehicle occupants and
other road users.<
Suitable mobile phones
Ask your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center
which mobile phones with Bluetooth interface
are supported by the mobile phone preparation
package and which mobile phones are compat-
ible with the snap-in adapter. By virtue of their
particular software versions, these mobile
phones support the functions described in this
Owner's Manual. Malfunctions can occur with
other mobile phones.
Care instructions
You can find everything you need to know on
this topic by consulting the separate operating
instructions for the mobile phone.
Operating options
You can operate the mobile phone* using:
> Buttons on steering wheel, refer to page 11
> iDrive, refer to page 226
> Voice commands, refer to page 231
> Programmable memory buttons, refer to
page 21
Avoid operating a mobile phone detected by
the vehicle with the keypad of the mobile
phone, otherwise malfunctions can occur.
Placing phone calls with BMW Assist
system*: BMW Assist calls
You can use the BMW Assist system via the
hands-free unit for BMW Assist calls.
When the status information "Communication"
or "BMW Assist" is displayed in "BMW Ser-
vice", only BMW Assist calls are possible.
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
221
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
It may not be possible to establish a telephone
connection using the mobile phone while a con-
nection is being established to BMW Assist or
while a call to BMW Assist is already in
progress. If this happens, you must log off the
mobile phone from the vehicle if you wish to
place a call with the mobile phone.
Commissioning
Pairing mobile phone in vehicle
The following prerequisites must be met:
> Suitable mobile phone: the mobile phone is
supported by the full mobile phone prepara-
tion package. Information on this subject is
also provided on the Internet at:
www.bmw.com
> The mobile phone is ready to operate.
> The Bluetooth link on the vehicle, refer to
page 225, and on the mobile phone is
active.
> Depending on the mobile phone, it may be
necessary to adjust the presets of the
mobile phone, e.g. via the following menu
items:
> Bluetooth activated
> Connection not with confirmation
> Reconnect
> Depending on the mobile phone model, the
setting energy saving mode can, for exam-
ple, result in vehicle failing to detect the
paired mobile phone.
> For pairing, specify any desired number as
the Bluetooth passkey, e.g. 1. This Blue-
tooth passkey is no longer required follow-
ing successful pairing.
> The ignition is switched on.
Only pair the mobile phone with the vehi-
cle stationary, otherwise the passengers
and other road users can be endangered due to
a lack of attentiveness on the part of the
driver.<
Switching on ignition
1. Insert the remote control as far as possible
into the ignition lock.
2. Switch on the ignition by pressing the Start/
Stop button without depressing the brake
pedal.
Preparation via iDrive
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
3. Press the button to open the start
menu.
4. Press the controller to open the menu.
5. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
6. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Telephoning
222
7. Change into the second field from the top,
select "Phone" and press the controller.
8. Select "Pair new phone" and press the con-
troller.
9. Select "Start pairing" and press the control-
ler.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis-
played.
Preparation with mobile phone
10. Additional operations must be carried out
on the mobile phone and differ depending
on the model, refer to the operating instruc-
tions of your mobile phone, e.g. find, con-
nect or pair under Bluetooth device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is also
shown on the mobile phone display.
11. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
the mobile phone display.
Pairing
Depending on your mobile phone, you will first
be requested consecutively via the display of
your mobile phone or iDrive to enter the Blue-
tooth passkey you specified.
12. Enter the Bluetooth passkey.
Depending on the mobile phone, approx.
30 seconds are available for entering the
Bluetooth passkey on the mobile phone
and on the Control Display.
13. Change into the third field from the top,
select "Confirm passkey" and press the
controller.
14. Wait a few seconds until the "Communica-
tion" menu appears.
The next time you use the mobile phone in the
vehicle interior, it will be detected within a max-
imum of 2 minutes with the engine running or
the ignition switched on.
With some mobile phone models it may
be necessary to make certain settings for
a permanent Bluetooth link, e.g. via the menu
item Authorization or Secure connection, refer
to the operating instructions of your mobile
phone.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
223
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
As soon as a mobile phone is detected by the
vehicle, the phone book entries stored on the
SIM card or on your mobile phone are transmit-
ted to your vehicle. This transmission is depen-
dent on your mobile phone, refer to the operat-
ing instructions of your mobile phone if
necessary, and can take several minutes.
If not all phone book entries are displayed:
> Transfer all phone book entries from the
SIM card to the mobile phone if necessary.
> It may not be possible to display phone
book entries with special characters.
Up to four mobile phones can be paired consec-
utively. When you pair a fifth mobile phone, the
pairing data of the mobile phone for which the
pairing data were stored first in the vehicle will
be deleted.
Checking if pairing is unsuccessful
> Is the mobile phone supported by the
mobile phone preparation package? Infor-
mation on this subject is also provided on
the Internet at: www.bmw.com.
> Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile
phone and the vehicle match? The same
Bluetooth passkey must be entered both on
the mobile phone display and via iDrive.
> Have you required longer than 30 seconds
to enter the Bluetooth passkey?
> Only a limited number of devices can be
connected to the mobile phone. Delete the
connection to other devices if necessary.
> The mobile phone no longer reacts? Switch
the mobile phone off and then on again or
disconnect the power supply.
To repeat pairing:
1. Select "Restart pairing" and press the con-
troller.
2. Repeat steps 9 to 14.
If pairing was repeatedly unsuccessful, contact
BMW Customer Relations.
To call BMW Customer Relations:
Select "Help" and press the controller.
The phone number of BMW Customer Rela-
tions and information required for pairing is
shown on the display. With mobile phones
already paired, you can select the phone num-
ber of BMW Customer Relations to establish
the connection.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Telephoning
224
List of paired mobile phones
The mobile phones for which the vehicle has
stored the pairing data can be displayed. If sev-
eral paired mobile phones are detected by the
vehicle simultaneously, you can operate the
mobile phone highest up in the list via the vehi-
cle.
You can change the order of the mobile phones
in the list. As long as a mobile phone is selected
in this list, the mobile phones cannot be oper-
ated via the vehicle.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button to open the start
menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.
5. Change into the second field from the top,
select "Phone" and press the controller.
6. Select the desired mobile phone.
With two drives:
> Move the controller to the rear to change
to the bottom field.
> Select the desired mobile phone and
press the controller.
With a single drive:
> Select the desired mobile phone and
press the controller.
7. Select "Move device up" and press the con-
troller.
The selected mobile phone is moved upward by
one position.
Unpairing mobile phone from vehicle
If you no longer want to operate a mobile phone
via the vehicle, you can delete the pairing data
of the mobile phone.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Switch off the mobile phone.
2. Press the button to open the start
menu.
3. Press the controller to open the menu.
4. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
5. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.
"Bluetooth" is selected.
6. Change into the second field from the top,
select "Phone" and press the controller.
7. Select the desired mobile phone.
With two drives:
> Move the controller to the rear to change
to the bottom field.
> Select the desired mobile phone and
press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
225
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
With a single drive:
> Select the desired mobile phone and
press the controller.
8. Select "Delete device" and press the con-
troller.
The unpaired mobile phone is deleted from the
list.
The phone book entries and the lists of stored
phone numbers are also deleted.
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth link
Bluetooth technology is not approved in
all countries. Observe the applicable local
regulations. Temporarily deactivate the Blue-
tooth link between the vehicle and the mobile
phone if necessary.
If the Bluetooth link is deactivated, you cannot
operate your mobile phone via the vehicle and
other devices with a Bluetooth interface can be
used via the mobile phone, e.g. a laptop com-
puter.<
To temporarily deactivate the Bluetooth link
between your vehicle and your mobile phone:
1. Press the button to open the start
menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.
5. Change into the second field from the top,
select "Settings" and press the controller.
6. Select "Bluetooth communication active"
and press the controller to activate or deac-
tivate the link.
The Bluetooth link is activated.
The Bluetooth link is deactivated.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Telephoning
226
Adjusting volume
Turn the knob during a call to select the desired
volume.
This volume for the hands-free system is main-
tained, even if the other audio sources are set to
minimum volume.
You can also adjust the volume with buttons on
the steering wheel, refer to page 10.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Operation via iDrive
You can operate the following functions via
iDrive:
> Accepting/refusing a call
> Dialing phone numbers
> Dialing phone numbers from the phone
book
> Dialing stored phone numbers, e.g. from the
list of accepted calls
> Ending a call
When the ignition and radio readiness are
switched off, e.g. after removing the remote
control from the ignition lock, you can continue
an ongoing call via the hands-free system for no
more than 25 minutes.
Speech quality
If the person you are talking to cannot under-
stand you well, this may be due to excessively
loud background noises. The full mobile phone
preparation package can compensate for these
noises to a certain degree.
To optimize the speech quality during a call, we
recommend that you:
> Reduce background noises, e.g. by closing
the windows, reducing the air volume of the
automatic climate control or pointing the
opened front air vents downward
> Reduce volume of hands-free system
Requirements
> The pairing data of the mobile phone are
stored in the vehicle and the mobile phone
is ready to operate.
> The engine is running or the ignition is
switched on.
> The mobile phone is detected by the vehi-
cle.
Opening Communication
You operate many of the functions described in
the following via the "Communication" menu.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button to open the start
menu.
2. Move the controller forward to open "Com-
munication".
Receiving calls
If you have the phone number of the caller
stored in the phone book and the phone num-
ber has been transmitted, the name of the entry
is displayed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
227
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Accepting a call
Press the button on the steering wheel.
Alternative:
"Accept" is selected.
Press the controller.
Rejecting a call
Select "Reject" and press the controller.
The caller is diverted to your mailbox if it has
been activated.
Calling
Dialing phone numbers
1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
2. Select "Dial" and press the controller.
3. Enter the desired phone number by dialing
the individual digits and pressing the con-
troller.
Always enter the complete phone number
consisting of national dialing code, area
code, and phone number.
The letters correspond to the digits on the
keypad of the mobile phone.
To delete the last digit:
Move the controller toward the right to
select the arrow and press the con-
troller.
4. Select "Dial number" and press the control-
ler.
Alternative: press the button on the
steering wheel.
For your phone number to be displayed to the
person you are calling, the display of phone
numbers must be enabled by your service pro-
vider.
Via programmable memory buttons
You can store phone numbers on the program-
mable memory buttons to call them directly,
refer to page 21.
Ending a call
Press the button on the steering wheel.
Alternative:
1. Select the phone number and press the
controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Telephoning
228
2. "End call" is selected.
Press the controller.
Dialing a phone number from phone
book or a phone number stored in a list
Phone numbers you have called, incoming calls
and the entries of the phone book are stored in
lists when the mobile phone is connected to the
vehicle via Bluetooth. If the caller is entered in
the phone book, the name of the entry is dis-
played instead of the phone number.
You can select the desired subscriber from the
list and establish the connection.
Five lists are available:
> "A - Z"
The entries of the mobile-phone phone
book, consisting of the name and phone
number, are sorted alphabetically.
> "Top 8"
The eight numbers called most frequently
from the phone book "A - Z" are automati-
cally stored in the Top 8 list.
> "Redial"
The last eight phone numbers you have
dialed are automatically stored. The last
number dialed is at the top of the list.
> "Missed calls"
The phone numbers of the last eight calls
which were not accepted are stored. This
requires the telephone number of the caller
to have been sent.
> "Received calls"
The phone numbers of the last eight
accepted calls are stored. This requires the
telephone number of the caller to have been
sent.
Dialing phone numbers from phone
book
The list "A - Z" is available for your phone book
entries. The phone book entries appear on the
Control Display.
1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
2. Select "A - Z" and press the controller.
3. To limit the number of displayed entries,
select the first letter of the desired entry and
press the controller.
4. Select the desired entry and press the con-
troller.
5. Select "Call" and press the controller.
The system dials the number.
If different phone numbers are stored in the
mobile phone under one name, e.g. office and
home, the name is shown once for each phone
number.
You can change a phone number stored in the
phone book, e.g. to call a specific extension:
1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
2. Select "A - Z" and press the controller.
3. Select the desired entry and press the con-
troller.
4. Select "Add digits" and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
229
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
5. Change the phone number.
6. Select "Dial number" and press the control-
ler.
Dialing a phone number stored in a list
To select an entry and establish a connection:
1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
2. Select list and press the controller:
> "Top 8"
> "Redial"
> "Missed calls"
> "Received calls"
3. Select the desired entry and press the con-
troller.
4. Select "Call" and press the controller.
The system dials the number.
Deleting individual entries
1. Select the desired entry from the list and
press the controller.
2. Select "Delete" and press the controller.
The entry is deleted.
Deleting entire list
1. Select an entry from the list and press the
controller.
2. Select "Delete all numbers" and press the
controller.
3. Select "Yes" and press the controller.
The list is deleted.
BMW Contact*
If you are not enabled for BMW Assist, you can
have several service phone numbers displayed:
> Roadside Assistance
* of the BMW Group
when you require breakdown assistance
> BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center, e.g.
when you want to make an appointment for
service
> BMW Customer Relations
* for information
on all aspects of your vehicle
If BMW Assist is enabled, refer to page 235.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Telephoning
230
You can select the displayed service phone
number if your mobile phone is paired in the
vehicle:
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forward to select
"Communication".
3. Select "BMW Contact" and press the con-
troller.
4. Select "BMW Contact Numbers" and press
the controller.
5. Select one of the following menu items and
press the controller:
> "Roadside Assistance"
> "Customer Relations"
> "Service Request"
6. Select "Call" and press the controller.
Contact is established.
Transferring phone number via tone
dialing method
The tone dialing method is required for access
to network services or for controlling devices,
e.g. remote checking of an answering machine.
This function is available when a connection
has been established.
1. Establish connection.
2. With a single drive:
Press the controller.
Select "Keypad" and press the controller.
With two drives:
Move the controller backwards until the
bottom field is selected.
3. Select the desired character
and press the
controller.
Each character is sent immediately and
confirmed by a tone depending on the
mobile phone model.
Changing between mobile
phone and hands-free system
From mobile phone to hands-free
system*
You can continue calls begun outside the Blue-
tooth range of the vehicle via the handsfree sys-
tem when the engine is running or the ignition is
switched on. Depending on your mobile phone,
the system automatically switches over to the
handsfree mode.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
231
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
For mobile phones that do not automatically
switch over to the handsfree mode:
> Depending on the mobile phone model
used, the conversation can be continued via
the hands-free system if necessary. Act
according to what is shown on the mobile
phone display, refer to the operating
instructions of your mobile phone.
> Press the button above the storage
compartment.
From handsfree system to mobile
phone
When you telephone via the handsfree system,
you can also continue the call via the mobile
phone if necessary, depending on the mobile
phone model. Act according to what is shown
on the mobile phone display, refer to the oper-
ating instructions of your mobile phone.
As an alternative, you can deactivate the Blue-
tooth link.
Depending on your mobile phone model, poor
reception of the wireless communications net-
work can result in the system changing from the
hands-free system to the mobile phone.
Operation by voice*
The concept
You can operate your mobile phone without
having to remove your hands from the steering
wheel. When making your entries, you will be
supported by announcements or questions in
many cases.
The same prerequisites as for operation via
iDrive apply, refer to page 226.
Symbols in Owner's Manual
Voice commands
Activating system
1. Briefly press the button on the steering
wheel.
An acoustic signal indicates that you can
say commands.
2. Say the command.
Ending/canceling operation by voice
Press the button on the steering wheel
or
In dialogs where text is spoken, e.g. a name
rather than a command, canceling is only possi-
ble using the button on the steering wheel.
Having possible commands read aloud
The system understands default commands
that must be spoken word for word.
You can have the possible commands spoken
by the system at any point:
Using alternative commands
There are often a number of commands to run a
function, e.g.:
The system recognizes digits from zero to nine.
You can say each digit individually or group
them into a sequence to accelerate the input.
{...} Say the specified commands word for
word.
{{...}} Indicates responses of the system.
{Cancel}.
{Help}
{Dial name} or {Name}.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Telephoning
232
Example: dialing phone numbers
To start the dialog:
Press the button on the steering wheel.
Adjusting volume of instructions
You can adjust the volume for the instructions
from the system:
Turn the knob during instructions.
This volume for the instructions is maintained,
even if the other audio sources are set to mini-
mum volume.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Calling
Dialing phone numbers
The connection to the desired subscriber is
established.
Correcting phone number
After the last spoken sequence of digits has
been repeated by the system, you can delete
this sequence of digits.
The command {Correct number} can be
repeated as often as you like.
Deleting phone number
All digits entered up to this point are deleted.
Voice phone book
Operating by voice command requires a per-
sonal voice phone book.
> With separate drives for audio CDs and nav-
igation DVDs, the entries are automatically
applied from your mobile phone's memory.
> With a single drive, the entries must be
entered by voice and are independent of
your mobile phone's memory. In this case, it
is not possible to use voice command either
to call phone numbers stored in the mobile
phone or to store new numbers. Up to 50
entries can be input. An entry always con-
sists of a name and phone number.
Command The voice control answers
{Dial number}{{Please say the number}}
e.g. {123 456 7890} Depending on equipment:
{{123 456 7890. Continue?}} or
{{123 456 7890. And next?}}
{Dial}{{Dialing number}}
1. {Dial number}.
2. Say the phone number.
For telephone calls abroad, say {Plus}
and then the country code.
3. {Dial}.
{Correct number}.
The digits are deleted.
{Delete}.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
233
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Creating and editing voice phone
book*
Store entry:
An entry always consists of a name and phone
number.
Delete entry:
You can delete any entry from the voice phone
book.
Delete all entries:
{Delete phone book} deletes all entries in the
phone book.
Have entries read aloud and select:
You can have all the entries of your voice phone
book read aloud in the order of input and select
a certain entry to establish a connection:
Selecting an entry
The connection to the phone number of the
selected entry is established.
Redialing
The {Redial} command opens "Redial".
Notes
Important for voice commands
For voice commands, keep the following in
mind:
> Issue the commands smoothly and at nor-
mal volume, avoiding excessive emphases
and pauses.
> Keep the doors, windows and glass sunroof
closed to prevent interference from ambi-
ent noise.
> Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
Inserting/removing snap-in
adapter*
1. Press the area 1 around the button and
remove the cover
*.
1. {Save name}.
The dialog for storing a name is
opened.
2. Speak the name.
The spoken length of the names in the
phone book must not exceed approx.
2seconds.
3. Say the phone number when prompted.
4. To store the phone number:
{Save}.
1. {Delete name}.
The dialog for deleting an entry is
opened.
2. Say the name when prompted.
3. Confirm the prompt with {Yes}.
1. {Delete phone book}.
The dialog for deleting phone book is
opened.
2. Confirm the prompt with {Yes}.
3. Confirm the repeated prompt with
{Yes}.
1. {Read phone book}.
The dialog for reading phone book is
opened.
2. {Dial number} when the desired entry is
read aloud.
1. {Dial name}.
The dialog for selecting an entry is
opened.
2. Say the name when prompted.
3. Confirm the prompt with {Yes}.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Telephoning
234
2. Insert the snap-in adapter in the front and
press it downward until it engages.
To remove the snap-in adapter:
Press down on region 1.
Inserting mobile phone
1. Remove the protective cap from the mobile
phone's antenna connector if necessary, so
that the mobile phone can engage in the
snap-in adapter.
2. Push the mobile phone with the buttons
facing upward toward the electrical connec-
tions and press down until it engages.
The mobile phone battery is charged from the
radio readiness position.
To protect the vehicle's batteries, avoid
using the phone when the ignition is
switched off.<
Removing mobile phone
Press the button.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
235
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
BMW Assist
BMW Assist provides you with various services.
For example, the position data of your vehicle
can be transferred to the BMW Assist
Response Center if an emergency request
* has
been initiated.
Many BMW Assist services depend on the indi-
vidually agreed contract.
After your contract has expired, the BMW
Assist system will be deactivated by the BMW
Assist Response Center without you having to
visit a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center.
After the BMW Assist system has been deacti-
vated, no BMW Assist service will be available.
The BMW Assist system can be reactivated by
a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center after
signing a new contract.
Requirements
If the following requirements are met, you can
use BMW Assist:
> The installed BMW Assist system is logged
in on a wireless communications network.
This network must be capable of transmit-
ting the services.
> To transmit position data, the vehicle must
be able to determine the current position.
> To activate and update BMW Assist, a GPS
signal must be available.
> You have subscribed to BMW Assist with
your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or
with the BMW Assist Response Center.
Enabling must have been completed.
> BMW Assist is activated, refer to page 240.
Offered services
The following services are available via
BMW Assist:
> Emergency request, refer to page 279:
When you press the SOS button, a connec-
tion is established to the BMW Assist
Response Center. The BMW Assist
Response Center contacts you and takes
further steps to help you.
> Automatic collision notification:
Under certain conditions, a connection is
established to the BMW Assist Response
Center after a serious accident. If possible,
the BMW Assist Response Center contacts
you and takes further steps to help you.
> Enhanced roadside assistance:
You can call BMW Roadside Assistance
*
should you require help in the event of a
breakdown. If possible, the vehicle and
position data are transmitted in the process.
> BMW Customer Relations:
For information on all aspects of your vehi-
cle, you can be connected to BMW Cus-
tomer Relations.
> BMW TeleServices
*:
The data on the service status of your vehi-
cle or on required inspections are transmit-
ted to your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle
Center either automatically prior to the due
date or when you request a BMW service
appointment.
> Unlocking and locking the vehicle:
Inform the BMW Assist Response Center,
e.g. if your remote control is not available
and you want to have the vehicle opened or
closed.
> Stolen vehicle recovery:
After your vehicle has been reported to the
police as stolen, the BMW Assist Response
Center can locate its position.
In addition, you can be provided with other ser-
vices, e.g. the concierge service or information
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
BMW Assist
236
on route planning, traffic conditions, and the
weather. With Critical Calling, you can make a
limited number of calls via the BMW Assist
Response Center, e.g. if you do not have your
mobile phone with you.
Press the SOS button to contact the BMW
Assist Response Center, see below.
You also have access to the BMW Assist con-
cierge service via the Internet.
Characteristics of offered services
The following special aspects apply to the ser-
vices:
> The services offered are country-specific.
> Voice contact is established or data are
transferred, depending on the equipment
and the country. In some countries, it is
possible to do both.
> The data transferred can, for example, be
the vehicle data, your current position or the
data of the CBS Condition Based Service.
Using services
Contact to the BMW Assist Response
Center
You can contact the BMW Assist Response
Center via the SOS button.
1. Briefly press protective cover to open.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
arrangement of the switches and indicator
lamps may differ somewhat.
2. Press the button for at least 2 seconds.
The BMW Assist Response Center is con-
tacted.
Roadside assistance
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forward to select
"Communication".
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "BMW Assist" is selected
and press the controller.
4. Select "Roadside Assistance" and press
the controller.
If the current position can be determined,
the current vehicle location is displayed.
5. Select "Start service" and press the con-
troller.
The BMW Assist Response Center will connect
you to the BMW Roadside Assistance.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
237
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
BMW TeleServices*
Automatic BMW Teleservice call*
The data on the service status of your vehicle or
on required inspections are transmitted auto-
matically directly to your BMW Sports Activity
Vehicle Center prior to the due date. You can
check when the BMW Sports Activity Vehicle
Center was notified.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Info sources" and press the control-
ler.
4. Select "Service Info" and press the control-
ler.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Service requirements" is
selected and press the controller.
6. Select "Auto Request" and press the con-
troller.
Manual BMW Teleservice call
You can transmit data regarding your vehicle's
service status to your BMW Sports Activity
Vehicle Center when you wish to arrange a ser-
vice appointment.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forward to select
"Communication".
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "BMW Assist" is selected
and press the controller.
4. Select "Service Request" and press the
controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
BMW Assist
238
5. Select "Start service" and press the con-
troller.
The data relevant for service are transmitted.
Your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center will
contact you to set up an appointment for ser-
vice.
Displaying and updating
BMW TeleServices services*
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "BMW Service settings" and press
the controller.
5. Select "Enabled TeleServices" and press
the controller.
The activated BMW TeleServices services
are displayed.
6. "Options" is selected: press the controller.
7. Select "Update services" and press the
controller.
Contacting BMW Customer Relations
For information on all aspects of your vehicle,
you can contact BMW Customer Relations.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forward to select
"Communication".
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "BMW Assist" is selected
and press the controller.
4. Select "Customer Relations".
5. Press the controller.
6. Select "Start service" and press the con-
troller.
You are connected to BMW Customer Rela-
tions by the BMW Assist Response Center.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
239
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Concierge service*
When you call the BMW Assist concierge ser-
vice, you can, for example, obtain information
on current events, filling stations or hotels and
have their phone numbers and addresses
transmitted. Many hotels can be booked
directly through the BMW concierge service.
The concierge service must be enabled sepa-
rately by the BMW Assist Response Center.
Calling up information
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forward to select
"Communication".
3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "BMW Assist" is selected
and press the controller.
4. Select "Concierge" and press the control-
ler.
5. Select "Start service" and press the con-
troller.
The BMW Assist Response Center will connect
you with a BMW Assist concierge.
Displaying transferred data
Select the received message if necessary and
press the controller.
Dialing a phone number or transferring
an address for destination guidance
1. Select "Options" and press the controller.
2. Select a menu item:
> With "Call" you can establish a telephone
connection. A prerequisite for this is that
your Bluetooth mobile phone has been
paired in the vehicle.
> Press "Select as destination" to transfer the
address to the navigation system for desti-
nation guidance.
Customizing BMW Assist
Displaying and updating services
You will be notified of any changes in the ser-
vices offered by BMW Assist. In this case you
should update the service functions.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
BMW Assist
240
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "BMW Service set-
tings" is selected and press the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Enabled Assist services" is
selected and press the controller.
The currently available BMW Assist ser-
vices are displayed.
6. Select "Options" and press the controller.
7. Select "Update services" and press the
controller.
Activating BMW Assist
BMW Assist must be activated to use the ser-
vices.
Requirements
> Make sure that the vehicle can determine its
current position. Reception is best when
you have an unobstructed view to the sky.
> Leave vehicle ignition switched on during
the activation process.
Activating
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "BMW Service set-
tings" is selected and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
241
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Enabled Assist services" is
selected and press the controller.
6. Select "Enable services" and press the con-
troller.
BMW Assist is enabled and the data
exchange with the BMW Assist Response
Center begins.
Activation takes a few minutes. The status is
displayed on the Control Display. If you open
another menu, the activation process continues
to run in the background.
Displaying vehicle data
With BMW Assist activated, you can have the
Telematics ID displayed. The Telematics ID is
used to identify your vehicle. These data are
transmitted to the service.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Select "BMW Service settings" and press
the controller.
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Assist profile" is selected
and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Refueling
244
Refueling
Switch off the engine before refueling.
When handling fuel, always observe all
applicable precautionary measures and regula-
tions. Never transport reserve fuel containers in
the vehicle. These could become leaky and
cause an explosion or a fire in an accident.<
Fuel filler door
Opening
1. Open the fuel filler door. To do this, briefly
press the lower edge.
2. Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel filler cap in the bracket
attached to the fuel filler door.
Closing
Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly
hear a click.
Do not crush the band attached to the
cap; otherwise, the cap may not properly
seal and fuel vapors can escape.<
A message
* is displayed if the cap is loose or
missing.
Releasing manually
If an electrical malfunction should occur, you
can unlock the fuel filler door manually.
1. Open the right-hand side panel in the cargo
bay.
2. Pull the knob with the gas pump symbol.
Observe the following when refueling
When handling fuels, follow the safety
precautions posted at the filling station.
Otherwise, there is a danger of personal injury
or property damage.<
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com-
pletely into the filler pipe. Avoid raising the filler
nozzle during refueling, otherwise this leads to
> premature pump shutoff
> a reduced efficiency of the fuel-vapor
recovery system
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Fuel tank capacity
Approx. 22.5 US gal/85 liters, including the
reserve capacity of approx. 2.1 US gal/8 liters
X5 xDrive48i: approx. 2.6 US gal/10 liters
reserve
X6 xDrive50i: approx. 3.2 US gal/12 liters
reserve
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Mobility
245
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Fuel specifications
Gasoline engine: required fuel
Do not use leaded gasoline, otherwise
damage to the catalytic converter will
result.
Do not use E85, i.e. fuel that consists of 85%
ethanol, or Flex Fuel, otherwise permanent
damage to the engine and the fuel supply sys-
tem will result.<
Super Premium Gasoline/AKI 91
This gasoline is highly recommended.
However, you may also use gasoline with less
AKI. The minimum AKI Rating is 87.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat-
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high outside temperatures.
This has no affect on the engine life.
Do not use gasoline below the specified
minimum quality, otherwise engine dam-
age can result.<
Use high-quality brands
Field experience has indicated significant dif-
ferences in fuel quality: volatility, composition,
additives, etc., among gasolines offered for sale
in the United States and Canada. Fuels contain-
ing up to and including 10% ethanol or other
oxygenates with up to 2.8% oxygen by weight,
that is, 15% MTBE or 3% methanol plus an
equivalent amount of co-solvent, will not void
the applicable warranties with respect to
defects in materials or workmanship.
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
drivability, starting and stalling problems
especially under certain environmental condi-
tions such as high ambient temperature and
high altitude.
Should you encounter drivability problems
which you suspect could be related to the fuel
you are using, we recommend that you respond
by switching to a recognized high-quality brand
such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier
Detergent Gasoline.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may also result in unscheduled maintenance.<
BMW X5 with BMW Advanced Diesel:
Required fuel
Ultra-low sulfur diesel
The engine of your BMW is designed for diesel
with a low sulfur content:
Ultra-low sulfur diesel ASTM D 975-07a.
Refuel only with ultra-low sulfur diesel.
The percentage of biodiesel in the fuel
must not exceed 5Ξ, referred to as B5. Do not
refuel with gasoline. If the vehicle has been
refueled with incorrect fuel such as gasoline, do
not start the engine; otherwise, there is a dan-
ger of engine damage.<
After incorrect refueling, contact a BMW Sports
Activity Vehicle Center.
The fuel filling neck is designed for refuel-
ing with diesel nozzles.
If the nozzle cannot be inserted into the fuel
filler pipe of your BMW, please check to make
sure that you are refueling with a diesel fuel
pump and whether this is equipped with a diesel
nozzle.<
Winter diesel
In order to assure the operational reliability of
the diesel engine, during cold seasons, please
refuel with winter diesel, which is sold at fuel
stations during this time of year. The standard
fuel filter heating prevents the supply of fuel
from stalling during driving.
Do not mix in any additives or gasoline;
otherwise, there is the risk of engine dam-
age.<
BMW X5 with BMW Advanced
Diesel
The concept
BMW Advanced Diesel reduces nitrogen oxides
in the diesel exhaust of your vehicle by injecting
the reducing agent diesel exhaust fluid into the
exhaust line. In the catalytic converter, a chem-
ical reaction occurs that minimizes nitrogen
oxides.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Refueling
246
In order to be able to start the engine in the
usual way, there must be a sufficient supply of
diesel exhaust fluid in the separate reservoir.
System heating
In order to bring the system to operating tem-
perature after a cold start of the engine, the
automatic transmission shifts into the next
higher gear at a later point.
Reserve display
A display in the instrument panel informs you
about the remaining distance can be covered
with the amount of fuel currently in the tank.
The reserve display appears approx.
1,000 miles/1,600 km before the end of the
tank.
As soon as the reserve display has
appeared in the instrument panel, have
the diesel exhaust fluid refilled to prevent the
engine from being unable to restart.<
Diesel exhaust fluid at minimum
Even with a display of -- mls, the engine will
continue to run, provided that it is not switched
off, and all other operating requirements are
met, e.g. sufficient fuel.
Do not drive until the displayed remaining
distance runs out. Otherwise, it may not
be possible to restart the engine.<
Incorrect fueling
The warning lamp lights up:
The reservoir has been filled with an
incorrect fluid.
Please contact your BMW Sports Activity Vehi-
cle Center.
Have diesel exhaust fluid refilled
Your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center refills
the diesel exhaust fluid as part of the regular
maintenance. If you adhere to this maintenance
schedule, it is usually not necessary to refill any
fluids between the maintenance dates.
Under certain circumstances, e.g. due to a par-
ticularly sporty driving style or operation of the
vehicle at high altitudes, it may be necessary to
refill fluids between maintenance dates.
As soon as the reserve display has appeared in
the instrument panel, have the diesel exhaust
fluid refilled to prevent the engine from being
unable to restart.
You can have the fluid refilled by a BMW Sports
Activity Vehicle Center.
Diesel exhaust fluid at low
temperatures
Due to its physical properties, at temper-
atures below +237/–56, it may also be
necessary to refill the diesel exhaust fluid
between the regular maintenance dates.
If the fluid needs to be refilled, this will be indi-
cated with the reserve display in the instrument
panel, refer to page 246.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Mobility
247
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Only refill the diesel exhaust fluid
yourself in exceptional circumstances
In order to get your vehicle to reach the nearest
BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center, you may
refill the diesel exhaust fluid yourself, making
sure to heed the warning notices.
Do not allow diesel exhaust fluid to come
into contact with you. This can lead to
skin and eye irritation. Wear protective goggles
and gloves as needed. Follow the safety
instructions on the bottle.
When opening the bottle or reservoir, pungent
smelling vapors can escape. Before refilling,
close the vehicle completely so that the vapors
do not get into the interior of the vehicle. When
handling diesel exhaust fluid in enclosed
spaces, make sure to have sufficient ventilation.
After handling diesel exhaust fluid, wash hands
thoroughly. Failure to do so may lead to irrita-
tion, e.g. due to inadvertent contact with the
eyes.
If eye irritation occurs, immediately rinse eyes
with ample water and contact a doctor if neces-
sary.
If diesel exhaust fluid comes into contact with
surfaces of your vehicle, rinse the affected sur-
faces with water or else damage may occur.
Keep diesel exhaust fluid out of reach of chil-
dren.<
Suitable diesel exhaust fluid
> Preferred: BMW Diesel Exhaust Fluid.
This bottle and its special adapter permit
convenient refilling with diesel exhaust
fluid.
> Alternative: NOx reduction agent AUS 32
You can get diesel exhaust fluid at your BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center.
Refilling quantity
Refilling quantity at the start of the reserve dis-
play: approx. 0.75 US gal/2.7 Liter
Open reservoir for diesel exhaust fluid
1. Open hood, refer to page 258.
2. Fit releasing tool from onboard tool kit, refer
to page 269 into place and open the lock,
refer to arrow.
Refilling BMW diesel exhaust fluid
1. Set bottle into place and rotate until it
comes into contact with the stop, refer to
arrow.
2. Press bottle down, refer to arrow.
The reservoir of the vehicle is filled.
3. The reservoir is full when the fill level in the
bottle stops changing. It is not possible to
overfill.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Refueling
248
Pull bottle back, refer to arrow, and unscrew
it.
Closing reservoir
After the reservoir is filled, close it again with the
releasing tool.
After refilling diesel exhaust fluid
Incorrect fluid
After refilling with the incorrect fluid, e.g.
antifreeze for windshield wiper fluid, do
not start the engine because this could result in
a fire hazard.<
Contact your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle
Center.
Bottle disposal
You can have bottles for diesel exhaust
fluid properly disposed of at your BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center.
Only dispose of empty bottles in your house-
hold garbage if the local legal regulations permit
it.<
Reserve display
After refilling, the reserve continues to appear
after the engine is restarted. After the vehicle
has been driven for a few more minutes, this
display will disappear.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Mobility
249
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressure
Information for your safety
The condition of the tires and the maintenance
of the specified tire pressure are crucial not only
to the tire's service life, but also to driving com-
fort and most importantly, driving safety.
Checking pressure
Only check tire inflation pressure when the tires
are cold. This means after a maximum of
1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours. When tires are
warm, the tire inflation pressure increases.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
and correct it as needed, even on the
compact tire
*: at least twice a month and before
starting long trips. If you fail to observe this pre-
caution, you may be driving on tires with incor-
rect tire pressures, a condition that can not only
compromise your vehicle's driving stability, but
also lead to tire damage and the risk of an acci-
dent. Do not drive with depressurized, i.e. flat
tires, except run-flat tires. A flat tire will seri-
ously impair your vehicle's handling and braking
response. Attempts to drive on a flat tire can
lead to a loss of control over the vehicle.<
After correcting the tire inflation pressure,
reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
page 100, or reset the Tire Pressure Monitor,
refer to page 102.<
Pressure specifications
The tables below provide all the correct inflation
pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient
temperature.
The inflation pressures apply to the
tire sizes and tire brands respectively
approved and recommended by BMW; a list
of these is available from your BMW Sports
Activity Vehicle Center.<
For correct identification of the right tire infla-
tion pressure for your tires, observe the follow-
ing:
> Tire sizes of your vehicle
> Load conditions
> Maximum allowable driving speed
Tire inflation pressures for speeds
up to 100 mph/160 km/h
For normal driving up to 100 mph/160 km/h,
adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation
pressures listed on the following pages in the
column Traveling speeds up to max. of
100 mph/160 km/h to achieve optimum driving
comfort.
These pressure specifications can be found on
the door post when you open the driver's door.
The permissible top speed for these tire
inflation pressures is 100 mph/160 km/h.
Do not exceed this speed, otherwise tire dam-
age and accidents may result.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
250
Tire inflation pressures for speeds
above 100 mph/160 km/h
In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please
observe, and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures
for speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from
the relevant table on the following pages. Oth-
erwise tire damage and accidents could
occur.<
Observe all national and local maximum speed
limits, otherwise violations of the law could
occur.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Mobility
251
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Tire inflation pressures X5 xDrive30i/X5 xDrive48i/X5 xDrive35d with two rows
of seats
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in
the table are indicated in psi/
kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
Compact wheel
*:
T 155/90 D 18 113 M
T 155/80 R 19 114 M
60/420 60/420 60/420 60/420 60/420 60/420
without sport package:
255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL 32/220 32/220 32/220 32/220 32/220 38/260
255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL 32/220 35/240 32/220 32/220 32/220 38/260
Front: 255/50 R 19 107 V XL 32/220 - 32/220 - 32/220 -
Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 V XL - 32/220 - 32/220 - 35/240
Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL 32/220 - 32/220 - 32/220 -
Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL - 32/220 - 32/220 - 35/240
Front: 285/35 R 21 105 W XL 32/220 - 32/220 - 32/220 -
Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 W XL - 32/220 - 32/220 - 38/260
with sport package:
255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL 32/220 32/220 32/220 32/220 32/220 38/260
255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL 32/220 35/240 32/220 32/220 32/220 38/260
Front: 255/50 R 19 107 V XL 32/220 - 32/220 - 35/240 -
Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 V XL - 32/220 - 32/220 - 38/260
Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL 32/220 - 32/220 - 35/240 -
Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL - 32/220 - 32/220 - 38/260
Front: 285/35 R 21 105 W XL 32/220 - 32/220 - 35/240 -
Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 W XL - 32/220 - 35/240 - 41/280
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 289.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
252
Tire inflation pressures X5 xDrive30i/X5 xDrive48i/X5 xDrive35d with two rows
of seats
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in
the table are indicated in psi/
kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
without sport package:
255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL 32/220 35/240 32/220 32/220 32/220 39/270
255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL 32/220 38/260 32/220 35/240 35/240 42/290
Front: 255/50 R 19 107 V XL 32/220 - 32/220 - 32/220 -
Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 V XL - 35/240 - 32/220 - 36/250
Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL 32/220 - 32/220 - 32/220 -
Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL - 35/240 - 32/220 - 36/250
Front: 285/35 R 21 105 W XL 32/220 - 32/220 - 32/220 -
Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 W XL - 36/250 - 32/220 - 39/270
with sport package:
255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL 32/220 35/240 32/220 32/220 32/220 39/270
255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL 32/220 38/260 32/220 35/240 35/240 42/290
Front: 255/50 R 19 107 V XL 32/220 - 32/220 - 35/240 -
Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 V XL - 35/240 - 35/240 - 41/280
Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL 32/220 - 32/220 - 35/240 -
Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL - 35/240 - 35/240 - 39/270
Front: 285/35 R 21 105 W XL 32/220 - 32/220 - 35/240 -
Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 W XL - 36/250 - 35/240 - 42/290
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 289.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Mobility
253
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Tire inflation pressure X6 xDrive35i
Tire inflation pressures for X6 xDrive50i
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in
the table are indicated in psi/
kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL
255/50 R 19 107 V M+S XL
32/220 32/220 32/220 32/220 33/230 39/270
Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL 32/220 - 32/220 - 33/230 -
Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL - 32/220 - 32/220 - 36/250
Front: 285/35 R 21 105 W XL 32/220 - 32/220 - 33/230 -
Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 W XL - 32/220 - 32/220 - 36/250
Compact wheel
*:
T 155/90 D 18 113 M
T 155/80 R 19 114 M
60/420 60/420 60/420 60/420 60/420 60/420
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 289.
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in
the table are indicated in psi/
kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL
255/50 R 19 107 V M+S XL
33/230 33/230 33/230 33/230 36/250 39/270
Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL 36/250 - 36/250 - 39/270 -
Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL - 36/250 - 36/250 - 39/270
Front: 285/35 R 21 105 W XL 36/250 - 36/250 - 42/290 -
Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 W XL - 36/250 - 36/250 - 42/290
Compact wheel
*:
T 155/90 D 18 113 M
T 155/80 R 19 114 M
60/420 60/420 60/420 60/420 60/420 60/420
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 289.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
254
Tire identification marks
Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire
makes it easier to identify and choose the right
tires.
Tire size
Speed letter
Q = up to 100 mph/160 km/h
T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the US Department of Transportation.
DOT code:
Tire age
The manufacturing date of tires is contained in
the tire coding: DOT ... 3008 indicates that the
tire was manufactured in week 30 of 2008.
BMW recommends that you replace all tires
after 6 years at most, even if some tires may last
for 10 years.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Tread wear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades
Tread wear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger car tires must conform to
Federal Safety Requirements in addition
to these grades.<
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov-
ernment test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half (1γ) times as
well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, how-
ever, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteris-
tics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C.
These grades represent the tire's ability to stop
on wet pavement, as measured under con-
trolled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cor-
nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction charac-
teristics.<
e.g.
Nominal width in mm
Aspect ratio in Ξ
Belted construction – radial
Rim diameter in inches
Carrying capacity ID-code
(not in ZR tires)
Speed code letter
(in ZR tires before the R)
255/55 R 18 109 H
e.g.
Manufacturer code
for tire make
Tire size and tire design
Tire age
DOT xxxx xxx 0806
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Mobility
255
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehi-
cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either sep-
arately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.<
RSC – run-flat tires
You will recognize run-flat tires by a circular
symbol containing the letters RSC on the side
of the tire, refer to page 256.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires.
These have better winter properties than sum-
mer tires.
XL
Indicates specially reinforced tires.
Tire condition
Inspect your tires frequently for tread wear,
signs of damage and for foreign objects lodged
in the tread. Check the tread depth.
Minimum tread depth
The tread depth should not drop below 0.12 in/
3 mm, although, for example, European legisla-
tion only specifies a minimum tread depth of
0.063 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths below 0.12 in/
3 mm there is an increased risk of high-speed
hydroplaning, even when only small amounts of
water are present on the road surface.
When winter tires wear down past a tread depth
of 0.16 in/4 mm, they become perceptibly less
suitable for winter conditions. For the sake of
safety, new tires should be installed.
Wear indicators at the tread-groove base are
distributed over the tire's circumference and
are marked on the side of the tire with TWI –
Tread Wear Indicator. If the tire tread has been
driven down to the wear indicators, a tread
depth of 0.063 in/1.6 mm has been reached.
Wheel/tire damage
Please note that low-profile tires cause wheels,
tires and suspension parts to be more suscep-
tible to road hazards and consequential dam-
ages.
Unusual vibrations encountered during normal
vehicle operation can indicate tire failure or
some other vehicle defect. This can, for exam-
ple, be caused by driving over curbs. These
kinds of problems may also be signaled by other
changes in vehicle response, such as a strong
tendency to pull to the left or right.
In these cases, reduce speed immedi-
ately and have wheels and tires thor-
oughly checked. To do so, drive carefully to the
nearest BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or
tire shop that works according to BMW repair
procedures with correspondingly trained per-
sonnel. If necessary, have the vehicle towed
there. Otherwise, tire damage can be extremely
dangerous to vehicle occupants and other road
users.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
256
Run-flat tires
You will recognize run-flat tires by the circular
symbol containing the letters RSC on the side
of the tire.
Run-flat tires consist of partially self-contained
tires and special rims. The sidewall reinforce-
ment ensures that the tire retains some residual
safety in the event of pressure drop and driving
remains possible to a restricted degree.
To continue driving with a damaged tire:
> With Flat Tire Monitor, refer to Indication of
a flat tire page 101
> With Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to Mes-
sage with low tire inflation pressure
page 103
New wheels and tires
Have new wheels and tires installed only
by your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle
Center or a tire shop that works according to
BMW repair procedures with correspondingly
trained personnel. If this work is not carried out
properly, there is a danger of subsequent dam-
age and related safety hazards. Make sure that
the new wheels are balanced.<
Retreaded tires
BMW does not recommend that you use
retreaded tires, as driving safety may be
impaired. The causes for this include the possi-
bly different tire casing structures and the often
wide variations in their age, which can result in a
limited service life.<
The right wheels and tires
When mounting new tires or changing over
from summer to winter tires and vice versa,
mount Run-Flat Tires for your own safety. Your
BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center will be
happy to advise you.
BMW recommends that you use only
wheel and tire combinations that BMW
has tested and approved for your particular
vehicle. Variations in factors such as manufac-
turing tolerances mean that even wheels and
tires with identical official size ratings could
actually have different dimensions than the
approved units – these differences could lead to
body contact, and with it the risk of severe acci-
dents. If non-approved wheels and tires are
used, BMW cannot evaluate their suitability,
and therefore cannot be held liable for driving
safety.<
When changing to larger wheels and tires,
it may be necessary to make changes to
the wheel-well trim piece, as otherwise road
users could be endangered or the vehicle could
be damaged. Only have this work carried out by
a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a
workshop that works in accordance with BMW
guidelines and uses appropriately trained per-
sonnel.<
You can ask your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle
Center for the correct wheel/tire combination.
The correct wheel/tire combination also affects
various systems whose function would other-
wise be impaired, e.g. ABS, DSC, xDrive,
Dynamic Performance Control in the BMW X6,
or Flat Tire Monitor.
To maintain good handling and vehicle
response, use only tires of a single tread config-
uration from a single manufacturer. Following
tire damage, have the original wheel and tire
combination remounted on the vehicle as soon
as possible.
Wheels with electronics for
TPM Tire Pressure Monitor
When mounting new tires or changing from
summer to winter tires or vice versa, only use
wheels with TPM electronics, otherwise the
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Mobility
257
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Tire Pressure Monitor cannot detect a flat tire,
refer to page 101. Your BMW Sports Activity
Vehicle Center will be happy to advise you on
this subject.
Recommended tire brands
Certain tire makes are recommended by BMW
depending on the tire size. You can recognize
these from the clearly visible BMW marking on
the tire sidewall.
When used properly, these tires comply with
the most demanding standards for safety and
vehicle response.
Special characteristics of winter tires
BMW recommends using winter tires for opera-
tion on winter road or at temperatures below
+457/+76. Although all-season M+S tires
provide better winter traction than summer
tires, they generally fail to provide the same lev-
els of cold-weather performance as winter tires.
Paying attention to speed
Always observe the maximum permissi-
ble speed for the winter tires, otherwise
tire damage may occur, which can result in acci-
dents.<
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. Always
protect tires against all contact with oil, grease
and fuels. Do not exceed the maximum tire
inflation pressure indicated on the side wall of
the tire.
Rotating wheels between axles
Even with tires of the same size, BMW
recommends that you not rotate the front
tires to the rear or vice versa as this can nega-
tively affect handling characteristics.
When the vehicle is equipped with different
tires sizes
*, rotating tires from one axle to the
other is not permitted.<
Snow chains*
BMW only tests certain fine-link snow chains,
classifies them as road-safe and recommends
them. Your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center
can provide you with this information.
BMW X5: use is only permitted in pairs on the
rear wheels with tires of the size:
> 255/55 R 18
> 255/50 R 19
BMW X6: it is only permissible to use snow
chains in pairs, on the 255/50 R 19 rear wheels.
Observe the manufacturer's instructions when
mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed
of 30 mph/50 km/h with the chains mounted.
After mounting snow chains, do not ini-
tialize the Flat Tire Monitor
*, as otherwise
incorrect displays can occur.
When you are driving with snow chains, it can
be beneficial to activate DTC briefly, refer to
page 97.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Under the hood
258
Under the hood
Never attempt to perform any service or
repair operations on your vehicle without
the required professional technical training. If
you do not know what repair procedures to fol-
low, have work on your vehicle done only by
your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a
workshop that works according to BMW repair
procedures with correspondingly trained per-
sonnel. If this work is not carried out properly,
there is a danger of subsequent damage and
related safety hazards.<
Hood
Releasing
Pull lever.
Opening
Press the release handle and open the hood.
Closing
Close the hood from a height of approx. 16 in/
40 cm with momentum. It must be clearly heard
to engage.
Make sure that the closing path of the
hood is clear, otherwise injuries may
result.
If you see any signs that the hood is not com-
pletely closed while driving your vehicle, you
should stop at once and close it securely.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Mobility
259
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Engine compartment
BMW X5
1 Filler neck for washer fluid of the headlamp
and windshield cleaning systems, refer to
page 75
2 Starting-aid terminal, refer to page 280
3 Expansion tank for coolant, refer to
page 262
4 Filler neck for engine oil, refer to Adding
engine oil on page 261
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Under the hood
260
BMW X6
1 Filler neck for washer fluid of the headlamp
and windshield cleaning systems, refer to
page 75
2 Filler neck for engine oil, refer to Adding
engine oil on page 261
3 Starting-aid terminal, refer to page 280
4 Expansion tank for coolant, refer to
page 262
Engine oil
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
driving style and driving conditions.
Checking engine oil level
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic oil
level check.
The condition for the most accurate indication
of the oil level possible is measurement with the
engine at operating temperature, i.e. following
an uninterrupted drive of at least 6 miles/10 km.
You can display the oil level while driving or
when stopped on a level surface with the engine
running.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Info sources" and press the control-
ler.
4. Select "Service Info" and press the control-
ler.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Mobility
261
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the
controller until "Service requirements" is
selected and press the controller.
6. Change to the second field from the top if
necessary. Turn the controller until "Engine
oil level" is selected and press the control-
ler. The oil level is displayed.
Possible messages
> "Engine oil level O.K."
> "No measurement available: Updating
engine oil level measurement...":
Engine oil level is being measured. This
process can take approx. 3 minutes when
stopped on a level surface and approx.
5 minutes while driving.
> "Oil level at the minimum! Refill with 1 quart
of engine oil.":
Add 1 US quart/liter of engine oil at the next
opportunity.
If the oil level displayed is below mini-
mum, add engine oil immediately.
Failure to do so may lead to engine dam-
age.<
> "Engine oil level too high":
Have the vehicle checked immedi-
ately, otherwise engine damage may
result if too much oil has been added.<
> "Please observe recalculated service inter-
val for engine oil":
Do not add engine oil. Before continuing to
drive, note the recalculated remaining mile-
age until the next oil change service, refer to
Service requirements on page 82. Have the
system checked as soon as possible.
Adding engine oil
BMW X5
BMW X6
Do not add 1 US quart/liter of oil until a corre-
sponding message is shown on the Control Dis-
play.
Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km,
otherwise the engine could be dam-
aged.<
Continuous exposure to used oil has
caused cancer in laboratory testing.
For this reason, any skin areas that come into
contact with oil should be thoroughly washed
with soap and water.
Keep oil, grease etc. out of reach of children and
observe the warnings on the containers to pre-
vent health risks.<
Oil change
Only have an oil change carried out by a BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a workshop
that works in accordance with BMW guidelines
and uses appropriately trained personnel.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Under the hood
262
Approved engine oils
The quality of the engine oil has critical signifi-
cance for the operation and service life of an
engine. BMW continuously approves specific
oils after confirming their suitability for use in its
vehicles with extensive testing.
Your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center
will be happy to answer detailed ques-
tions on approved oils.<
You can also call BMW of North America at
1-800-831-1117 or visit the website at
www.bmwusa.com to obtain this information.
Do not use oil additives, as these may
result in engine damage.<
Alternative oil types
If none of the approved oils is available, you can
also use other oils for adding small amounts
between oil changes. One of the following oil
specifications must be indicated on the pack-
aging:
Gasoline engines
> preferably: BMW Longlife-01,
BMW Longlife-01 FE, or
BMW Longlife-04
> alternatively: BMW Longlife-98, API SM
or higher
Diesel engines
> BMW Longlife-04
Viscosity grades
Viscosity is a measure of an oil's flow rating and
is specified in SAE grades.
The choice of the right SAE grade is based on
the climatic conditions in the region in which
you normally drive your BMW.
Approved oils belong to the SAE classifi-
cations 0W-40, 0W-30, 5W-40 and
5W-30.<
These oils can be used for driving at all outside
temperatures.
Coolant
Do not add coolant to the cooling system
when the engine is hot. Escaping coolant
can cause burns.<
Coolant is composed of equal parts water and a
coolant additive. Not all commercially available
additives are suitable for your BMW. Your BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center can recommend
suitable additives.
Only use suitable additives, otherwise
engine damage may result. The additives
present a health hazard; observe the instruc-
tions on the containers.<
Comply with the appropriate environ-
mental protection regulations when dis-
posing of coolant additives.<
Checking coolant level
1. Do not open the hood until the engine has
cooled down.
2. Turn the cap of the expansion tank counter-
clockwise to allow any accumulated pres-
sure to escape, then continue turning to
open.
3. The coolant level is correct when the cool-
ant level is between the MIN and MAX
marks, refer to the diagram adjacent to the
filler neck.
4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to
the specified level; do not overfill.
5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.
6. Have the reason for the coolant loss elimi-
nated as soon as possible.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Mobility
263
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Maintenance
BMW maintenance system
The BMW maintenance system supports the
preservation of the traffic and operating safety
of your BMW. The service schedule also
includes operations related to the vehicle's
comfort and convenience features, such as
replacement of the filters for the inside air.
The ultimate objective is to ensure economical
maintenance by providing the ideal service for
your vehicle.
Should the day come when you decide to sell
your BMW, a complete dealer service history
will prove to be an asset of inestimable value.
CBS Condition Based Service
Sensors and special algorithms take the differ-
ent driving conditions of your BMW into
account. Condition Based Service uses this to
determine the current and future service
requirements. By letting you define a service
and maintenance regimen that reflects your
own individual requirements, the system builds
the basis for trouble-free driving.
You can set the Control Display to show
remaining distances and times of selected
maintenance intervals and legally mandated
deadlines, refer to page 82:
> Engine oil
> Brake pads, front and rear separately
> Brake fluid
> Vehicle check
> Legally mandated inspections depending
on local regulations
Service data in remote control
Your vehicle stores the information required for
maintenance continuously in the remote con-
trol during driving. After accessing the data
stored in the remote control, your BMW Service
Advisor can suggest precisely the right array of
service procedures for your own individual vehi-
cle. You should therefore hand over the remote
control you last used to drive to the BMW Ser-
vice Advisor when you take your vehicle in for
service.
Make sure the date is set correctly, refer
to page 89, otherwise the effectiveness
of CBS Condition Based Service is not
ensured.<
Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models and
Warranty and Service Guide Booklet
for Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models
for additional information on service require-
ments.
BMW recommends that you have service
and repair operations performed at your
BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center.
Take the time to ensure that these service pro-
cedures are confirmed by entries in your vehi-
cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models and Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models. These entries
verify that your vehicle has received the speci-
fied regular maintenance.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Maintenance
264
Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnostics interface
Components which are decisive for the
exhaust-gas composition can be checked via
the OBD socket with a device.
This socket is located to the left on the driver's
side, on the underside of the instrument cluster
under a cover.
Exhaust-gas values
The warning lamp lights up:
The vehicle is producing an elevated
amount of exhaust emissions. Contin-
ued driving is possible. Have it checked at your
BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center as soon as
possible.
Display of the previously described
malfunction in Canadian models.
The lamp flashes under certain conditions. This
is a sign of excessive misfiring of the engine. In
this case, you should reduce your speed and
proceed to the nearest BMW Sports Activity
Vehicle Center. Heavy engine misfiring causes
serious damage to the emission-relevant com-
ponents, especially the catalytic converter,
within a short time.
If the fuel filler cap is not properly tight-
ened, the OBD system will assume that
fuel vapor escapes. Then a display lights up. If
the cap is then tightened, the display will go out
within a few days.<
Event Data Recorders
Your vehicle may be equipped with one or sev-
eral measuring and diagnosis modules, or with
a device for recording or transmitting certain
vehicle data or information. If you have also sub-
scribed to BMW Assist, certain vehicle data can
be transmitted or recorded to enable corre-
sponding services.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Mobility
265
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Care
Car-care products
For the cleaning and care of your vehicle, BMW
recommends using only products that BMW
has approved for this purpose.
Regular cleaning and care make a significant
contribution to retaining your BMW's value.
The BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center will be
happy to consult you on products and services
for the cleaning and care of your BMW.
Genuine BMW Care Products are materi-
als tested, laboratory tested, and tested in
actual use. They offer optimum care and pro-
tection for your vehicle.<
Do not use cleaners that contain alcohol
or solvents; they can damage your vehi-
cle.<
Cleaning agents can contain substances
that are dangerous or pose health risks.
You should therefore heed the warnings and
hazard indications on the packaging. Open the
doors or windows on your vehicle whenever
cleaning the interior. Make sure there is suffi-
cient ventilation in enclosed spaces. Use only
products that are formulated for vehicle clean-
ing.<
Exterior care
Washing your vehicle
In the winter months, it is especially
important to ensure that the vehicle is
washed on a regular basis. Otherwise, signifi-
cant soiling and road salt can cause damage to
the vehicle.<
After washing the vehicle, apply the
brakes briefly to dry them. Failure to do so
may lead to a reduction in braking efficiency and
also to corrosion of the brake rotors.<
Car washes
Give preference to cloth car washes.
Before driving into the car wash, make sure that
it is suitable for your BMW. Pay attention to the
following points:
> Dimensions of your vehicle, refer to
page 287.
> If necessary: fold in door mirror, refer to
page 57.
> Maximum permissible tire width.
Preparations for driving into the car wash:
> Deactivate rain sensor
* to prevent
unwanted wiper activation.
> BMW X5: deactivate rear window wiper and
protect it from damage. Take appropriate
protective measures; inquiring with the car
wash operator as needed.
> Remove additional add-on parts, e.g. spoil-
ers or phone antennas, if they could be
damaged.
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic
Before driving into the car wash, observe the
following so that the vehicle is able to roll:
1. Insert the remote control into the ignition
lock, even with comfort access.
2. Shift into transmission position N.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Deactivate Automatic Hold, refer to
page 68.
5. Switch off the engine.
6. Leave the remote control in the ignition lock
so that the vehicle can roll.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Care
266
Steam cleaners/high-pressure
cleaning jets
When using steam cleaners or high-pres-
sure cleaning jets, make sure to maintain
a sufficient distance and stay below a maximum
temperature of 1407/606.
Insufficient distance or excessive pressure or
temperature can damage parts of the vehicle or
can result in water penetration. Follow the oper-
ating instructions for the high-pressure clean-
ing jets.<
When using high-pressure cleaning jets,
do not remain in one place for a long time
and be sure to maintain a distance of at least
12 in/30 cm from sensors and cameras, e.g.
Park Distance Control sensors or rear view
camera.<
Hand washing
When washing the vehicle by hand, use plenty
of water and car washing shampoo. Clean the
vehicle with gentle pressure using a sponge or a
washing brush.
Before cleaning the windshield, deacti-
vate the rain sensor or switch off the igni-
tion to prevent unwanted wiper operation.<
Follow local guidelines for washing vehi-
cles by hand.<
Headlamps
Do not rub dry and never use abrasives or
strong solvents to clean the covers.
Loosen dirt, e.g. insects, with shampoo or
insect remover and wash away with plenty of
water.
Use a window de-icer to remove accumulated
ice and snow, not a scraper.
Windows
Use a glass cleaner to clean the inside and out-
side surfaces of the windows and the glass sur-
faces of the mirrors.
Do not use quartz-containing cleansers
to clean glass surfaces of the mirrors.<
Wiper blades
Clean with soapy water and replace regularly to
prevent streaking.
The presence of wax and sealant residues
and dirt on the windows leads to streaking
during wiper operation and results in premature
wear on wiper blades as well as interference
with the rain sensor.<
Caring for the vehicle finish
Regular care helps your vehicle retain its value
and protects the paint from the long-term
effects of aggressive substances.
Regionally occurring environmental factors can
affect and damage vehicle finish. It is therefore
important to tailor the frequency and extent of
your car care accordingly.
Immediately remove particularly aggressive
substances such as spilled fuel, oil, grease,
brake fluid, tree resin, or bird droppings; other-
wise, they may damage your paint.
Repairing paint damage
Repair stone damage or scratches imme-
diately, depending on the severity of the
damage, to prevent the formation of rust.<
BMW recommends having paint damage pro-
fessionally repaired using Genuine BMW finish
materials in accordance with factory guidelines.
Waxing
Sealant is required when water no longer beads
on the clean surface of the paint. Use only prod-
ucts that contain carnauba wax or synthetic wax
to seal your finish.
Rubber gaskets
Treat only with water or a rubber care product.
To avoid noise or damage, do not use
products that contain silicone to care for
rubber gaskets.<
Chrome components
Particularly after exposure to road salt, thor-
oughly cleanse parts like the radiator grille, door
handles, or window frames with plenty of water
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Mobility
267
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
with shampoo added to it. For additional treat-
ment, use chrome polish.
Alloy wheels
Depending on your system, braking can gener-
ate dust, which settles on the light-alloy wheels.
Remove this dust regularly with acid-free wheel
cleaner.
Do not use aggressive, acid-containing,
strongly alkaline, or coarse cleansers and
do not use steam cleaners at temperatures
greater than 1407/606; otherwise you may
damage your vehicle.<
Aluminum running boards
A rust film on the aluminum running boards can
be removed with a special cleaning agent.
Outside sensors/cameras
Keep the sensors and cameras outside
the vehicle, e.g. the Park Distance Control
or rear view camera, clean and free of ice to
ensure their full operability.<
Interior care
Upholstery materials/cloth-covered
paneling
Clean regularly with a vacuum cleaner in order
to remove surface dirt.
In the event of more serious soiling such as bev-
erage stains, use a soft sponge or a lint-free
microfiber cloth in combination with suitable
interior cleaners. Follow the instructions on the
packaging.
Clean upholstery material over a large
area extending out to the seams. Avoid
intense friction.<
Open Velcro fasteners on pants or other
items of clothing can cause damage to
the seat covering. Make sure that the Velcro
fasteners are closed.<
Leather/leather-covered paneling
The leather used by BMW is a high quality
natural product. Slight patterns in the
grain are part of the typical properties of a natu-
ral leather.<
Dust and dirt from the road chafe in pores and
folds and result in considerable wear and cause
the leather surface to become prematurely brit-
tle. We therefore suggest that you clean the
leather with a dust cloth or vacuum cleaner at
regular intervals.
Particularly with light-colored leather, make
sure to clean it regularly since it has a greater
tendency to become soiled.
Treat the leather twice a year with a leather
lotion since dirt and grease harm the protective
layer of the leather.
Carpets/cargo bay
Floor carpets and floor mats can be vacuumed
or cleaned with interior cleaner when they are
more heavily soiled.
Floor mats can be removed for cleaning. When
inserting into place, make sure that the seat
rails do not protrude over the floor mats; other-
wise floor mats can be damaged.
Fluff on new floor mats is a result of the produc-
tion process and can be removed by repeated
vacuuming.
Plastic components inside
> Vinyl upholstery surfaces
> Lamp lenses
> Cover glass of instrument cluster
> Matt parts
should be cleaned with water and, if necessary,
solvent-free plastic cleaner.
Fine wooden components
Use a damp cloth to clean fine wooden trim
panels and components. Follow up by drying
with a soft cloth.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Care
268
Safety belts
Do not use cleansers to clean the safety
belts since this can destroy the web-
bing.<
Inside sensors/cameras
Clean inside sensors and cameras, such as
those of the high-beam assistant, using a lint-
free cloth moistened with glass cleaner.
Displays
Clean displays like the radio or the instrument
cluster using a display-cleaning cloth or a soft,
nonabrasive lint-free cloth.
Avoid using excessive pressure when
cleaning displays; otherwise, you could
damage them.<
Never use chemical-based cleansers or
household scouring products. Keep all
liquids away from the equipment. Otherwise
surfaces or electrical components could be
attacked or damaged.<
CD/DVD-player
Do not use cleaning CDs; they can dam-
age parts of the player.<
Storing your vehicle
When storing your vehicle for longer than three
months, please seek the advice of your BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a workshop
that works in accordance with BMW guidelines.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Mobility
269
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Replacing components
Onboard toolkit
The onboard toolkit is located in the cargo bay
under the floor panel.
Replacing wiper blades
Front
1. Fold down the wiper arm.
2. Swing the wiper blade upward.
3. Remove the wiper blade toward the wind-
shield, refer to arrow.
BMW X5: rear
1. Lift off the wiper arm completely and pull off
the wiper blade, refer to arrow.
2. Mount the new wiper blade and press on
until it is heard to engage.
Lamps and bulbs
Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu-
tion to vehicle safety. You must be duly diligent
in replacing them. BMW recommends having
your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center per-
form any work that you do not feel competent to
perform yourself or that is not described here.
Never touch the glass of new bulbs with
your bare fingers, as even minute
amounts of contamination will burn into the
bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a
clean cloth, napkin, etc., or hold the bulb by its
metal socket.<
A replacement bulb set is available from your
BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center.
Only replace bulbs when cool, as other-
wise you may be burned.<
Whenever you perform any work on the
electrical system, turn off the systems/
consumers involved to prevent short circuits
from occurring. To avoid possible injury or
equipment damage when replacing bulbs,
observe any instructions provided by the bulb
manufacturer.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Replacing components
270
When performing care and maintenance on the
headlamps, please observe the information on
page 266.
For bulbs for which replacement is not
described and for checking and adjusting
headlamp aim, please contact your BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center.<
Light-emitting diodes LEDs
Light-emitting diodes installed behind translu-
cent lenses serve as the light source for many of
the controls and displays in your vehicle. These
light-emitting diodes, which operate using a
concept similar to that applied in conventional
lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 light-
emitting diodes.
Do not remove the covers, and never
stare into the unfiltered light for several
hours, as irritation of the retina could result.<
BMW X5: changing lamps
Xenon light
These bulbs have a very long service life and
the probability of a failure is very low. If one of
these bulbs should nevertheless fail, it is possi-
ble to continue driving with great caution using
the fog lamps, provided traffic laws in your area
do not prohibit this.
Have work on the xenon light unit includ-
ing changing the bulb carried out only by
your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a
workshop that works according to BMW repair
procedures with correspondingly trained per-
sonnel. Due to the high voltage present in the
system, there is a danger of fatal injuries when
work is carried out improperly.<
Halogen bulbs:
Parking lamps and roadside parking
lamps, daytime driving lamps
35-Watt bulb, H8
The bulb is pressurized. Therefore, wear
safety glasses and protective gloves.
Otherwise there is a danger of injuries if the
bulb is accidentally damaged during replace-
ment.<
1. Turn the cover to the left and remove.
2. Turn the bulbs to the left, pull off the con-
nector and replace.
3. Install in the reverse order.
Turn signals, front
24-Watt bulb, PY24W
1. Unscrew bulb holder with bulb to the left,
refer to arrow, and replace.
2. Install in the reverse order.
Side marker lamps, rear
To replace, please go to a BMW Sports Activity
Vehicle Center or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel.
Tail lamps
> Turn signals, brake lamps: 21-watt bulb,
P21W
> Backup lamps and brake force display: 16-
watt bulb, W16W
> Rear lamp: LED technology.
In case of a defect, please go to a BMW
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Mobility
271
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a work-
shop that works according to BMW repair
procedures with correspondingly trained
personnel.
Arrangement of tail lamps
1 Rear lamp
2 Brake force display
3 Turn signal
4 Brake lamp/rear lamp/side marker lamp
5 Backup lamp
6 Brake lamp
Brake lamp
1. Open the side panel in the cargo bay.
2. Remove the first-aid kit
* and warning trian-
gle
* if necessary. Fold up the insulation.
3. Rotate the relevant bulb socket to the left
and remove.
4. Remove the upper bulb for replacement.
Apply gentle pressure to the lower bulb
while turning it to the left for removal and
replacement.
5. Remount the side panel.
Turn signal
1. Open the side panel in the cargo bay.
2. Remove the first-aid kit
* and warning trian-
gle
* if necessary. Fold up the insulation.
3. Rotate the bulb socket to the left and
remove.
4. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and replace-
ment.
5. Remount the side panel.
Backup lamp
1. Open the side panel in the cargo bay.
2. Remove the first-aid kit
* and warning trian-
gle
* if necessary. Fold up the insulation.
3. Rotate the bulb socket to the left and
remove.
4. Remove the bulb for replacement.
5. Remount the side panel.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Replacing components
272
Brake force display
1. Carefully remove the cover in the liftgate
panel with a screwdriver.
2. Rotate the bulb socket to the left and
remove.
3. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and replace-
ment.
4. Insert the bulb socket in the liftgate and
engage it.
5. Before installing the cap, unclip the cargo
bay lamp.
Then lay the cap on its upper side and close
it, refer to arrow.
6. Position the cargo bay lamp and clip it in,
refer to arrow.
License plate lamp
5-watt bulb, C11 12W
1. Slide the lamp to the right with a screw-
driver, refer to arrow 1.
2. Remove the lamp, arrow 2.
3. Replace the bulb.
4. Reinstall the lamp.
Center brake lamp
This lamp uses LED technology for operation.
In case of a defect, please go to a BMW Sports
Activity Vehicle Center or a workshop that
works according to BMW repair procedures
with correspondingly trained personnel.
BMW X6: changing lamps
Xenon lamps
These bulbs have a very long service life and
the probability of a failure is very low. If one of
these bulbs should nevertheless fail, it is possi-
ble to continue driving with great caution using
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Mobility
273
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
the fog lamps, provided traffic laws in your area
do not prohibit this.
Have work on the xenon light unit includ-
ing changing the bulb carried out only by
your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a
workshop that works according to BMW repair
procedures with correspondingly trained per-
sonnel. Due to the high voltage present in the
system, there is a danger of fatal injuries when
work is carried out improperly.<
Parking lamps and roadside parking
lamps, daytime driving lamps
35-Watt bulb, H8
The bulb is pressurized. Therefore, wear
safety glasses and protective gloves.
Otherwise there is a danger of injuries if the
bulb is accidentally damaged during replace-
ment.<
1. Turn the cover to the left and remove.
2. Left side of vehicle:
Rotate the bulb holder to the right, refer to
arrow, and remove.
Right side of vehicle:
Rotate the bulb holder to the left and
remove.
3. Disconnect plug and replace bulb.
4. Install in the reverse order.
Side marker lamps
5-Watt bulb, WY5W XLL
1. Rotate the bulb holder to the left and
remove.
2. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder and
replace.
3. Install in the reverse order.
Turn signals, front
24-Watt bulb, PY24W
1. Rotate bulb holder to the left and remove it
along with the bulb.
2. Rotate the bulb to the right along with the
socket and replace.
3. Install in the reverse order.
Tail lamps
> Turn signal, backup lamps: 21-watt bulb,
H21W
> Brake lamps, brake force display: 21-watt
bulb, P21W
> Rear lamp: LED technology.
In case of a defect, please go to a BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a work-
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Replacing components
274
shop that works according to BMW repair
procedures with correspondingly trained
personnel.
Arrangement of tail lamps
1 Brake force display/rear lamps
2 Brake lamp/rear lamp
3 Backup lamp
4 Turn signal
Brake lamp
1. Open the side panel in the cargo bay.
2. Remove the first-aid kit
* and warning trian-
gle
* if necessary.
3. Rotate the relevant bulb socket to the left
and remove.
4. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and replace-
ment.
5. Install in the reverse order.
Turn signal
1. Open the side panel in the cargo bay.
2. Remove the first-aid kit
* and warning trian-
gle
* if necessary.
3. Remove bulb holder along with bulb and
replace.
4. Install in the reverse order.
Backup lamp
1. Open the side panel in the cargo bay.
2. Remove the first-aid kit
* and warning trian-
gle
* if necessary.
3. Remove bulb holder along with bulb and
replace.
4. Install in the reverse order.
Brake force display
1. Carefully remove the cover in the liftgate
panel with a screwdriver.
2. Rotate the bulb socket to the left and
remove.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Mobility
275
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
3. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and replace-
ment.
4. Insert the bulb socket in the liftgate and
engage it.
5. Replace the cover.
License plate lamp
5-Watt bulb, C5W
1. Slide the lamp to the right with a screw-
driver, refer to arrow 1.
2. Remove the lamp, arrow 2.
3. Replace the bulb.
4. Reinstall the lamp.
Center brake lamp
This lamp uses LED technology for operation.
In case of a defect, please go to a BMW Sports
Activity Vehicle Center or a workshop that
works according to BMW repair procedures
with correspondingly trained personnel.
Changing wheels
Your BMW is equipped with run-flat tires as
standard. As a result, it is not necessary to
change the wheel immediately in the case of air
loss in the event of a breakdown.
To continue driving with a damaged tire:
> With Flat Tire Monitor, refer to Indication of
a flat tire page 101
> With Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to Mes-
sage with low tire inflation pressure
page 103
You will recognize run-flat tires by a circular
symbol containing the letters RSC on the side
of the tire, refer to Run-flat tires, page 256.
When mounting new tires, or changing from
summer to winter tires or vice versa, use run-flat
tires for your own safety. No spare tire is avail-
able in case of a flat tire. Your BMW Sports
Activity Vehicle Center will be happy to advise
you. Also refer to New wheels and tires,
page 256.
BMW X6: do not rotate the front wheels to
the rear or vice versa, as otherwise the
handling characteristics will be negatively
affected.<
Suitable tools for changing tires are avail-
able as accessories at your BMW Sports
Activity Vehicle Center.<
Jacking points for vehicle jack
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are
located in the positions shown.
Compact wheel*
Safety precautions in the event of a flat
tire or wheel change: park the vehicle as
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Replacing components
276
far as possible from passing traffic and on solid
ground. Switch on the hazard warning flashers.
Set the parking brake and engage transmission
position P.
Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle
and ensure that they remain outside the imme-
diate area in a safe place, such as behind a
guardrail.
If a warning triangle
* or portable hazard warning
lamp
* is required, set it up on the roadside at an
appropriate distance from the rear of the vehi-
cle. Comply with all safety guidelines and regu-
lations.
Change the wheel only on a level, firm surface
which is not slippery. The vehicle or the jack
could slip to the side if you attempt to raise the
vehicle on a soft or slippery surface such as
snow, ice, tiles, etc.
Position the jack on a firm support surface.
Do not use a wooden block or similar object as a
support base for the jack, as this would prevent
it from extending to its full support height and
reduce its load-carrying capacity.
To avoid serious or fatal injury: never lie under
the vehicle, and never start the engine while it is
supported by the jack.<
What you will need
To avoid rattling noises later on, note the posi-
tions of the tools before removing them, then
return them to their initial positions after com-
pleting work.
The tools are located in the mount under the
floor panel flap.
1 Vehicle jack
*
2 Vehicle jack crank*
3 Lug wrench*
Removing compact wheel
The compact wheel is located in the cargo bay
under the floor panel.
1. Remove the tool mount.
2. Unscrew the wing nut 1.
3. Remove the washer 2 laterally.
4. Remove the compact wheel.
Preparing wheel change
1. Observe the safety precautions above.
2. Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
Jacking up vehicle
1. Position the vehicle jack at the jacking point
closest to the wheel so that the entire sur-
face of the jack base rests on the ground
perpendicularly beneath the jacking point.
The vehicle jack is designed for
changing wheels only. Do not attempt
to raise another vehicle model with it or to
raise any load of any kind. To do so could
cause accidents and personal injury.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Mobility
277
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
2. Guide the jack head into the rectangular
recess of the jacking point when cranking
up, refer to illustration detail.
3. Jack the vehicle up until the wheel you are
changing is raised from the ground.
Mounting a wheel
1. Unscrew the lug bolts and remove the
wheel.
2. Remove accumulations of mud or dirt from
the mounting surfaces of the wheel and
hub. Also clean the lug bolts.
3. Position the new wheel or compact wheel.
Secure the wheel by screwing at least two
lug bolts into opposite bolt holes.
When you mount wheels other than Genu-
ine BMW light-alloy wheels, different lug
bolts may also be required.
4. Screw in the remaining lug bolts. Tighten all
the bolts securely in a diagonal pattern.
5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack from
beneath the vehicle.
After mounting
1. Tighten the lug bolts in a diagonal pattern.
To ensure safety, always have the
lug bolts checked with a calibrated
torque wrench as soon as possible to
ensure that they are tightened to the speci-
fied torque. Otherwise, incorrectly tight-
ened lug bolts are a hidden safety risk. The
tightening torque is 101 lb ft/140 Nm.<
2. Stow the defective wheel in the cargo bay.
The defective wheel cannot be stored
under the floor panel flap due to its
size.<
3. Check and correct the tire inflation pressure
at the earliest opportunity.
Protect valve stems with valve screw
caps against dirt and contamination.
Dirt in valve stems is a frequent source of
gradual air loss.<
4. Initialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
page 100, or reset the Tire Pressure Moni-
tor, refer to page 102.
5. Replace the damaged tire as soon as possi-
ble and have the new wheel/tire balanced.
Driving with compact wheel
Drive reservedly and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Otherwise,
changes in the driving characteristics could
result, for example reduced track stability on
braking, extended braking distance, and altered
self-steering characteristics in the limit range.
In conjunction with winter tires, these charac-
teristics are more pronounced.<
Only one compact wheel may be
mounted. Restore the wheels and tires to
their original size as quickly as possible. Failure
to do so is a safety risk.<
Vehicle battery
Battery care
The battery is 100% maintenance-free, i.e., the
electrolyte will last for the life of the battery
when the vehicle is operated in a temperate cli-
mate. Your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center
will be glad to advise in all matters concerning
the battery.
Charging battery
Only charge the battery in the vehicle via the
terminals in the engine compartment with the
engine switched off. Connections, refer to
Jump starting on page 280.
Disposal
Have old batteries disposed of following
replacement at your BMW Sports Activity
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Replacing components
278
Vehicle Center or bring them to a collection
point. Maintain the battery in an upright position
for transport and storage. Always restrain the
battery to prevent it from tipping over during
transport.<
Power failure
Following a temporary power failure, e.g. due to
a discharged battery, the use of some equip-
ment will be restricted, requiring its reinitializa-
tion. In the same way, individual settings are lost
and must be updated again:
> Seat, mirror and steering wheel memory
The positions must be stored again, refer to
page 50.
> Time and Date
The values must be updated again, refer to
pages 88, 89.
> Radio
Radio stations must be stored again, refer
to page 180.
> Navigation system
You must wait until the system becomes
functional again, refer to page 170.
> Glass sunroof/panorama glass sunroof
It may only be possible to raise the glass
sunroof/panorama glass sunroof The sys-
tem must be initialized, refer to page 46.
> Digital compass
The system must be calibrated, refer to
page 126.
Before removing the vehicle from stor-
age, consult your BMW Sports Activity
Vehicle Center.<
Fuses
Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
do not replace a defective fuse with a sub-
stitute of another color or amperage rating, as
this could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately
resulting in a fire in the vehicle.<
Spare fuses, a pair of plastic tweezers and infor-
mation on the fuse assignment are located near
the fuses in the cargo bay.
In interior
The fuses are located in the front passenger
footwell on the underside of the instrument
cluster.
1. Unscrew screws, refer to arrows, of footwell
trim panel.
2. Lay the trim panel in the footwell.
3. Unscrew the screw, arrow 1, and fold down
the fuse carrier, arrow 2.
4. Replace the fuse concerned.
5. Installation is carried out in the reverse
order of removal. Ensure correct and secure
attachment of the footwell trim panel in the
process.
In cargo bay
Open the right-hand side panel in the cargo
bay.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Mobility
279
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Giving and receiving assistance
Emergency request
Conditions for an emergency request:
> Full preparation package mobile phone.
With this equipment, an emergency request
is still possible when no mobile phone is
paired in the vehicle.
> BMW Assist is activated.
Activating BMW Assist, refer to page 240.
> Radio readiness is switched on.
> The BMW Assist system is logged in on a
wireless communications network.
> The emergency request system is opera-
ble.
When the contract of participation with BMW
Assist expires, the BMW Assist system can be
deactivated by a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle
Center without having to visit a workshop. Once
the BMW Assist system has been deactivated,
emergency requests are not possible. The
BMW Assist system be reactivated by a BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center after signing a
new contract.
Initiating an emergency request
1. Briefly press protective cover to open.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
arrangement of the switches and indicator
lamps may differ somewhat.
2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the
button lights up.
As soon as the voice connection to the BMW
Assist Response Center has been established,
the LED flashes.
When the emergency request is received at the
BMW Assist Response Center, the BMW Assist
Response Center contacts you and takes fur-
ther steps to help you. Even if you are unable to
answer, the BMW Assist Response Center can
take further steps to help you under certain
conditions.
If conditions allow, remain in the vehicle until
the connection has been established. You will
then be able to provide a detailed description of
the situation.
Information for determining the required rescue
measures is transmitted to the BMW Assist
Response Center, e.g. the current position of
your vehicle, if this can be determined.
If the LED flashes, but you are unable to hear
the BMW Assist Response Center through the
hands-free system, this could indicate, for
instance, that the hands-free system is no
longer operational. The BMW Assist Response
Center may still be able to hear you, however.
Under certain conditions, an emergency
request is automatically initiated immediately
after a severe accident. An automatic collision
notification is not affected by the button being
pressed.
For technical reasons, the emergency
request cannot be guaranteed under
unfavorable conditions.<
Warning triangle*
The warning triangle is located in the cargo bay.
First-aid kit*
Some of the articles contained in the first-aid kit
have a limited service life. Therefore, check the
expiration dates of the contents regularly and
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Giving and receiving assistance
280
replace the contents concerned in good time if
necessary.
BMW X5
BMW X6
The first aid kit is stored in the cargo bay,
behind the left side panel.
Roadside Assistance*
The BMW Roadside Assistance offers you
assistance in the event of a breakdown around
the clock, including on weekends and public
holidays.
The phone numbers of the Roadside Assis-
tance in your home country can be found in the
Contact brochure.
With BMW Assist or BMW TeleServices, you
can contact BMW Roadside Assistance for
assistance in the event of a breakdown directly
via iDrive, refer to page 236.
Jump starting
When your battery is discharged, you can use
two jumper cables to start your BMW with
power from the battery in a second vehicle. You
can also use the same method to help start
another vehicle. Use only jumper cables with
fully-insulated clamp handles.
To avoid the risk of potentially fatal injury,
always avoid all contact with electrical
components while the engine is running. Care-
fully adhere to the following sequence, both to
prevent damage to one or both vehicles, and to
guard against possible personal injuries.<
Preparation
1. Check whether the battery of the other
vehicle has a voltage of 12 Volts and
approximately the same capacitance in Ah.
This information can be found on the bat-
tery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi-
cle.
3. Switch off any electrical systems and com-
ponents in both vehicles.
There must not be any contact between
the bodies of the two vehicles, otherwise
there is a danger of shorting.<
Connecting jumper cables
To avoid personal injury from sparks, fol-
low this sequence when connecting
jumper cables.<
On your BMW the so-called starting-aid termi-
nal in the engine compartment acts as the bat-
tery positive terminal, also refer to the engine
compartment overview on page 259. The cover
cap is marked with +.
1. Fold open the cover of the BMW starting-
aid terminal. To do so, pull the tab.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Mobility
281
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
2. Attach one end of the jumper cable plus/+
to the positive terminal of the battery or a
starting-aid terminal of the vehicle provid-
ing assistance.
3. Attach the second end of the cable to the
positive terminal of the battery or to a start-
ing-aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one end of the jumper cable minus/–
to the negative terminal of the battery or to
an engine or body ground of the assisting
vehicle.
Your BMW has a special nut as body ground
or negative pole.
5. Attach the second end of the cable to the
negative terminal of the battery or to the
engine or body ground of the vehicle to be
started.
Starting engine
1. Start the engine on the assisting vehicle
and allow it to run at idle for several minutes
at slightly increased speed.
2. Start the engine on the other vehicle in the
usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before another attempt
in order to allow the discharged battery to
recharge.
3. Let the engines run for a few minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables by reversing
the connection sequence.
Check the battery and recharge if necessary.
Never use spray fluids to start the
engine.<
Tow-starting and towing
Observe applicable laws and regulations
for tow-starting and towing.<
Do not transport any passengers other
than the driver in a vehicle that is being
towed.<
Using tow fitting
The screw-on tow-fitting must always be car-
ried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the
front or rear of the BMW.
It is located in the toolkit under the floor panel
flap in the cargo bay, refer to page 269.
Use only the tow fitting provided with the
vehicle and screw it all the way in. Use the
tow fitting for towing only on roads. Avoid lateral
loading of the tow fitting, e.g. do not lift the vehi-
cle by the tow fitting. Otherwise damage to the
tow fitting and the vehicle can occur.<
Access to screw thread
Cover panel on left and right side of bumper:
press on the arrow symbol on the cover panel.
Front
Rear
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Giving and receiving assistance
282
Being towed
Make sure that the ignition is switched on,
refer to page 65, otherwise the low
beams, tail lamps, turn signals and windshield
wipers would not be available. When the engine
is stopped, there is no power assist. This then
requires increased effort for braking and steer-
ing. Active steering is deactivated and larger
steering wheel movements are required.<
Switch on the hazard warning flashers depend-
ing on the local regulations. If the electrical sys-
tem fails, mark the vehicle to be towed, e.g. with
a sign or warning triangle in the rear window.
Before towing, manually unlock the trans-
mission lock, refer to page 72; failure to
do so can result in damage to the transmis-
sion.<
Do not exceed a towing speed of 45 mph/
70 km/h and a towing distance of
90 miles/150 km, otherwise the automatic
transmission may be damaged.<
Towing methods
Do not lift vehicle by tow fitting or body
and chassis parts, otherwise damage may
result.<
In some countries, towing with tow bars or
ropes in public traffic is not permitted. Familiar-
ize yourself with the regulations on towing in the
respective country.
With tow bar
The towing vehicle may not be lighter
than the vehicle to be towed, otherwise it
will not be possible to reliably control vehicle
response.<
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossi-
ble to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset
angle, observe the following:
> Clearance and maneuvering capability will
be sharply limited during cornering.
> When mounted at an angle, the tow bar will
exert lateral forces, tending to push the
vehicle sideways.
Only attach the tow bar to the tow fittings,
as attachment to other vehicle parts can
lead to damage.<
With tow rope
When starting off in the towing vehicle, make
sure that the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated
stresses on vehicle components when
towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Only attach tow ropes to the tow fittings, as
attachment to other vehicle parts can lead to
damage.<
With tow truck
Do not tow your BMW with the front or
rear axle raised individually; otherwise,
the wheels may lock and the transfer case may
be damaged.<
Have the BMW transported only on a flatbed
surface.
Tow-starting
The engine cannot be started by tow-starting.
Start the engine by jump starting it, refer to
page 280.
Have the cause of the starting difficulties elimi-
nated.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Reference
This chapter contains the technical data,
the short commands of the voice activation
system, and the index that will direct you
as quickly as possible to the information
you are looking for.
Reference
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Technical data
286
Technical data
Engine data
BMW X5 X5 xDrive30i X5 xDrive48i X5 xDrive35d
Displacement cu in/cmμ 182.8/2,996 292.9/4,799 182.6/2,993
No. of cylinders 6 8 6
Maximum output hp 260 350 265
at engine speed rpm 6,600 6,300 4,200
Maximum torque lb ft/Nm 225/305 350/475 425/580
at engine speed rpm 2,750 3,400-3,800 1,750-2,250
BMW X6 X6 xDrive35i X6 xDrive50i
Displacement cu in/cmμ 181.8/2,979 268.2/4,395
No. of cylinders 6 8
Maximum output hp 300 400
at engine speed rpm 5,800-6,250 5,500-6,400
Maximum torque lb ft/Nm 300/407 450/610
at engine speed rpm 1,400-5,000 1,800-4,500
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Reference
287
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Dimensions
BMW X5
All dimensions given in inches/mm.
Smallest turning circle diam.: 42.0 ft/12.8 m
With mixed tires
* the vehicle width may exceed the specified dimension.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Technical data
288
BMW X6
All dimensions given in inches/mm.
Smallest turning circle diam.: 42.0 ft/12.8 m
Height with roof rack
*: 66.9 in/1,699 mm
With mixed tires
* the vehicle width may exceed the specified dimension.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Reference
289
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Weights
Never exceed either the approved axle loads or
the gross vehicle weight.
Never exceed either the approved axle loads or
the gross vehicle weight.
BMW X5 X5 xDrive30i X5 xDrive48i X5 xDrive35d
Approved gross vehicle weight
without 3rd row seats
lbs./kg
lbs./kg
6,327/2,870
6,008/2,725
6,537/2,965
6,173/2,800
6,614/3,000
6,294/2,855
Load
without 3rd row seats
lbs./kg
lbs./kg
1,290/585
1,102/500
1,290/585
1,102/500
1,290/585
1,102/500
Approved front axle weight
without 3rd row seats
lbs./kg
lbs./kg
2,767/1,255
2,778/1,260
3,020/1,370
3,020/1,370
3,064/1,390
3,064/1,390
Approved rear axle weight
without 3rd row seats
lbs./kg
lbs./kg
3,803/1,725
3,395/1,540
3,869/1,755
3,395/1,540
3,858/1,750
3,395/1,540
Approved roof load capacity lbs./kg 220/100 220/100 220/100
Cargo bay capacity cu ft/l 21.9-61.8/
620-1,750
21.9-61.8/
620-1,750
21.9-61.8/
620-1,750
BMW X6 X6 xDrive35i X6 xDrive50i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs./kg 6,085/2,760 6,294/2,855
Load lbs./kg 937/425 937/425
Approved front axle weight lbs./kg 2,910/1,320 3,175/1,440
Approved rear axle weight lbs./kg 3,241/1,470 3,219/1,460
Approved roof load capacity lbs./kg 220/100 220/100
Cargo bay capacity cu ft/l 25.6-59.7/
570-1,450
25.6-59.7/
570-1,450
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Technical data
290
Capacities
BMW X5 Notes
Fuel tank US gal/liters approx. 22.5/85 Fuel grade: page 245
of that reserve
X5 xDrive30i, X5 xDrive35d
X5 xDrive48i
US gal/liters
US gal/liters
approx. 2.1/8
approx. 2.6/10
Windshield washer
with headlamp washer system US quarts/liters approx. 6.9/6.5
For more details: page 75
BMW X6 Notes
Fuel tank US gal/liters approx. 22.5/85 Fuel grade: page 245
of that reserve
X6 xDrive35i
X6 xDrive50i
US gal/liters
US gal/liters
approx. 2.1/8
approx. 3.2/12
Windshield washer
with headlamp washer system US quarts/liters approx. 6.9/6.5
For more details: page 75
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Reference
291
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Short commands of voice activation
system
With short commands you can carry out certain
functions directly, regardless of which menu
item is selected. Here are the important short
commands for the voice activation system.
Assistance window
Communication
*
Function Command
To open assistance window 20 {Assistance window}
To select display in assistance window 20 {Assistance window map facing north},
{Assistance window map direction of travel},
{Assistance window arrow display},
{Assistance window perspective},
{Assistance window current position},
{Assistance window trip computer} or
{Assistance window onboard info}
To change scale in assistance window 164 {Assistance window scale ... feet} or
{Assistance window scale ... miles}
Function Command
To open phone 221 {Phone}
To dial phone number 227 {Dial number}
To display phone book 228 {A to Z}
To select from the phone book 228 {Call ...} or
{Dial name}
To display "Top 8" 229 {Top 8}
To redial 228 {Redial}
To display "Received calls" 229 {Received calls}
To display "Missed calls" 229 {Missed calls}
To display "Bluetooth" 224 {Bluetooth}
To open "BMW Service" 236 {BMW Service}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Short commands of voice activation system
292
Navigation
Onboard info
Function Command
To open navigation system 150 {Navigation}
To open "Enter address" 151 {Enter address}
To open "New destination" 151 {New destination}
To display "Input map" 155 {Input map}
To display destination list 157 {Destination list}
To display address book 158 {Address book}
To display route criteria 160 {Route preference}
To start destination guidance 162 {Start guidance}
To end destination guidance 162 {Stop guidance}
To display arrow display 163 {Arrow display}
To display map display 164 {Map}, {Map facing north},
{Map direction of travel} or
{Perspective}
To change scale 164 {Scale ... miles} or
{Scale ... feet}
To display roads or towns/cities along route 164 {Route list}
To switch on voice instructions 165 {Navigation info on}
To switch off voice instructions 165 {Navigation info off}
To repeat voice instructions 165 {Repeat navigation info}
To open route 160, 164 {Ro
ute menu}
To open "New route" 166 {New route}
To display current position 169 {Current position}
Function Command
To open "Car Data" 80 {Car data}
To display computer 80 {Onboard info}
To display trip computer 81 {Trip computer}
To open stopwatch 87 {Stopwatch}
To open speed limit 87 {Limit}
To activate speed limit 87 {Limit on}
To deactivate speed limit 87 {Limit off}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Reference
293
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Entertainment
Function Command
Tone control 175 {Audio}
To switch on radio 178 {Radio on},
{FM} or
{AM}
To open "FM" 178 {FM menu}
To open "AM" 178 {AM menu}
To open "All stations" 178 {FM All stations}
To select radio station 178 {Station ...}, e.g. {Station WNYC} or
{Choose station}
To open "Presets" 178 {FM presets} or
{AM presets}
To select stored radio station 178 {Preset ...}, e.g. {Preset 1}
To open "Manual" 179 {FM manual},
{AM manual} or
{Choose frequency},
{Frequency ... Megahertz}
To open strongest radio stations 179 {AM Autostore}
To open "WB" 183 {Weatherband menu}
To switch on weatherband 183 {Weatherband on}
To select a weatherband station 183 {Choose weatherband station}
To open "SAT" 184 {SAT radio
menu}
To switch on satellite radio 184 {SAT radio}
To open "Presets" of satellite radio 185 {SAT radio presets}
To open "All channels" of satellite radio 185 {SAT radio all channels}
To open "Categories" of satellite radio 185 {SAT radio categories}
To open CD player 187 {CD menu}
To switch on CD player 187 {CD}
To open CD changer 187 {CD-changer menu}
To switch on CD changer 187 {CD-changer}
To select CD 187 {CD 1...6}
To select music track 188 {CD track ...}
To select CD and music track 188 {CD 1...6 track ...}
To switch on audio playback with external audio
device 200
{Audio Aux}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Short commands of voice activation system
294
Climate
menu
Function Command
To adjust temperature distribution for front seat
heating 56
{Seat heater distribution}
To open "Vent settings" 117 {Vent settings}
To open "Automatic programs" 115 {Automatic programs}
To open "Parked car ventilation" 121 {Parked car operation}
To open "Automatic ventilation" 121 {Automatic ventilation}
To display activation times 122 {Activation time}
Function Command
To open the menu {Settings menu}
"Display off" 21 {Display off}
To open "Info sources" {Info sources}
To open "Settings" {Settings}
To open "Door locks" 29 {Door locks}
To open "Steering wheel buttons" 59 {Steering wheel buttons}
To open "Lighting" 73 {Lighting}
To open "Service requirements" 82 {Service requirements}
To open "Service" 82 {Service}
To open "BMW Service" 236 {BMW service settings}
To display "Check Control messages" 86 {Check Control messages}
To open "Head-Up Display" 107 {Head-up display}
To set brightness of Control Display 89 {Brightness}
To open "Units" 89 {Units}
To open "Language" 90, 165 {Language}
To open "Time" 89 {Time}
To open "Date" 89 {Date}
To open "PDC" 91 {PDC}
To open "FTM" 100 {FTM}
To open "TPM" 102 {TPM}
To display "Bluetooth" 225 {B
luetooth}
To open "HDC" 98 {HDC}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
296
Everything from A to Z
Index
"..." Identifies Control Display
texts used to select
individual functions, and
indicates where to find them
in the text.
A
ABS Antilock Brake
System 96
Accessories 6
Access to 3rd row seats 54
Acoustic signal, refer to Check
Control 85
Activated-charcoal filter 119
"Activation time" for parked-
car ventilation 122
Active seat 57
Active seat ventilation 56
Active steering 104
– malfunction 104
– warning lamp 104
Adaptive brake lamp, brake
force display 105
Adaptive Drive 99
Adaptive fixing system 133
Adaptive Head Light 112
"Add digits" for mobile
phone 228
Address for navigation
– deleting 159
– entering 151, 158
– selecting 159
– storing 158
– storing current position 158
"Add to destination list" 153
Adjusting confirmation signals
for locking and unlocking 31
Adjusting opening
height 34, 36, 37
Adjusting temperature with
expanded-scope automatic
climate control 116
Adjusting the tone during
audio operation, refer to
Tone control 175
Adjusting thigh
support 49, 50
"After door opened" 51
"After unlocking" 51
Airbags 105
– sitting safely 48
– warning lamp 107
Air distribution
– automatic 115, 120
– manual 116
Airing, refer to Ventilation 118
Air recirculation 117
– AUC Automatic
recirculated-air control 117
– recirculated-air mode 117
"Air recirculation on / off" 59
Air vents 11
4
– refer to Ventilation 118
Air vents of automatic climate
control 114
Air volume 116, 120
AKI, refer to Fuel
specifications 245
Alarm system 38
– avoiding unintentional
alarms 39
– interior motion sensor 39
– switching off alarm 38
– switching off tilt alarm
sensor and interior motion
sensor 39
– tilt alarm sensor 39
"All channels" in Satellite
radio 185
"All doors" 30
Alloy wheels 267
All-season tires, refer to
Winter tires 257
"All stations" displaying in
radio mode, 178
All-wheel drive, refer to
xDrive 97
Alterations, technical, refer to
For your own safety 5
"AM", reception
range 175, 178
"Angle of view"
– DVD changer 197
– DVD system in rear 209
Antenna for mobile phone 220
Antifreeze
– coolant 262
– washer fluid 75
Antilock Brake System
ABS 96
Anti-theft system
– refer to Alarm system 38
– refer to Central locking
system 29
Approved axle weights, refer
to Weights 289
Approved engine oils 262
Approved gross vehicle
weight, refer to Weights 289
Armrest, refer to Center
armrest, front 127
Around the center console 14
Around the steering wheel 10
Arrival time
– refer to Computer 80
– refer to Starting destination
guidance 162
"Arrow display" in
navigation 163
"Arrow display pop-up
instructions" 149
Arrow view for navigation
system 163
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Reference
297
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Ashtray
– front 128
– rear 129
Assist 235
– refer to separate operating
instructions
Assistance systems, refer to
Driving stability control
systems 96
Assistance window 20
"Assist profile" 241
"Assist. window off" 21
AUC Automatic recirculated-
air control 117
"Audio" 177, 181
– for DVD system in rear 216
Audio 174
– controls 174
– switching on/off 174
– tone control 175
– volume 175
Audio CD for DVD system in
rear 210
Audio device, external 127
Automatic
– air distribution 115, 120
– air volume 115, 120
– BMW Teleservice call 237
– headlamp control 110
– liftgate operation 34, 37
– steering wheel adjustment,
refer to Easy entry/exit 58
– storing stations 179
Automatic car washes 140
Automatic climate control
– automatic air
distribution 115, 120
– in rear 119
– in rear, activating on Control
Display 120
– switching off 118, 120
– ventilation in rear 119
– with 2-zone control 115
– with 4-zone control 119
Automatic closing of doors,
refer to Automatic soft
closing 33
Automatic curb monitor 58
Automatic garage door
opener 123
Automatic Hold 67
– activating 68
– deactivating 68
– parking 68
Auto
matic lighting
– refer to Automatic headlamp
control 110
– refer to Daytime driving
lamps 111
– refer to Interior lamps 113
– refer to Pathway lighting 111
"Automatic programs" 116
Automatic recirculated-air
control AUC 117
Automatic soft closing 33
Automatic station search 179
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic 70
– deactivating selector lever
interlock 71
– kick-down 71
– manually releasing
transmission lock 72
– tow-starting 282
– with comfort access 40
"Automatic ventilation" 121
AUTO program for automatic
climate control 115, 120
"Auto Request" 237
"Autostore"
– on the radio 180
"AUX" 175, 200, 202
– AUX-In connection 200
– for DVD system in rear 215
– USB audio interface 201
"AUX / Rear" 206
AUX-In connection 127, 200
Average fuel consumption 80
– setting units 89
Average speed, refer to
Computer 80
"Avoid ferries" in
navigation 161
"Avoid highways" in
navigation 160
Avoiding highways for
navigation 160
Avoiding unintentional
alarms 39
"Avoid tollroads" in
navigation 161
Axle weights, refer to
Weights 289
"A - Z" 228
B
Backrest contour, refer to
Lumbar support 50
Backrests, refer to Seats 49
Backrest width adjustment 50
Backup lamps, replacing
bulbs 270, 273
Balance, refer to Tone
control 176
"Balance" for DVD system in
rear 209
Band-aids, refer to First-aid
kit 279
Bass, refer to Tone
control 175
Battery
– charging 277
– jump starting 280
– power failure 278
– refer to Vehicle battery 277
Battery disposal
– remote control with comfort
access 41
– vehicle battery 277
Battery replacement
– remote control for DVD
system in rear 206
– remote control with comfort
access 41
Being towed 282
Belts, refer to Safety belts 54
Beverage holder, refer to Cup
holders 127
Blower, refer to Air
volume 116, 120
BMW Advanced Diesel 245
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
298
"BMW
Assist" 236, 237, 238, 239
BMW Assist
– activating 240
– concierge service 239
– contacting BMW Customer
Relations 238
– offered services 235
– roadside assistance 236
– TeleServices 237
"BMW Contact" 230
"BMW Contact
Numbers" 230
BMW homepage 4
BMW maintenance
system 263
"BMW Service settings" 241
BMW Teleservice call
– automatic 237
– manual 237
BMW TeleServices 237
BMW TeleServices services
– displaying 238
– updating 238
BMW website 4
Bottle holder, refer to Cup
holders 127
Brake assistant 96
Brake force display 105
Brake lamps
– brake force display 105
– replacing bulbs 270, 273
Brake rotors 140
Brakes
– ABS Antilock Brake
System 96
– brake assistant 96
– brake force display 105
– breaking-in 138
– CBC Cornering Brake
Control 96
– electronic brake-force
distribution 96
– parking brake 67
– refer to Braking safely 140
– warning lamp 13
Brake system 138
– brake pads 138
– breaking-in 138
– disk brakes 140
Braking safely 140
Breakdown, Flat Tire
Monitor 100
Breakdown services, refer to
Roadside Assistance
280
Breaking-in brake pads 138
Breaking-in d
ifferential 138
Break-in period 138
"Brightness" 89
– DVD changer 196
– DVD system in rear 208
Brightness
– of Control Display 89
– of the rear view camera 95
– on Head-Up Display 108
"Brightness / Position" 108
Button for starting engine 65
Buttons on steering wheel 11
Bypassing traffic
congestion 169
C
Calibrating driver's seat 55
California Proposition 65
Warning 6
"Call" 228, 239
Call
– accepting 226
– displaying accepted 229
– ending 227
– in absence 229
– starting 227
Calling
– from phone book 228
– from Top 8 list 229
– redialing 229
– refer to telephone operating
instructions
Camera, refer to Rear view
camera 93
"Camera picture and PDC" 95
"Camera view
– full screen" 95
– main window" 95
Can holder, refer to Cup
holders 127
Capacities 290
Capacity of cargo bay 289
Car battery, refer to Vehicle
battery 277
"Car Data" 81
Care 265
– car-care products 265
– carpets 267
– car washes 265
– CD/DVD-player 268
– chrome components 266
– displays 268
– exterior 265
– fine wooden
components 267
– hand washing 266
– headlamps 266
– high-pressure cleaning
jets 266
– interior 267
– leather 267
– light-alloy wheels 267
– paint 266
– plastic components 267
– rubber gaskets 266
– running boards 267
– safety belts 268
– sensors and
cameras 267, 268
– upholstery materials and
cloth-covered paneling 267
– windows 266
–
wiper blades 266
Cargo
– refer to Loading 141
– securing 143
– securing with ski bag 134
Cargo area, refer to Cargo
bay 130
Cargo area cover, refer to Roll-
up cover 130
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Reference
299
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Cargo bay
– capacity 289
– emergency operation, refer
to Opening manually 33, 36
– expanding 132
– opening/closing, refer to
Liftgate 33, 35
– opening/closing, refer to
Tailgate 35
– opening from inside 33, 36
– opening from outside 33, 36
– opening with remote
control 30
Cargo bay cover, refer to Roll-
up cover 130
Caring for the vehicle
finish 266
Car key, refer to Keys/remote
control 28
Car phone 220
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest, front 127
– refer to Mobile phone 220
– refer to separate operating
instructions
Car radio, refer to Radio 178
Car wash 140, 265
– before driving in 66
– with comfort access 41
Catalytic converter, refer to
Hot exhaust system 139
"Categories" in Satellite
radio 185
CBC Cornering Brake
Control 96
CBS Condition Based
Service 263
"CD" 175, 187
– for DVD system in rear 206
CD, refer to Playing audio
tracks, DVD system in
rear 210
CD/DVD player, DVD system
in rear 205
CD changer 187
– compressed audio files 187
– controls 174
– fast forward/reverse 190
– random sequence 190
– repeating a track 189
– sampling tracks 189
– selecting a CD 187
– selecting a track 188
– switching on/off
174
– ton
e control 175
– volume 175
CD player 187
– compressed audio files 187
– controls 174
– fast forward/reverse 190
– random sequence 190
– repeating a track 189
– sampling tracks 189
– selecting a track 188
– switching on/off 174
– tone control 175
– volume 175
Cell phone
– refer to Mobile phone
Center armrest
– front 127
– rear 130
Center brake lamp 272, 275
Center console 14
Central locking system 29
– comfort access 39
– from inside vehicle 32
Changes, technical
– refer to For your own
safety 5
– refer to Parts and
accessories 6
Changing gears using shift
paddles 71
Changing language on
Control Display 90
Changing tires 256
Changing units of measure on
Control Display 89
Changing wheels 275
Check Control 85
"Check Control
messages" 86
Checking the air pressure,
refer to Tire inflation
pressure 249
Children, transporting 61
Child restraint devices 61
Child restraint fixing system
LATCH 62
Child restraint systems 61
Child-safety locks 64
Child seats 61
Chime, refer to Check
Control 85
Cigarette lighter, refer to
Lighter 129
Cleaning your BMW, refer to
Care 265
"Climate" 56
Clock 78
– 12h/24h mode
89
– setting tim
e 88
Closing
– from inside 32
– using remote control 29
Closing fuel filler cap 244
Clothes hooks 127
Cockpit 10
Cold start, refer to Starting
engine 66
"Color" in DVD system in
rear 208
Comfort access 39
– observe in car wash 41
– replacing battery 41
Comfort area, refer to Around
the center console 14
Comfort start, refer to Starting
engine 66
"Communication"
226, 236, 237, 238, 239
Compact Disc
– refer to CD changer 187
– refer to CD player 187
Compact wheel
– inflation pressure 251
– wheel change 275
Compartment for remote
control, refer to Ignition
lock 65
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
300
Compartments, refer to
Storage compartments 127
Compass, digital 124
Computer 80
– displays in instrument
panel 80
– displays on Control
Display 80
– trip computer 81
"Concierge" 239
Concierge service 239
Condition Based Service
CBS 263
"Confirmation" 31
Connecting car vacuum
cleaner, refer to Connecting
electrical devices 129
Connecting headphones 205
Consumption, refer to
Average fuel
consumption 80
Consumption indicator,
energy control 79
Consumption statistics, refer
to Average fuel
consumption 80
"Contrast"
– DVD changer 196
– DVD system in rear 208
Control Center, refer to
iDrive 16
Control Display, refer to
iDrive 16
– setting brightness 89
Controller, refer to iDrive 16
Controls
– DVD changer 193
– DVD system in rear 204
– refer to Cockpit 10
Convenience operation
– glass sunroof 30, 32
– glass sunroof with comfort
access 40
– windows 30, 32
– windows with comfort
access 40
– with comfort access 40
Coolant 262
– checking level 262
– temperature 79
Cooling, maximum 117
Cornering Brake Control
CBC 96
Courtesy lamps, refer to
Interior lamps 113
Cradle for telephone or mobile
phone 127
Cruise control 75
Cruising range 80
Cup holders
127
Curb weight, refer to
Wei
ghts 289
"Current position" 169
Current position
– displaying 169
– entering 158
– storing 158
"Customer
Relations" 230, 238
Cylinders, refer to Engine
data 286
D
Data 286
– capacities 290
– dimensions 287
– engine 286
– technical data 286
– weights 289
"Date" 89
Date 78
– display format 89
– retrieving 78
– setting 89
"Date format" 89
Daytime driving lamps 111
"Deactivated" 51
Defrosting windows 116
Defrosting windows and
removing condensation 116
Defrost position, refer to
Defrosting windows 116
"Delete all numbers" on the
mobile phone 229
"Delete data" for
navigation 159
"Delete" for mobile
phone 229
Destination address
– deleting 159
– entering 151, 153
Destination for navigation
– destination list 157
– entering 150
– selecting from address
book 159
– selecting using
information 156
– selecting using voice 153
– storing 158
Destination guidance 162
– canceling voice
instructions 60
– changing specified
route 160
– displaying route 163
– distance and arrival 162
– ending/continuing 162
– starting 162
– voice instructions 165
– volume of voice
instructions 166
Destination list for navigation
system 157
Destinations recently driven
to 157
"Details"
– DVD system in the rear 212
– in audio mode 202
"Dial" for mobile phone 227
"Dial number"
227
"
Diamond button" 59
Diesel exhaust fluid
– at low temperatures 246
– at minimum 246
– refilling yourself 247
Diesel particulate filter 139
Digital clock 78
Digital compass 124
Digital radio, refer to High
Definition Radio 181
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Reference
301
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Digital Versatile Disc, refer to
– DVD changer 193
– Player for navigation
DVD 174
Dimensions 287
Directional indicators, refer to
Turn signals 73
Direction announcements,
refer to Voice
instructions 165
Direction instructions, refer to
Voice instructions 165
Directory for navigation, refer
to Address book 158
Displacement, refer to Engine
data 286
Display, refer to iDrive 16
Displaying images 212
Display lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 113
"Display off" 21
Displays, refer to Instrument
panel 12
"Display settings" 89, 107
Displays on the windshield,
refer to Head-Up
Display 107
Disposal
– battery of remote control
with comfort access 41
– remote control battery 206
– vehicle battery 277
Distance, refer to
Computer 80
"Distance to dest." 81
Distance to destination, refer
to Computer 80
Distance warning, refer to
PDC Park Distance
Control 91
Door entry lighting 113
Door key, refer to Keys/
remote control 28
Door lock 32
Door locking, confirmation
signals 31
"Door locks" 30, 31, 83
Doors
– manual operation 32
– remote control 29
DOT Quality Grades 254
Downhill driving assistance,
refer to HDC 98
Draft-free ventilation 118
Drinks holder, refer to Cup
holders 127
Drive for navigation DVDs 174
"Driver's door only" 30
Driver's seat, calibrating 55
"Driver's seat climate"
56
Dr
iving lamps, refer to Parking
lamps/low beams 110
Driving on poor roads 144
Driving route, refer to
Displaying route 163
Driving stability control
systems 96
Driving through water 140
Driving tips, refer to General
driving notes 138
Dry air, refer to Cooling
function 117
Drying the air, refer to Cooling
function 117
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 96
– indicator lamp 13, 97
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control 97
– activating 97
– indicator lamp 97
"DVD"
– for DVD system in rear 206
– in DVD changer 194
DVD
– DVD changer 193
– DVD system in rear 204
– player for navigation
DVD 174
DVD changer 193
– adjusting brightness 196
– adjusting contrast 196
– audio and video
playback 194
– audio playback 197
– chapter selection 198
– controls 193
– DVD audio content 198
– DVD control 194
– DVD country codes 194
– DVD-specific menu 197
– fast forward 195
– filling 193
– installation position 193
– malfunctions 194
– removing DVDs 193
– reverse 195
– selecting audio
language 198
– selecting language 196
– selecting subtitles 196
– selecting title 197
– selecting viewing angle 197
– skip chapter 195
– tone control 195, 198
– zoom
196
"DVD form
at"
– for DVD system in rear 209
– in DVD changer 196
DVD for navigation 148
DVD system in rear 204
– CD/DVD player 205
– connecting headphones 205
– controls 204
– displaying images from CD/
DVD 212
– DVD country codes 206
– external device 215
– information on CD/DVD
player 214
– playing audio tracks from
CD/DVD 210
– playing video from CD/
DVD 206
– remote control 205
– switching on/off 206
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
302
Dynamic Performance
Control 97
"Dynamic route" in
navigation 161
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 96
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC 97
E
Easy entry/exit 58
Eject button, refer to Buttons
on the CD player 174
Electrical malfunction
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 72
– door lock 32
– driver's door 32
– fuel filler door 244
– glass sunroof, electric 46
– liftgate 33
– panorama glass sunroof 44
– parking brake 69
Electric seat 49
Electronic brake-force
distribution 96
Electronic oil level check 260
Emergency operation, refer to
Manual operation
– door lock 32
– driver's door 32
– fuel filler door 244
– liftgate 33
– transmission lock, automatic
transmission 72
Emergency request 279
Emergency services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 280
"Enabled services" 241
"Enabled TeleServices" 238
"End call" 228
Engine
– breaking-in 138
– data 286
– oil temperature 79
– overheated, refer to Coolant
temperature 79
– speed 286
– starting 66
– starting, with comfort
access 40
– switching off 66
Engine compartment 259
Engine coolant 262
Engine oil
– adding 261
– additives, refer to Approved
engine oils 262
– approved engine oil 262
– checking oil level 260
– electronic oil level check 260
– temperature 79
Engine oil temperature 79
Engine output, refer to Engine
data 286
Engine overheating, refer to
Coolant temperature 79
Engine speed 286
Engine starting, refer to
Starting engine 66
E
ntering country of
destination 151
Entering destination 151
Entering house number or
intersection 152
Entering intersection 152
Entering street 152
"Entertainment" 174
Entertainment sound output
on/off 175
"Equalizer", refer to Tone
control 177
Equalizer, refer to Tone
control 177
"ESN" 184
ESP Electronic Stability
Program, refer to DSC
Dynamic Stability
Control 96
Event Data Recorders 264
Exhaust system, refer to Hot
exhaust system 139
Exterior mirrors 57
– adjusting 57
– automatic dimming
feature 58
– automatic heating 58
– folding in and out 57
– tilting down passenger-side
exterior mirror 58
External audio device 127
– refer to AUX-In
connection 200
Eye for tow-starting and
towing, refer to Tow
fitting 281
F
Fader, refer to Tone
control 176
Failure messages, refer to
Check Control 85
False alarm, refer to Avoiding
unintentional alarms 39
Fastening safety belts, refer to
Safety belts 54
– warning lamp 55
Fastest route for
navigation 160
Fast forward
– CD changer 190
– CD player 190
– DVD changer 195
"Fast route" in navigation 160
Fault displays, refer to Check
Control 85
Filler neck for washer fluid 75
First aid, refer to First-aid
kit 279
First-aid kit 279
Fixing system, adaptive 133
Flashing during locking/
unlocking, refer to Setting
confirmation signals 31
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Reference
303
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Flat tire
– changing wheels 275
– compact wheel 275
– Flat Tire Monitor 100
– run-flat tires 101, 103, 256
– TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 101
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 100
Fluid reservoir, refer to Filler
neck for washer fluid 75
"FM", reception
range 175, 178
FM, waveband 178
Fog lamps 112
– indicator lamp 13, 112
Folding display screen open/
closed, DVD system in
rear 204
Folding rear seat backrest 132
Footbrake, refer to Braking
safely 140
Footwell lamps 113
For your own safety 5
4-wheel drive system, refer to
xDrive 97
Front airbags 105
Front passenger airbags 105
– deactivating 106
– refer to Exception of front
passenger seat 61
Front seat adjustment 49
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 100
– false alarms 100
– indicating a flat tire 101
– initializing the system 100
– snow chains 257
– system limits 100
– warning lamp 101
Fuel 245
– capacity 290
– display 80
– high-quality brands 245
– quality 245
– saving 138
– specifications 245
Fuel clock, refer to Fuel
gauge 80
Fuel consumption display
– computer, average fuel
consumption 80
Fuel display, refer to Fuel
gauge 80
Fuel filler door 244
– closing 24
4
– opening 244
– releasing manually 244
Fuses 278
G
Garage door opener, refer to
Integrated universal remote
control 123
Gasoline, refer to Required
fuel 245
Gasoline display, refer to Fuel
gauge 80
Gearshifts, automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 71
General driving
notes 138, 139
Glass sunroof
– convenience operation from
outside 32
– convenience operation with
comfort access 40
– remote control 30
Glass sunroof, electric 45
– moving manually 46
– opening, closing 45
– power interruption 46
– raising 45
Glove compartment 126
– lighting 126
GPS navigation, refer to
Navigation system 148
Grills, refer to Ventilation 118
Grills of the automatic climate
control 114
Gross vehicle weight, refer to
Weights 289
H
Handbrake, refer to Parking
brake 67
Hands-free system, refer to
Microphone 14
Hand washing 266
Have diesel exhaust fluid
refilled 246
Hazard warning flashers 15
HDC Hill Descent Control 98
"HD radio" 181
HD radio, refer to High
Definition Radio 181
Head airbags 105
Headlamp control,
automatic 110
Headlamp flasher 73
Headlamps 110
– cleaning, refer to Washer/
wiper system 74
– replacing bulbs 269
Head Light, refer to Adaptive
Head Light 112
Head restraints 52
– sitting safely 48
"Head-Up Display" 108
Head-Up Display 107
Heated
– mirrors 58
– rear window 116
– seats 55, 56
– steering wheel 59
Heating 114
– exterior mirrors 58
– interior 114
– rear window 116
– residual heat 118
– seats 55, 56
– steering wheel 59
Heating with engine switched
off, refer to Residual
heat 118
Heavy cargo, refer to Securing
cargo 143
Height, refer to
Dimensions 287
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
304
Height adjustment
– seats 49
– steering wheel 58
High beams 73, 112
– headlamp flasher 73
– indicator lamp 13
High Definition Radio 181
High-pressure cleaning
jets 266
Highs, refer to Treble and
bass 175
High water, refer to Driving
through water 140
Highway, refer to Route
criteria 160
Hill Descent Control HDC 98
Hills 140
Holder for cups 127
Home address 160
"Home address" in
navigation 160
Homepage 4
Hood 258
Horn 10
Hot exhaust system 139
"Hour memo" 88
"House number" for
destination entry 153
Hydraulic brake assistant,
refer to Brake assistant 96
Hydroplaning 139
I
IBOC, refer to High Definition
Radio 181
Ice, refer to Outside
temperature warning 78
Ice warning, refer to Outside
temperature warning 78
ID3 tag, refer to Information on
track 188
Identification, tire 257
Identification mark, run-flat
tires 256
iDrive 16
– assistance window 20
– changing language 90
– changing menu page 19
– changing settings 88
– changing units of measure
and display type 89
– confirming selection or
entry 19
– controller 16
– controls 16
– displays, menus 17
– selecting menu item 19
– setting brightness 89
– setting date 89
– setting time 88
– start menu 17
– status information 20
– symbols 18
Ignition 65
– switched off 65
– switched on 65
Ignition key, refer to Keys/
remote control 28
Ignition key position 1, refer to
Radio readiness 65
Ignition key position 2, refer to
Ignition on 65
Ignition lock 65
– starting engine with comfort
access 40
Indicator/warning lamps 13
– active steering 104
– airbags 107
– DSC 13, 97
– DTC 97
– fasten safety belt 55
– Flat Tire Monitor 101
– fog lamps 13
– TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 103
Individual air distribution 117
Individually programmable
buttons on steering
wheel 59
Individual settings, refer to
Personal Profile 28
I
nflation pressure, refer to Tire
inflation pressure 249
Inflation pressure monitoring
– refer to FTM Flat Tire
Monitor 100
– refer to TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 101
Information
– on another location 156
– on country 156
– on current position 156
– on destination location 156
"Information on
destination" 157
"Info sources" 83
Initializing
– Flat Tire Monitor 100
– refer to Power failure 278
– refer to Setting date 89
– refer to Setting time 88
– seat, mirror and steering
wheel memory 50
Installation location
– drive for navigation DVD 148
– DVD changer 193
– mobile phone 127
Instructions for navigation
system, refer to Voice
instructions 165
Instrument cluster
– refer to Cockpit 10
– refer to Instrument panel 12
Instrument illumination, refer
to Instrument lighting 113
Instrument lighting 113
Instrument panel 12
– refer to Cockpit 10
Integrated key 28
Integrated universal remote
control 123
Interesting destination for
navigation 156
"Interim time" 87
Interior lamps 113
– switching on with remote
control 30
Interior motion sensor 39
– switching off 39
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Reference
305
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Interior rearview mirror 58
– automatic dimming
feature 58
– compass 124
Intermittent mode of the
wipers 74
J
Jacking points 276
Joystick
– refer to iDrive 16
– refer to Selector lever,
selecting transmission
positions 70
Jump starting 280
K
Keyless-Go, refer to Comfort
access 39
Keyless opening and closing,
refer to Comfort access 39
Key Memory, refer to Personal
Profile 28
"Keypad" 230
Keys 28
– key-related settings, refer to
Personal Profile 28
Kick-down, automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 71
Knock control 245
L
Lamps, refer to Parking lamps/
low beams 110
Lamps and bulbs 269
"Language / Units" 89, 90
– for navigation 149
"Language" for DVD system
in rear 208, 209
"Languages" 90
– for navigation 149, 165
Lashing eyes, refer to
Securing cargo 143
Last destinations, refer to
Destination list 157
"Last seat pos." 51
LATCH child restraint fixing
system 62
Leather care 267
LEDs light-emitting
diodes 270
Length, refer to
Dimensions 287
License plate lamp, replacing
bulbs 272, 275
Liftgate 33, 35
– adjusting opening
height 34, 36, 37
– automatic operation 34, 37
– closing 34, 37
– locking and unlocking from
inside 32
– opening from inside 33, 36
– opening from outside 33, 36
– opening manually 33, 36
Light-emitting diodes
LEDs 270
Lighter 129
Lighter socket 129
"Lighting" 73, 111
Lighting
– instruments 113
– lamps and bulbs 269
– of the vehicle, refer to
Lamps 110
Light switch 110
"Limit" 87
Load 141
Loadin
g 141
– securing cargo 143
– stowing cargo 142
– vehicle 141
Load securing equipment,
refer to Securing cargo 143
"Lock after driving" 33
Lock buttons in the doors,
refer to Locking 33
Locking
– from inside 32
– setting confirmation
signals 31
– using remote control 29
– without key, refer to Comfort
access 39
Locking and unlocking doors
– from inside 32
– setting confirmation
signals 31
Locking without key, refer to
Comfort access 39
Low beams 110
– automatic 110
Lower back support, refer to
Lumbar support 50
Lows, refer to Treble and
bass 175
Lug bolts 276
– tightening torque, refer to
After mounting 277
– wrench 276
Luggage compartment
capacity, refer to Cargo bay
capacity 289
Luggage rack, refer to Roof-
mounted luggage rack 143
Lumbar support 50
M
M+S tires, refer to Winter
tires 257
"Main menu" for DVD system
in rear 209
Maintenance
– refer to Service and
Warranty Information
Booklet for US models 263
– refer to Service
requirements 82
– refer to Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models 263
Maintenance system 263
Malfunction
– door lock 32
– driver's door 32
– fuel filler door 244
– glass sunroof, electric 46
– liftgate 33
– panorama glass sunroof 44
– parking brake 69
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
306
Malfunction warnings, refer to
Check Control 85
Manual air distribution 116
Manual BMW Teleservice
call 237
"Manual" in radio mode 179
Manually releasing
transmission lock 72
Manual mode, automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 71
Manual operation
– door lock 32
– driver's door 32
– fuel filler door 244
– transmission lock, automatic
transmission 72
Map
– changing scale 164
– destination entry 155
"Map direction of travel" 164
"Map facing north" 164
Map facing north 164
Master key, refer to Keys/
remote control 28
Maximum cooling 117
Maximum speed
– for winter tires 257
– with compact wheel 277
Memory, refer to Seat, mirror
and steering wheel
memory 50
"Menu"
– for DVD system in
rear 207, 209
– in DVD changer 195, 197
Menus, refer to iDrive 16
Message list for traffic
information 167
Microfilter 119
Microphone
– for mobile phone 14
– for telephone 14
– for voice activation
system 14
Mirror dimming feature 58
Mirrors 57
– automatic curb monitor 58
– exterior mirrors 57
– folding in and out 57
– heating 58
– interior rearview mirror 58
– memory, refer to Seat, mirror
and steering wheel
memory 50
"Missed calls" 228
Missed calls 229
Mobile phone
– accepted calls 229
– adjusting volume 226
– calling 227
– e
nding call 227
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest, front 127
– missed calls 229
– operation via iDrive 226
– redialing 229
– refer to separate operating
instructions
– Top 8 229
– touch tone dialing 230
Monitor, refer to iDrive 16
Monitoring tire pressure, refer
to FTM Flat Tire
Monitor 100
"Monitor on / off" 59
MP3, refer to Compressed
audio files 187
Multifunction steering wheel,
refer to Buttons on steering
wheel 11
Multifunction switch
– refer to Turn signals/
headlamp flasher/high
beams 73
– refer to Washer/wiper
system 74
Music track, refer to
Tracks 188
"Mute on / off" 59
N
"Navigation" 80, 156
Navigation destination
– entering manually 151, 153
– home address 160
– selecting via map 155
Navigation drive, installation
location 148
Navigation DVD 148
– player 174
Navigation instructions, refer
to Switching voice
instructions on/off 165
Navigation system 148
– address book 158
– changing route 166
– destination entry 150
– destination guidance in
assistance window 148
– destination list 157
– displaying current
position 169
– displaying route 163
– ending/continuing
destination guidance 162
– entering a destination
manually 151, 153
– last destinations 157
– navigation DVD 148
– opening 150
– route list 164
– searching for a special
destination 156
– selecting destination using
information 156
– selecting destination via
map 155
– selecting route criteria 160
– starting destination
guidance 162
– switching off, refer to
Ending/continuing
destination guidance 162
– voice instructions 165
– volume adjustment 166
"Navigation voice
instructions" 59
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Reference
307
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Neck support, refer to Head
restraints 52
"New address" for
navigation 158
"New destination" 151, 155
New remote control 28
"New route" 166
New wheels and tires 256
"Next entertainment
source" 59
Nozzles, refer to Windshield
washer nozzles 75
"NTSC color" for DVD system
in rear 216
Nylon rope, refer to Tow-
starting and towing 281
O
OBD socket 264
Octane ratings, refer to Fuel
specifications 245
Odometer 78
Oil
– additives, refer to Approved
engine oils 262
– approved engine oils 262
– consumption, refer to
Checking engine oil
level 260
– level 260
– refilling, refer to Adding
engine oil 261
Oil change interval, refer to
Service requirements 82
"On a new destination" for
navigation 156
Onboard computer, refer to
iDrive 16
Onboard toolkit 269
"On destination" 156
"On location" 156
Opening and closing
– comfort access 39
– from inside 32
– panorama glass sunroof 43
– using remote control 29
– using the door lock 32
Operation by voice for mobile
phone 231
– adjusting volume 232
– canceling 231
– correcting phone
number 232
– dialing phone number 232
– placing a call 232
– redialing 233
– voice commands 231
– voice phone book 232
Operation on poor roads 144
"Options" 239, 240
Orientation menu, refer to
Start menu 17
Output, refer to Engine
data 286
Outside air, refer to AUC
Automatic recirculated-air
control 117
Outside temperature
display 78
– changing unit of measure 89
Outside temperature
warning 78
"Overview" for DVD system in
rear 213
P
Panic mode 30
Panorama glass sunroof 42
– moving manually 44
– power failure 44
– raising, opening, closing 43
Park Distance Control PDC 91
"Parked car operation" 121
"Parked car ventilation" 121
Parked-car ventilation 121
– activating activation
time 122
– preselecting activation
times 122
– switching on and off
directly 121
Parking, vehicle 66
Parking aid
– refer to PDC Park Distance
Control 91
– refer to Rear view camera 93
Parking assistant, refer to
PDC Park Distance
Control 91
Parking brake 67
– Automatic Hold 67
– indicator lamp 13
– releasing manually 67
– releasing manually in case of
an electrical malfunction 69
– setting manually 67
Parking lamps 110
Parking with Automatic
Hold 68
Parts and accessories 6
"Passenger's seat climate" 56
Passenger-side exterior
mirror, tilting down 58
Pathway lighting 111
"Pause" for DVD system in
rear 210
Paying attention to speed 257
"PDC" 92
PDC Park Distance Control 91
Personal Profile 28
"Perspective" 164
Phone book 226
– creating and editing voice
phone book 232
Phone numbers
– deleting from phone
book 229
– dialing 227
– most recent numbers 229
– selecting in phone book 229
– Top 8 229
"Photo" for DVD-System in
rear 206, 212
Pinch protection system
– glass sunroof, electric 45
– panorama glass
sunroof 43
– power windows 42
Plasters, refer to First-aid
kit 279
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
308
"Play"
– for DVD system in rear 210
– in Satellite radio mode 185
Playing videos, DVD system in
rear 206
Plug-in unit for remote
control, refer to Ignition
lock 65
Position
– displaying 169
– storing, refer to Storing
current position 158
Power failure 278
Power windows, refer to
Windows 41
Preselecting activation times
of parked-car
ventilation 122
"Presets"
– displaying in radio mode 178
– in Satellite radio 185
Pressure, tires 249
Pressure monitoring of tires,
refer to TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 101
Programmable buttons on
steering wheel 59
Programmable memory
buttons 21
Protective function, refer to
Pinch protection system
– glass sunroof, electric 45
– panorama glass sunroof 43
– windows 42
R
Radio
– autostore 179
– controls 174
– High Definition Radio 181
– listen to station 178
– sampling stations 179
– satellite radio 184
– selecting frequency
manually 179
– selecting
waveband 174, 178
– station search 179
– station with the best
reception 179
– storing stations 180
– switching on/off 174
– tone control 175
– volume 175
– Weather Band 183
Radio key, refer to Keys/
remote control 28
Radio position, refer to Radio
readiness 65
Radio readiness 65
– switched off 65
– switched on 65
– with comfort access 40
Rain sensor 74
"Random"
– for DVD system in rear 211
– refer to Random
sequence 190
"Random all"
– for DVD system in rear 212
– in audio mode 190
"Random directory"
– for DVD system in rear 212
– in audio mode 190
Random sequence 190
"RDS" Radio Data
System 181
Reading lamps 113
Rear automatic climate
control
– air flow 120
– switching off 120
"Rear climate control" 120
"Rear enabled" 204
Rear entertainment, refer to
DVD system in rear 204
Rear lamps, refer to Tail
lamps 270, 273
– replacing bulbs 270, 273
Rear seat backrest,
folding 132
Rear seats
– adjusting 53
– adju
sting head restraints 53
– folding over backrest 132
– head restraint adjustment 53
– heating 56, 57
Rear socket 130
Rear ventilation 119
– automatic climate control in
rear 119
– 3rd row seats 119
Rear view camera 93
– cleaning 96
– displays on Control
Display 95
– driver assistance
functions 93
– switching off 93
– switching on 93
Rearview mirror 57
Rear window
– heating 116
– replacing wiper blade 269
– windshield wiper 75, 141
Rear window safety switch 42
Rear window wiper, replacing
wiper blade 269
"Received calls" 228
Recent numbers in mobile
phone 229
Reception level of mobile
phone, refer to Status
information 20
Recirculated-air mode 117
– air recirculation 117
– AUC Automatic
recirculated-air control 117
Reclining seat, refer to
Seats 49
Recording times, refer to
Stopwatch 87
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Reference
309
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
"Redial" for mobile phone 228
Reflectors, refer to Tail
lamps 270, 273
Refueling 244
Releasing
– hood 258
– refer to Unlocking 40
"Relock door if not
opened" 32
Remaining distance, refer to
Cruising range 80
Remaining distance to
destination, refer to
Computer 80
Remote control 28
– comfort access 39
– DVD system in rear 205
– garage door opener 123
– liftgate 30
– malfunction 31, 41
– replacing battery 41
Removing condensation on
the windows 116
"Repeat directory"
– for DVD system in
rear 210, 212
– in audio mode 190
"Repeat" for DVD system in
rear 211
"Repeat track"
– for DVD system in
rear 210, 212
– in audio mode 190
Replacement fuses 278
Replacement of tires 256
– changing wheels 275
– new wheels and tires 256
Replacing bulbs, refer to
Lamps and bulbs 269
Replacing wheels/tires, refer
to New wheels and tires 256
Replacing wiper blades 269
Reporting an accident, refer to
Initiating an emergency
request 279
Reporting safety defects 7
Reserve warning, refer to Fuel
gauge 80
"Reset" 101, 103
– DVD changer 196
– DVD system in rear 209
– the stopwatch 87
– tone settings 177
Reset, refer to Resetting tone
settings 177
Residual heat
118
R
estraint systems
– for children 61
– refer to Safety belts 54
Retreaded tires 256
"Return"
– DVD changer 197
– DVD system in rear 209
Reverse
– CD changer 190
– CD player 190
– DVD changer 195
Reverse gear, automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 71
Road map 164
"Roadside Assistance" 236
Roadside Assistance 280
Roadside assistance 236
Roadside parking lamps 112
Roller sun blinds 126
Roll-up cover 130
Roof load capacity 289
Roof-mounted luggage
rack 143
Rope, refer to Tow-starting
and towing 281
Rotary pushbutton, refer to
iDrive 16
Route 160
– changing 166
– displaying 163
– displaying arrow display 163
– displaying map view 164
– displaying roads and towns/
cities 164
– displaying towns/cities 164
– list 164
– selecting 160
– selecting criteria 160
RSC Runflat System
Component, refer to Run-
flat tires 256
Runflat System Component
RSC, refer to Run-Flat
Tires 256
Run-flat tires 256
– continuing driving with a
damaged tire 101, 103
– flat tire 101, 103
– new wheels and tires 256
– tire inflation
pressure 101, 103, 249
– tire replacement 256
S
Safety 5
Safety belts 54
– damage 55
– sitting safely 48
– warning lamp 55
Safety belt tensioners
– refer to Airbags 105
– refer to Safety belts 54
Safety systems
– ABS Antilock Brake
System 96
– airbags 105
– driving stability control
systems 96
– DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 96
– safety belts 54
Safety tires, refer to Run-flat
tires 256
"SAT" 175, 184
Satellite radio 184
– displaying additional
information 185
– enabling 184
– selecting channel 185
– storing channel 185
"Scan"
– for DVD system in rear 211
– sampling stations in radio
mode 179
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
310
Scan
– CD changer 189
– CD player 189
– radio 179
"Scan all"
– for DVD system in rear 212
– in audio mode 189
"Scan directory"
– for DVD system in rear 212
– in audio mode 189
Screen, refer to iDrive 16
Screw thread for tow
fitting 281
SDARS, refer to Satellite
radio 184
"Seat heater distribution" 56
Seat heating 55, 56
Seats 49
– adjusting 49
– adjusting electrically 49
– adjusting manually 49
– backrest width 50
– heating 55, 56
– in rear 53
– lumbar support 50
– memory, refer to Seat, mirror
and steering wheel
memory 50
– 2nd row seats 53
– shoulder support 50
– sitting safely 48
– storing the setting 50
– thigh support 49, 50
– 3rd row seats 54
– ventilation, refer to Active
seat ventilation and Seat
heating 56
2nd row seats 53
Securing load
– refer to Securing cargo 143
– with ski bag, refer to
Securing cargo 134
"Select as
destination" 156, 239
"Select current speed" 87
Selecting audio source 174
Selecting country for
navigation 151
Selecting frequency
manually 179
Selecting menu items 19
Selecting new scale for
navigation 164
Selector lever, automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 70
Selector lever lock, refer to
Reverse gear 71
Self-leve
ling suspension 100
Service, refer to Roadside
Assistance 280
Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for
US models 263
"Service Info" 83, 237
Service interval indicator, refer
to Service requirements 82
"Service Request" 230, 237
"Service
requirements" 83, 237, 261
Service requirements 82
– also refer to CBS Condition
Based Service 263
"SET"
– DVD changer 195
– rear seat entertainment 207
"Set" on trip computer 82
"Settings" 241
– when unlocking 30
Settings
– changing on Control
Display 88
– clock, 12h/24h mode 89
– configuring, refer to
Personal Profile 28
Setting speed limit 87
Setting time, refer to
Preselecting activation
times 122
Shifting, automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 71
Shift paddles 71
Short commands of voice
activation system 291
Shortest route in navigation,
refer to Selecting route 160
"Short route" in
navigation 160
Shoulder support 50
"Show current position" 155
"Show destination
position" 155
Shuffled, refer to Random
– CD changer 190
– CD player 190
Side airbags 105
Side marker lamps, replacing
bulbs 270
Signal horn, refer to Horn 10
Sitting safely 48
– with airbags 48
– with head restraint 48
– with safety belts 48
Ski bag
134
Slide show, refer
to Displaying
images 212
Sliding/tilt sunroof
– refer to Glass sunroof,
electric 45
– refer to Panorama glass
sunroof 42
Slope assistant, refer to
Starting assistant 99
Smokers' package, refer to
Ashtray 128
Snap-in adapter 233
Snow chains 257
Socket for Onboard
Diagnostics interface 264
Socket for remote control,
refer to Ignition lock 65
Sockets, refer to Connecting
electrical devices 129
Soft closure aid, refer to
Automatic soft closing 33
Song search, refer to
Sampling tracks 189
SOS, refer to Initiating an
emergency request 279
Spare fuses 278
Spare remote control 28
Spare wheel
– refer to Changing
wheels 275
– refer to Compact wheel 275
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Reference
311
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Special oils, refer to Approved
engine oils 262
Specified oil grades, refer to
Approved engine oils 262
Speed
– with compact wheel 277
– with winter tires 257
Speed-dependent
volume 176
Speed limit warning, refer to
Speed limit 87
Speedometer 12
"Speed volume", refer to Tone
control 176
Sport program, automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 71
Stability control, refer to
Driving stability control
systems 96
"Standard" for DVD system in
rear 209, 216
"Star button" 59
Star button 59
Start/Stop button 65
"Start" for stopwatch 87
Starting, refer to Starting
engine 66
Starting assistance, refer to
Jump starting 280
Starting assistant 99
Starting difficulties, jump
starting 280
Starting off on slopes, refer to
Starting assistant 99
Start menu, iDrive 17
"Start service" 236
– with BMW Assist 239
"State / Province" for
destination entry 151
"State inspection" 84
Station, refer to Radio 178
Status of this Owner's Manual
at time of printing 5
Steam cleaners 266
Steering wheel
– adjusting 58
– automatic adjustment, refer
to Steering wheel
memory 50
– buttons on steering
wheel 11
– easy entry/exit 58
– heating 59
– memory 50
– programmable buttons 59
Steering with variable ratio,
refer to Active steering 104
Steptronic, refer to Sport
program and manual mode
M/S 71
"Stop" the stopwatch 87
"Stopwatch"
87
Stopwatch 87
Stor
age compartments 127
"Store"
– in Satellite radio 186
– with the radio 180
"Store in address book" for
navigation 158
Storing current position 158
Storing radio stations 180
Storing sitting position, refer
to Seat, mirror and steering
wheel memory 50
Storing tires 257
Storing vehicle 268
Storing your vehicle 268
"Street" for destination
entry 152
"Subtitles" in DVD system in
rear 209
Summer tires, refer to Wheels
and tires 249
Switches, refer to Cockpit 10
Switching cooling function on
and off 117
Switching off engine 66
Switching on
– audio 174
– CD changer 174
– CD player 174
– radio 174
Switching on hour signal 88
Swiveling headlamps, refer to
Adaptive Head Light 112
Symbols 4
– indicator/warning lamps 13
– navigation system 168
– traffic information with
navigation system 166
T
Tachometer 79
"Tailgate" 34, 37
Tailgate 35
Tail lamps 270, 273
– replacing bulbs 270, 273
Tank contents, refer to
Capacities 290
Target cursor for
navigation 155
Technical alterations, refer to
For your own safety 5
Technical data 286
Telematics, refer to
BMW TeleServices,
BMW Assist 235
Telephone
– refer to Mobile phone 220
– refer to separate operating
instructions
"Telephone list" 59
Temperature
– adjusting in upper body
region 116
– adjusting with automatic
climate control 116, 120
– changing units of
measure 89
– refer to Coolant
temperature 79
Temperature display
– outside temperature 78
– setting units 89
– temperature warning 78
Temperature warning 78
Tempomat, refer to Cruise
control 75
The individual vehicle 5
Third brake lamp, refer to
Center brake lamp 272, 275
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
312
3rd row seats 54
Tightening torque of the lug
bolts, refer to After
mounting 277
Tilt alarm sensor, switching
off 39
Tilting down passenger-side
exterior mirror 58
"Time / Date" 88
"Time format" 89
Timer, refer to Preselecting
activation times 122
"Timer 2" for parked-car
ventilation 122
"Timer 1" for parked-car
ventilation 122
Tire inflation pressures 249
– checking 249
– monitoring, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 100
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 101
Tire Quality Grading 254
Tires
– age 254
– air loss 101, 103
– breaking-in 138
– changing 256
– condition 255
– damage 255
– flat tire, refer to Changing
wheels 275
– inflation pressure 249
– inflation pressure
monitoring, refer to FTM
Flat Tire Monitor 100
– new wheels and tires 256
– pressure loss 101, 103
– pressure monitoring, refer to
TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 101
– replacing 275
– retreaded tires 256
– run-flat tires 256
– size 254
– tread 255
– wear indicators 255
– wheel/tire combination 256
– winter tires 257
"Title" for DVD system in
rear 209
TMC station, refer to Traffic
information 166
Tone in audio mode
– adjusting 175
– middle setting 177
"Tone" in DVD system in
rear 209
Tone on locking/unlocking 31
To
ols, refer to Onboard
toolkit 269
"Top 8" for mobile phone 228
Torque
– engine 286
– lug bolts, refer to After
mounting 277
Touch tone dialing 230
Tow fitting 281
Towing 281
– tow fitting 281
"Town / City" for destination
entry 151
Town/city for destination
entry 151
Tow-starting 281, 282
"TPM" 102
TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 101
– resetting system 102
– system limits 102
– warning lamp 103
Tracks
– finding 189
– random sequence 190
– sampling, scan 189
Traction-assist feature, refer
to DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 96
Traction control, refer to
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 96
Traffic congestion
– bypassing 169
– displaying traffic
information 166
Traffic information for
navigation
– depiction in route map 167
– displaying 167
– during destination
guidance 169
– switching on/off 166
– symbols 168
Transmission
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 70
– manually releasing
transmission lock on
automatic transmission with
Steptronic 72
Transmission positions, refer
to Automatic transmission
with Steptronic 70
Transporting children
safely 61
Transport securing device,
refer to Securing cargo 143
Tread depth, refer to Minimum
tread depth 255
Treble, refer to Tone
control 175
"Treble / Bass" for DVD
system in rear 20
9
"Trip computer" 81
Trip computer 81
Trip-distance counter, refer to
Trip odometer 78
Trip odometer 78
Turning circle, refer to
Dimensions 287
Turn signals 73
– indicator lamp 12
– replacing bulbs 270, 273
U
Ultra-low sulfur diesel 245
Uniform Tire Quality Grading/
UTQR 254
"Units" 89
Units
– average fuel
consumption 89
– temperature 89
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Reference
313
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Universal garage-door
opener, refer to Integrated
universal remote
control 123
Universal remote control 123
"Unlock button" 30
Unlocking
– from inside 33
– liftgate 30
– setting behavior 30
– using remote control 30
– without key, refer to Comfort
access 39
Unlocking and locking doors
using remote control 30
Unlocking without key, refer to
Comfort access 39
"Unlock rear menu" in DVD
system in the rear 204
"Update services" 238, 240
USB audio interface 201
Used batteries
– refer to Disposal 277
– refer to Replacing battery 41
V
Valve screw caps, refer to
After mounting 277
Vehicle
– battery 277
– breaking-in 138
– loading 141
– measurements, refer to
Dimensions 287
– parking 66
– storing 268
– weights 289
"Vehicle / Tires" when
unlocking 30
Vehicle care, refer to Care 265
Vehicle jack 276
– jacking points 276
Vehicle position, refer to
Displaying current
position 169
Ventilation 118
– draft-free 118
– in the rear 119
– rear automatic climate
control 121
– 3rd row seats 119
– while stationary 121
Vent outlets of automatic
climate control 114
Vents, refer to Ventilation 118
"Vent settings" 117
"Video settings" for DVD
system in rear 208
Voice, refer to Voice
instructions for navigation
system 165
Voice activation system 23
– short commands 291
Voice instructions for
navigation system 165
– muting 60, 165
– repeating 60, 165
– switching on/off 60, 165
– volume 166
Voice phone book 232
Volume 174
– audio sources 174
– mobile phone 226
– setting speed-
dependent 176
– voice instructions 166
Volume distribution in audio
mode
– front/rear 176
– right/left 176
Volume of warning tones 90
W
Warning lamps, refer to
Indicator and warning
lamps 13
Warning messages, refer to
Check Control 85
Warning tone, volume 90
Warning triangle 279
Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian
models 263
Washer/wiper system 74
– rain sensor 74
– washer fluid 75
– windshield washer
nozzles 75
Washer fluid 75
– capacity of the reservoir 75
Water on roads, refer to
Driving through water 140
Water penetration 266
Waveband for radio 178
"WB" 183
Wear indicators in tires, refer
to Minimum tread depth 255
Weather Band 183
Website 4
Weights 289
Wheel/tire combination, refer
to New wheels and tires 256
Wheel/tire damage 255
Wheelbase, refer to
Dimensions 287
Wheels and tires 249
Width, refer to
Dimensions 287
Windows 41
– convenience operation 30
– convenience operation from
outside 32
– convenience operation with
comfort access 40
– opening, closing 41
– pinch protection system 42
– safety switch 42
Windshield
– cleaning, refer to Washer/
wiper system 74
– defrosting, refer to
Defrosting windows 116
– displays, refer to Head-Up
Display 107
Windshield washer system
– refer to Washer/wiper
system 74
– windshield washer
nozzles 75
Windshield wipers, refer to
Washer/wiper system 74
– replacing wiper blades 269
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
314
Winter diesel 245
Winter tires 257
– storage 257
"With highways" in
navigation 160
Word matching principle for
navigation 161
Working in the engine
compartment 258
Wrenches/screwdrivers, refer
to Onboard toolkit 269
X
xDrive 97
Xenon lamps 272
– bulb changing 272
Xenon light 270
– bulb changing 270
Z
"Zoom" for DVD system in
rear 209
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
01 41 2 600 792 ue
*BL260079200U*
The Ultimate
Driving Machine
More about BMW
bmwusa.com
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 600 792 - © 09/08 BMW AG
